Ospvol12016 Auth DCBT PDF

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only
Army Code No. 71810
Capability Directorate Combat

Dismounted Close Combat
Training - Volume I
Skill at Arms - Individual Training
Operational Shooting Policy

Volume 1 - Personal Weapons
2016

Copyright & Handling Instructions
The information contained within this publication is British Crown Copyright and the intellectual
property rights belong exclusively to the Ministry of Defence (MOD). Material and information
contained in this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system and transmitted
for MOD use only
Security
This OFFICIAL document is issued for the information of such persons who need to know
its contents in the course of their duties. Any person finding this document should hand it to
a British Forces unit or to a police station for its safe return to the Ministry of Defence, Def
Sy, Main Building, Whitehall, LONDON SW1A 2HB with particulars of how it was found. The
unauthorised retention or destruction of this document may be an offence under the Official
Secrets Acts 1911 89 or other legislation.
This information is released by the United Kingdom Government to international organisations
and national governments for defence purposes only. The information must be afforded the
same degree of protection as that afforded to information of an equivalent classification
originated by the recipient organisation or nation, or as required by the recipient organisation
or nations security regulations. The information may only be disclosed within the Defence
Departments of the recipient organisation or nation, except as otherwise authorised by the UK
MOD. This information may be subject to privately owned rights.
Status
This publication has been produced under the direction and authority of the Chief of the
General Staff by Director Land Warfare in his capacity as sponsor of Army Doctrine. The
contents constitute mandatory regulations or an MOD Approved Code of Practice (ACOP)
and provide clear military information concerning the most up to date experience and best
practice available for commanders and troops to use for operations and training. If you are
prosecuted for a breach of health and safety law and it is proved that you have not followed
the relevant provisions of the ACOP, a court may find you criminally liable unless you can show
that you have complied with the requirements of health and safety legislation, since it is a
breach of this legislation which renders a person criminally liable. Breaches or omissions could
result in disciplinary action under the provisions of the Armed Forces Act. It is the individuals
responsibility to ensure that he or she is using the latest version of this publication. If in doubt
the individual should contact Combat Publications.
Amendments
Amdt No
Date
Amdt No
Date
Amdt No
Date
DISTRIBUTION
(See page v)
FOR THE ATTENTION OF ALL SCALE HOLDERS
Units requiring an increase or decrease to their scale should apply to Army Publications,
Army Media & Comm, c/o Army Headquarters, Zone 2, IDL 25, 2nd Floor Blenheim Bldg,
Marlborough Lines, ANDOVER, SP11 8HTwho will arrange for a revised distribution. Any
request to exceed the scale must be supported by a written justification which is to be
referred by Army Publications to CD Combat for approval.
ii
Army Code No. 71810
Capability Directorate Combat

Training - Volume I
Skill at Arms - Individual Training
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING POLICY

Volume 1 - Personal Weapons
Prepared under the direction

of the Chief of the General Staff
Ministry of Defence
January 2016
Crown Copyright Reserved
2016
iii
iv
FOREWORD
1.
Any person wishing to propose amendments to this pamphlet is invited to
write to Combat Publications, Waterloo Lines, WARMINSTER, BA12 0DJ. Any such
proposals will be given consideration and, if there is a requirement for them, the
appropriate amendments will be prepared and published.
2.
This pamphlet supersedes Infantry Training, Volume I, Army Operational
Shooting Policy, Volume 1 Personal Weapons 2015 (Army Code No. 71810) which
should now be destroyed.
3.
This pamphlet is also available on the British Army Electronic Battle Box
(BAeBB). Access is available via the latest edition of the Army Official Publications
DVD or via the web version on the Intranet. Access the web version through the Army
Portal, then under Reference. Follow the links to access this pamphlet under Combat.
Combat Publications is then sub-divided under the appropriate volumes.
DISTRIBUTION
(Also see notes on page vii)

Army
Infantry
Regular/Reserve Infantry Battalions and HS Battalions................
Regular/Reserve Independent/Detached Infantry Companies......
HQSASC......................................................................................
OSTT 1 & 3 Div.............................................................................
ITDU .........................................................................................
SAS Regiments.............................................................................
Other Arms and Services (Regular and Reserve)
Major Units....................................................................................
Minor Units....................................................................................
Training Centres/Schools/Training Areas/Training Teams
InfantryBattle School, Brecon.......................................................
Support Weapons School, Warminster.........................................
ITC Catterick..................................................................................
Training Team Brunei....................................................................
Army Training Regiments..............................................................
Army Foundation College..............................................................
Royal Military Academy Sandhurst................................................
RTMC .........................................................................................
All UK Training Areas....................................................................
Other Arms Schools/Training Establishments...............................
Army Training Units.......................................................................
University Officer Training Corps...................................................
30 copies each
5 copies each
40 copies
40 copies each
5 copies
30 copies each
10 copies each
3 copies each
300 copies
100 copies
160 copies
5 copies
40 copies each
40 copies
500 copies
5 copies
1 copy each
20 copies each
10 copies each
5 copies each
v
Cadet Training Teams....................................................................

BATSUB........................................................................................
BATUS .........................................................................................
BATUK .........................................................................................
Royal Navy and Royal Marines
Royal Navy
Royal Naval Air Stations................................................................
Her Majestys Ships.......................................................................
Fleet Protection Group..................................................................
HMS Raleigh.................................................................................
Royal Marines
Commandos Royal Marine............................................................
Independent Companies...............................................................
CTC RM.........................................................................................
SBS
.........................................................................................
RMR .........................................................................................
RAF and RAF Regiment
RAF
RAF Cranwell................................................................................
All SPFS........................................................................................
Joint Nuclear Biological and Chemical Regiment..........................
RAF Regiment
RAF Honington..............................................................................
Regular/Auxillary Squadrons.........................................................
vi
1 copy each
2 copies
10 copies
10 copies
2 copies each
2 copies each
7 copies
5 copies
50 copies each
5 copies each
200 copies
5 copies
2 copies each
10 copies
5 copies each
2 copies
150 copies each
2 copies each
Notes:
1.
The previous system of A to F scaling is being phased out for GSPs as new or
revised publications are issued. Units will in future receive a specific initial entitlement
as decided by the sponsor.
2.
Requests for additional copies must be fully justified and are to be made to
Army Media Comm (AMC), Publications in the first instance. Requests will fall into one
of three categories and are to be specified:
a. Replacement Issue. To bring units back up to entitlement as a result of
loss or damage.
b. Supplementary Issue. This applies when a units role or circumstance
changes necessitating an increase to the original entitlement.
c. New Issue. This is where a unit has not previously been scaled for a
particular publication.
3.
Units are reminded that all publications are accountable documents and their
issue and receipt should be the responsibility of a nominated officer or SNCO.
vii
viii
CONTENTS
Page
Foreword ....................................................................................................... v
Distribution...................................................................................................... v
References And Associated Publications........................................................ xii
Introduction...................................................................................................... xiii
CHAPTER 1
Operational Shooting Policy and its Implementation (Personal Weapons)..... 1-1
CHAPTER 2
Management of Shooting Training (Personal Weapons)................................. 2-1
CHAPTER 3
The Rifle ....................................................................................................... 3-1
CHAPTER 4
The Light Support Weapon (LSW).................................................................. 4-1
CHAPTER 5
Infantry Section Designated Marksman (SDM (LSW)).................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6
Sharpshooter Rifle 7.62MM L129A1............................................................... 6-1
CHAPTER 7
The Light Machine Gun (LMG)........................................................................ 7-1
CHAPTER 8
Service PistoL.................................................................................................. 8-1
CHAPTER 9
Reserved
CHAPTER 10
Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training........................................................ 10-1
ix
Page

CHAPTER 11
Live Firing Tactical Training (Personal Weapons)........................................... 11-1

CHAPTER 12
Ammunition Scales (Personal Weapons)........................................................ 12-1
CHAPTER 13
Operational Shooting Competitions................................................................. 13-1
CHAPTER 14
Advanced Operational Marksmanship Assessments...................................... 14-1
REFERENCES AND ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS

For the latest edition and/or amendments of each publication see Catalogue of Army
Publications Parts 1 and 2, Army Code No. 12123.
References
Code No.
Title
A
71855
DCC Training Volume IV,
Ranges, Pamphlet No. 21, Training Regulations
for Armoured Fighting Vehicles, Infantry Weapons
and Pyrotechnics.
B
71807 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms
(Personal Weapons), The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm)

System (Rifle, Light Support Weapon and
Carbine) and Associated Equipment.
C
71811 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms (Personal

Weapons), Light Machine Gun.
D
72014
DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms
(Personal Weapons), Sharpshooter Assault Rifle
7.62mm L129A1
E
71996
DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms

(Personal Weapons), General Service Pistol
L131A1.
F
71850
Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 2,
Section & Platoon Weapons.
G
71852
Operational Shooting Policy, Volume 3,
Support Weapons.
xi
xii
INTRODUCTION
1.
Aim. The aim of the OSP is: To train all personnel and maintain them at
a standard where they can apply marksmanship principles and are capable in the
application of effective small arms fire in accordance with their operational role.
2.
Purpose. The purpose of the OSP is to detail a progressive regime of shoots
designed to introduce novice firers to shooting, to build their confidence and skills and
then to train the battle shot for likely operational tasks. It also provides a means to
assess whether minimum standards are being achieved in order to allow the individual
firer and the chain of command to take appropriate action. Marksmanship and the
effective application of fire are no longer the preserve of the Infantry. In the hybrid
nature of the modern operational environment, it is a fundamental and essential All
Arms skill.
3.
Success. Shooting is not a skill that responds well to uneven practice.
Regular and routine shooting helps to maintain standards and provides a platform for
further development all personnel should complete skill at arms training on a regular
basis. Firers confidence is a major factor in both accuracy and effectiveness; this can
only be achieved through competency which is a product of the correct culture. The
key criterion for good shooting is the correct cultural approach.
4.
Standards. Marksmanship and the effective application of fire is a battle
winning factor. It is a command responsibility to ensure that sufficient training
opportunities are available and an individual duty to achieve the highest possible
standards. Required shooting standards are detailed in this volume. These represent
the basic minimum and higher achievement standards and are to be encouraged.
5.
Characteristics. The characteristics of the shooting training detailed in OSP
are as follows:
a. It commences with initial training and is to be continued regularly and
routinely thereafter.
b. It is a universal skill with the standards to be achieved by different force
elements related to role.
c. It is progressive and developmental, allowing firers to build on their
skills with coaching support if required; at the higher levels it combines skill
at arms and marksmanship with field craft and tactics on an individual and
collective basis.
d. It is evolutionary and will change as the nature of conflict, technology
and the operational requirement dictates.
xiii
xiv
CHAPTER 1
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING POLICY AND ITS
IMPLEMENTATION
(PERSONAL WEAPONS)
Background
0101. The ability to shoot effectively

on operations is a fundamental skill,
which depends on training to achieve the
highest standards in weapon handling and
individual marksmanship in realistic battle
shooting conditions
0102. There is a need for a mandatory
day and night shooting progression which
emphasises movement and realistic fire
positions as opposed to concentrating on
static prone shooting. There is a clear need
to ensure high individual marksmanship
standards as the keystone for combined
fire effectiveness.
CONTENTS
BACKGROUND 1-1
SHOOTING POLICY
1-1
SCOPE OF OPERATIONAL SHOOTING

VOLUME I
1-2
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING
REQUIREMENTS (OSR)
1-2
OPERATIONAL MARKSMANSHIP
STANDARDS (OMS)
1-3
SIMULATION 1-4
GUIDANCE TO COMMANDERS
1-4
PROGRESSION OF SHOOTING TRAINING

AND TESTING 1-6
VALIDATION 1-8
EXERCISING TROOPS
1-8
0103. A new approach to the training and testing of weapon handling and shooting
was introduced in the first version of the Army Operational Shooting Policy (AOSP)
not only to meet operational shooting requirements; but in doing so to integrate small
arms simulation and technology.
Shooting Policy
0104. Army Shooting Policy Paper (ASPP). This policy was endorsed by the
Executive Committee of the Army Board (ECAB) in the ASPP. This paper addressed
both the needs of operational small arms shooting and competition shooting.
Competition shooting is relevant to operational requirements and details have been
included in Chapters 13 & 14 of this pamphlet.
0105. Shooting Requirements. In establishing operational shooting policy the
ASPP set out two key principles:
a. All shooting practices and standards should be directly related to the
operational requirement for each Arm or Service.
b. There should be a distinction between the common standard of shooting
required for all trained service personnel and that required of trained (combat)
infantrymen. (Definition: An Infantry officer who has completed Platoon
Commanders Battle Course (PCBC); an Infantry soldier who has completed
Infantry Phase 2 Training (Combat Infantrymans Course from Jan 93)).
1-1
0106. Following a complete review of Operational Shooting in 2008, it was identified

that whilst on operations, certain elements of the Other Arms and Services were
involved in combat operations, yet, had not been trained to the same standard as
their immediate counterparts, the Infantry. This was identified as a shortfall in training
and, as a result, one of the recommendations from the review was to re-examine the
operational standards for those units employed in the Dismounted Close Combat Role
and those units in the Basic Close Combat Role. The following definitions are offered
to enable the Chain of Command to identify which elements are likely to be in which
role:
a. Dismounted Close Combat Role. Those units or elements of a unit that
in order to achieve their mission are expected to come into contact with the
enemy.
b. The Basic Close Combat Role. Those units or elements of a unit that
in order to achieve their mission are not expected to come into contact with
the enemy.
0107. Sponsorship. The Operational Shooting Policy (OSP) is sponsored by
Director Combat in his role as The Army Competent Advisor and Inspectorate for
Dismounted Close Combat and, as such, the special-to-arm advisor to other
Directorates, the chain of command and Army HQ.
Scope of Operational Shooting Policy Volume I
0108. The Operational Shooting Policy contains the battle shooting concept which
is to be understood and executed in full by all Arms and Services in order to ensure
effective operational shooting using personal weapons.
0109. The concept is based on Operational Shooting Requirements (OSR) and
the establishment of Operational Marksmanship Standards (OMS) for all Arms and
Services. Both OSR and OMS have been incorporated into the progression for
Training the Battle Shot.
0110. The progression for operational shooting training and testing is a package.
It contains Live Firing (LF) lessons, Weapon Handling Tests (WHT) and lays down
annual shooting tests known as Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests (ACMT). The
use of DCCT and SARTS are integrated throughout the package where appropriate.
The personal weapon LF lessons are contained in the relevant weapon chapter.
Ammunition allocations to complete LF lessons and ACMTs are contained in the
chapter on ammunition scales.
0111. OSP Volume I, therefore, is a self-contained document meeting all the
requirements of the Operational Shooting Policy regarding personal weapons.
Operational Shooting Requirements
0112. Three distinct OSR have been set out - one for service personnel employed
in the Dismounted Close Combat (DCC) Role, one for service personnel employed in
the Basic Close Combat (BCC) Role and one for professionally qualified officers and
service personnel employed in the Base Location.
1-2
The DCC Role. Service personnel employed in the DCC Role must be able to react
quickly and to fire accurately to kill or suppress an enemy to the limits of the battle
range of his personal weapon, or at close quarters, from different static positions,
on the move and from cover. Four-man fire teams must be able to kill or suppress
an enemy in defence and in offensive operations at battle ranges to 600 metres.
The BCC Role. Service personnel employed in the Basic Close Combat Role
must be able to fire accurately to kill or suppress an enemy as an individual or as a
member of a four-man fire team out to 300 metres.
Base Location. Service personnel employed in a base location who will remain
inside the confines of a secure area e.g. Main Operating Base (MOB) must be able
to fire accurately out to 100 metres.
0113. The conditions of these OSR raise several issues within the context of the
shooting package. Foremost of these is the re-definition of personal and alternate
personal weapon marksmanship standards.
Operational Marksmanship Standards
0114. OMS have been determined for service personnel employed in the DCC Role
the BCC Role and the Base Location and will be evaluated in the Annual Combat
Marksmanship Test (ACMT) for each role.
0115. The Personal Weapon Concept is discussed in Chapter 2. In summary, there
is one OMS per weapon system, dependent on the role being employed in either the
DCC Role the BCC Role or in the Base Location. The weapons concerned are:
a. Rifle L85A2 (both Optic and Iron Sight) issued to all Arms and Services
as a personal weapon.
(1) The L22A1 Carbine is categorised as a Rifle and issued to specific
personnel as a personal weapon.
(2) Rifle L85A2 with L17A2 Underslung Grenade Launcher (UGL)
fitted issued to designated personnel, as a personal weapon. Firers are
to achieve the OMS as per the Rifle.
b. Light Support Weapon L86A2 (LSW) issued to designated personnel,
as a personal weapon.
c. Light Machine Gun (LMG) issued to DCC designated gunners as a
personal weapon.
d.
Pistol issued to all Arms and Services either as a personal weapon.
1-3
0116. Should personnel who are employed in the Basic Close Combat Role and
issued with a rifle and iron sight be upgraded to an optic sight, they must still achieve
the standard of the Basic Close Combat Role.
0117.
The detail of all ACMTs is contained in the specific personal weapon chapter.
Simulation
0118. The integration of small arms simulation equipment Dismounted Close
Combat Trainer (DCCT) is fundamental to training the battle shot. It provides the
vehicle for accessible and cost-effective remedial, refresher and progressive shooting
training and gives service personnel the opportunity to practice skills before firing
live. Furthermore, certain Rifle LF lessons are DCCT predominantly. It is essential,
therefore, that all units have access to these systems and ensure personnel are
trained in its use so it can be utilised to maximum effect.
0119. Small Arms Range Target System (SARTS). Vital shooting and coaching
information can be gained with time, manpower and ammunition saved by the correct
use of SARTS. It permits one to one coaching and supervision with Grouping,
Zeroing and Elementary Application of Fire lessons on both ETR and CGR ranges. In
Advanced Application of Fire lessons SARTS can be used to indicate to the firer and
coach where shots are hitting or missing the target. RCOs are to ensure their coaches
are thoroughly familiar with SARTS before any LF lessons begin.
Guidance To Commanders
0120. Commanders are responsible for training their unit in accordance with their
deployment status. Key to operational success is the standard of a units shooting.
Detailed instructions on shooting training are to be found in the following chapters
of OSP and will be of primary use to training staff. The aim of this short section is to
provide a brief overview of OSP and to offer guidance to Commanders on how they
can train their units in this fundamental battle winning skill as part of both foundation
and deployment training. There are five stages to training the battle shot each of which
is sequential with progression dependent on achieving satisfactory standards at each
level. The five stages are:
Stage 1
Live Fire Marksmanship

Training (LFMT)
Grouping and Zeroing at 25 m
Stage 2
Live Fire Marksmanship

Training (LFMT)
Annual Combat
Marksmanship Test (ACMT)
Applying fire to the centre of a target at

100 300 m
Annual shooting test
Transition to Live Firing

Tactical Training (TLFTT)
Live Firing Tactical Training
(LFTT)
Operational shooting skills including

Fire and Movement Test (FMT)
Combination of marksmanship and tactics
including Fire Team Attack (FTA)
Stage 3
Stage 4
Stage 5
1-4
0121. Each Stage contains a number of LF lessons, some of which are discretionary,
others must be passed at a specified standard. All are designed to be progressive and
developmental. Coaching will improve standards and should be given to all firers,
but will be of specific benefit to those who have difficulty in applying marksmanship
principles to achieve required standards. Safety is a major factor in shooting training,
but it should not be regarded as a restrictive constraint. Much productive shooting
training can be conducted on a SA (B) (90) qualification, including the FMT for other
Arms and Services. The tables at the end of this chapter detail the mandatory and
objective shoots to be completed as part of initial, foundation and high readiness
training.
0122. LFTT, in particular, must be conducted in a progressive manner. This allows
for lessons to be learned during low level, simple activities before moving to exercises
of greater complexity.
0123. Additional guidance is available from SASC Advisors or from HQ SASC,
Warminster. The first steps to ensuring high standards of individual marksmanship
and an operationally effective unit are the correct priority of shooting training, effective
coaching, progressive development of firers, regular shooting activity and forward
planning. These generate the culture required to develop and sustain good shooting
standards at individual and unit level. Most importantly, shooting must receive the
command attention it deserves.
0124. Concept in Detail. The concept of Training the Battle Shot is founded on
inter-dependence. Stages are mutually reinforcing. Service personnel should not
move on to another stage until they have attained the standards required.
0125. Stage 1 Preliminary Grouping and Zeroing. Service personnel are
to be trained to group consistently to the required standard from all firing positions.
Training will progress from DCCT where basic weapon lessons will be confirmed
and faults in applying marksmanship principles corrected to full bore shoots at 25
metres. No personnel are to zero their personal weapon until they can achieve the
required grouping standard. A firers success in applying fire is directly related to
their ability to group consistently. They are unlikely to pass the Annual Combat
Marksmanship Test in Stage 3 until they can do so.
0126. Stage 2 Application of Fire. The firer is then to progress to shooting at
longer ranges in conditions relevant to OSR and from all firing positions required in the
OMS. They will be taught how to overcome the effects of wind and extremes of light.
They will also be introduced to different target types and be trained in snap and rapid
shooting, and in quickly adopting fire positions. This stage progresses from firing at
targets superimposed on witness screens to silhouette targets.
0127. Stage 3 Annual Combat Marksmanship Test. The OMS for all service
personnel are to be tested in Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests. There are two
elements to the requirement:
a. Weapon Handling Tests (WHT). All service personnel are to complete
their WHTs twice a year for all weapons they will be required to operate.
1-5
b. ACMTs. The ACMT is to be fired in accordance with MATTs for the

weapon system they will be required to operate as specified in the relevant
chapter of this publication.
0128. In ACMTs, firers will engage a variety of targets from different firing positions
out to the battle range of their weapon. These tests ensure the foundations for
transition to and execution of LFTT.
0129. Stage 4 Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training. In TLFTT operational
shooting skills are developed beyond the basic standards achieved in LFMT. TLFTT
applies to all Arms and Services and comprises Firing at Moving Targets, Firing in
CBRN Conditions, Automatic Fire, Close Quarter Marksmanship (Turning and Firing,
Short Range Engagements), Firing with NVD/TI sights, Firing at the LNV, Firing
with HMNVS and LA and the Fire and Movement Test. The Fire and Movement Test
(BCC Roled units only) has replaced the Fire TeamAssessment and will combine
battle fitness with marksmanship to practice team fire effectiveness. This will allow
commanders to identify strengths and weaknesses of both individuals and fire teams.
0130. Stage 5 Live Firing Tactical Training. LFTT is the culmination of training
the battle shot. It will bring together and practice all OMS within realistic operational
shooting conditions set out in the OSR. For the Infantry the annual IFFC is the
vehicle for completing Stage 5 and is mandatory. The scope and conduct of an IFFC
programme will be directed by the Chain of Command and influenced by resource
factors. COs are to conduct a progressive LFTT package starting with low level
exercises and culminating in sub unit level offensive live firing exercises by
day.
0131. Contained within the progression of LFTT is the Fire Team Attack that is to be
used by the Chain ofCommand to assess the operational marksmanship standard of
the Fire Team within a unit.
Progression of Shooting Training and Testing
0132. Detailed Application of LFMT.
a. Initial Officer and Services Phase 1 Recruit Training. During all Phase 1
recruit training and initial officer training, all LF lessons in LFMT Stages 1 and
2 Rifle are to be fired. These progressive shoots prepare the recruit for his
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT (BCC). Other Arms and Services Reserve recruits are to
achieve the same standards as regular recruits. Regular and Army Reserve
Infantry recruit service personnel are to complete the Combat Infantryman
Course (CIC). During this the Infantry recruit soldier is to achieve a higher
standard of marksmanship with the Rifle by completing additional designated
LF lessons in LFMT Stages 1 and 2 Rifle and then passing the LFMT Stage 3
ACMT (DCC Role). They are also to complete the LF lessons in LFMT Stages
1 and 2 LMG to prepare him for LMGACMT. Infantry Army Reserve recruits
are to achieve the same standards as regular recruits.
1-6
b. DCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. In Regular and Reserve

units operating within the DCC Role, personnel depending on the weapon
system they will be required to operate, are to maintain and test their shooting
standards by firing the ACMT Preparation and then fire the LFMT Stage 3
Rifle/SDM ACMT (DCC Role) or Pistol/LMG ACMT as appropriate.
c. BCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. In Regular and Reserve units,
Other Arms and Services personnel are to maintain and test their shooting
standards by firing the ACMT Preparation Rifle and then fire the ACMT
(BCC Role). Those service personnel appointed as LSW gunners are to fire
the ACMT Preparation LSW and complete the LSW ACMT. Those service
personnel allocated a Pistol as their personal weapon are to fire the ACMT
Preparation then the Pistol ACMT.
0133. Detailed Application of TLFTT and LFTT.
a. Services Phase 1 Training. The TLFTT shoots carried out at phase 1
training establishment are as described within the initial training tables.
b. DCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. In Regular and Reserve
units, DCC roled personnel who are issued with the Rifle or LMG will
complete Firing at CQMTargets and also complete other TLFTT (operational
shooting skills) as appropriate (see Initial Trg and Notes). In addition regular
Infantry battalions are to carry out an annual IFFC. The progression for this
LFTT is given in Chapter 11. It is recognised for Reserve Infantry battalions
that the opportunities for LFTT may be limited. Therefore it is not a mandatory
requirement for Reserve Infantry battalions to carry out an Infantry Field Firing
Camp (IFFC), but where the safety requirements of Chapter 11 have been
met and resources of training area, time, ammunition and qualified safety
staff exist, a CO should conduct appropriate LFTT.
c. BCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. In Regular and Reserve units,
BCC Role service personnel less those personnel in headquarters and the
training organisation who are issued with the Rifle or LSW will complete the
Fire and Movement Test. The Fire and Movement Test will include a battle
fitness element and shoot. Formations that require troops, as part of directed
training, to carry out LFTT are to ensure that LFMT and TLFTT (operational
shooting skills) have been achieved to the required standards contained in
the relevant weapon chapters and Chapter 10 to this volume. Formations are
also to ensure that the necessary resources to support the planned LFTT
have been bid for.
d. BCC units, elements of units or personnel that operate in support of
DCC units but who are not trained to conduct DCC operations are to complete
both the mandatory and objective activities listed in the Commanders Guide.
1-7
Validation
0134. The results of ACMTs are to be formally recorded for every individual. Units
are to hold statistics containing the following additional data:
a.
Overall Pass Rates.
b.
First Time Pass Rates.
c.
Standards achieved Pass/Marksman.
0135. In addition, Regular and Reserve units are to record the results of TLFTT
shoots as appropriate.
0136. Records and statistics of all unit shooting training and test results with
IFFC records for Infantry battalions will form part of Operational Deployment
Records (ODR) returns.
Exercising Troops
0137. The exercising troops are to be sufficiently trained to cope with the demands
of the exercise. They are to be trained and tested to ensure competency on all
weapons and pyrotechnics they may use during such training. This training is to be
documented and the testing carried out by an appropriately qualified instructor is to be
recorded. The progression of training is detailed in the Commanders Guides.
0138. The mandatory requirements specified need not be completed in a single
exercise period. The minimum requirement is that they are completed no more than
the specified period prior to the exercise and that the Exercise Director and/or Senior
Planning Officer is satisfied that the troops remain competent. Weapon Handling Tests
(WHT) are to be successfully completed no more than 6 months prior to the exercise.
0139. Exceptions to these requirements are outlined in Military Annual Training
Tests (MATTs), Policy Updates and Operational Mounting Instructions. For example:
a. The Mission Specific Training Requirement is that MATT 1 (WHTs and
ACMT) are to have been completed within the previous six calendar months
prior to deployment.
b. Post OP currency, individuals that return from an operational tour during
the period 1 Oct to 31 Mar are deemed to be MATTs current until 1 Apr the
following year.
c. If, for any reason, an individuals ACMT currency lapses because the
tour lasts in excess of six months or a unit are redeployed or extended in
deployment then the individuals ACMT will remain extant until the end of the
tour date, up to a maximum of 12 months from the deployment date.
1-8
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS ARMY RIFLE INITIAL TRAINING

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
= The mandated minimum standard to meet generic operational training requirements, fully re sourced.
Objective
= The objective standard to meet generic operational training requirements, conducted as resources allow.
Discretionary = Conducted to support a specific training requirement, as resources allow.
Ser
Practice
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
DCC
Nil
WHT
WHT
WHT
LF1 Grouping Prone

4 x 5 rd Groups Supported
4 x 5 rd Groups Unsupported
DCCT
LF1
LF1
LF2 Grouping Prone

25m
LF2
LF2
LF3 Grouping Other Positions

2 x 5 rd Groups Sitting,Kneeling/Squatting,
Standing Unsupported, Kneeling/Squatting,
Standing Supported
DCCT
LF3
LF3

Standing Supported
25m
LF4
LF4
WHT Zeroing
Nil
WHT
WHT
LF5 Zeroing
25m Zeroing Procedure with Retests as
required
25m
LF5
LF5
PRAC 1 Stage 1 Consolidation

Repeat of practices from LF 2 and 4 for
those yet to achieve the guide standards
DCCT
PRAC 1
PRAC 1
LF 6 CQM Identifying POA
10
11
Remarks
STAGE 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING
STAGE 2 APPLICATION OF FIRE

15 to 3m
A or B
LF6
LF6
LF 7 CQM Accelerated Fire
15 to 3m
A or B
LF7
LF7
LF 8 CQM Failure to Stop
15 to 3m
A or B
LF8
LF8
12
LF9 CQM Multiple Targets
15 to 3m
A or B
LF9
LF9
13
WHT Wind Allowance, Miss Drill and

Application of fire.
Nil
WHT
WHT
14
LF10 Establish POA and Apply Fire

Apply fire from all positions at ranges up
to 300m
DCCT
LF10
LF10
15

Apply fire from all positions at 100m
100m
LF11
LF11
16

Apply fire from all positions at ranges from
200m to 300m
200m
LF12
LF12
RCO requires the SA (A)(90) qual if

conducted on a LFTTA
DCC Only
300m
17
LF13 Advanced Application of Fire

to 300m
DCCT
LF13
LF13
18
LF 14 Advanced Application of Fire

100m
LF14
LF14
1-9
19

to 300m
20
21
200m
DCC Only
300m
LF15
LF15
DCCT
PRAC 2
PRAC 2

to 100m
100m
LF16
22

to 200m
200m
LF17
23

to 300m
300m
LF18
24
Prac 3 Stage 2 DCC Consolidation
DCCT
25
ACMT
200m
300m
200m
Annual
CBRN
Annual
CBRN
IBSR
IBS
IBS
26
27
Annual CBRN Instruction and Assessment
PRAC 3
ACMT
(BCC)
Practice 1 is only fired if LF 6 to 9

has been fired
ACMT
(DCC)
STAGE 4 TLFTT
28
IBSR (Fixed Firing Points Only)
29
Automatic Fire
DCCT/
ETR/
LFTTA
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
LF is mandatory if auto fire is used

on LFTT. If not DCCT maybe used
30
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
Desirable LF, DCCT is acceptable.
31
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
LNV shoot can be conducted at any

time during the training progression
after LF9
32
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/
GR/ CGR
NVD
NVD
Range as per LF Lesson
33
Fire and Movement Test (FMT)
ETR
FMT
STAGE 5 LFTT
34
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Def
(Day)
Sect Def
(Day)
35
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Def
(Night)
Sect Def
(Night)
36
Individual (Ind) Battle Shooting or

Ind CQB
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
37
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
38
Fire Team Attack

(FTA) (Day)
LFTTA
(FTA)
(Day)
(FTA)
(Day)
39
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
FTA
(Night)
40
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
Sect Attack
(Day)
41
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Sect Attack
(Night)
1-10
Acceptable on DCCT with firing

point furniture.
ARMY LSW INITIAL TRAINING

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
1
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
Nil
WHT
Remarks

2
LF1 Introduction Prone

Single Shots And Bursts
25m
LF1
LF2 Grouping Prone

Zeroing at 25m
25m
LF2

4

100m
LF3

200-400m
400m
LF4

100-400m
400m
LF5
ACMT
400m
ACMT
200m
Annual
CBRN
ARMY SDM (LSW) INITIAL TRAINING

Ser
1
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
DCC
Nil
WHT
Remarks

2
LF1 introductory Shoot at 25m
25m
LF1
LF2 Grouping Prone

Zeroing at 25m
25m
LF2

4
LF3 Grouping at 100m
100m
LF3
LF4 Elementary Application of Fire

200-400m
400m
LF4
LF5 Elementary Application of Fire

400-600m
400m
LF5

100-400m
400m
LF6

400-600m
600m
LF7
ACMT
600m
ACMT
10
600m
Annual
CBRN
1-11
ARMY L129A1 INITIAL TRAINING

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
1
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
DCC
Nil
WHT
100m
LF1

2
LF1 Grouping/Zeroing
Zeroing at 100m all positions

3

to 300m
300m
LF2

400-600m
600m
LF3

100-300m
300m
LF4

400-600m
600m
LF5
ACMT
600m
ACMT
200m
Annual
CBRN
1-12
Remarks
ARMY LMG INITIAL TRAINING

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
1
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
DCC
Nil
WHT
Remarks

2
LF1 Introduction
Familiarisation of controlled bursts
25m
LF1
LF2 Grouping
Grouping at 100m
100m
LF2
LF3 Zeroing
Zeroing at 100m
100m
LF3

5

Apply fire from prone and Fire Trench at
ranges up to 200m
200m
LF4

Apply fire from prone and Fire Trench at
ranges from 300 -400m
400m
LF5

200-400m
400m
LF6
ACMT
400m
ACMT
300m
Annual
CBRN
1-13
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS ARMY SERVICE PISTOL INITIAL TRAINING

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
1
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
User
Nil
WHT
25m
LF1

2
LF1 Introduction
Grouping at 10m all positions

3
LF2 Identify POA

Establish POA at ranges from 3-15m
25m
LF2
LF3 Accelerated Fire

Apply accelerated fire to achieve multiple
rapid hits on tgt
25m
LF3
LF4 Failure to Stop

Apply accelerated fire to achieve multiple
rapid hits on tgt using 2 POA
25m
LF4
LF5 Close Range Multiple Tgts

engaging multiple targets by
shooting at close range.
25m
LF5
LF6 Advanced Snap Shooting

Single fleeting enemy from the standing,
kneeling and sitting positions at ranges up
to 25 metres. .
25m
LF6
ACMT
25m
ACMT
25m
Annual
CBRN
1-14
rapid
Remarks
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS ARMY OTHER TASKS YEAR

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
DCC
WHT
WHT
Nil
SAA
Instr
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
Rifle ACMT (100m)
ETR/GR/
CGR
Base
Location
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT Prep
LF5 to be completed as the

progression to this ACMT.
ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
10
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
User
11
Annual CBRN Instruction

and Assessment
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN
IBSR Fixed Firing Points

Only
IBSR
IBS
IBS
12
4
TLFTT
Remarks
Minimum standard for individual

deployment.
User
1. TLFTT activities provide the

link to LFTT but are unconnected
to each other and do not have
to be completed in a particular
sequence.
13
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
14
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
15
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
2. Operational Shooting Skills

are only mandatory if employed
during LFTT
16
Firing with NVD and TI

Sights
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
NVD
NVD
3. FMT is the minimum standard

for deployment in the BCC role.
17
Firing with HMNVS & LA
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
LA
LA
18
Fire and Movement Test

(FMT)
ETR
19
Adv Application 700-800m

(Sharpshooter)
LFTTA
Flank Contact Static

Vehicle
LFTTA
S/Veh
S/Veh
Flank Contact Moving

Vehicle
LFTTA
M/Veh
M/Veh
22
Moving Targets at Longer

Ranges
DCCT
MTLR
MTLR
23
Long Range Suppression
DCCT
LRS
LRS
20
21
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
FMT
Adv
As per Operational Mounting
Instruction.
1-15
Identifying the POA
25m
CQM
LMG Only
25
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
LMG Only
26
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
LMG Only
27
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
LMG Only
28
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
29
Turning and Pivoting
25m
CQM
CQM
30
Firing whilst Closing
25m
CQM
CQM
Rifle CQM LF lessons 6-9 must be

completed once either during initial
training or before these LF lessons can
be conducted.
31
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
SectDef
(Night)
1. Defensive exercises require

separate skills to offensive exercises.
There is no requirement to do a
defensive exercise before doing
offensive exercises.
34
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Day)
Pl
Def (Day)
2. Night exercises must be conducted

at the day level first.
35
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Night)
Pl Def
(Night)
24
CQM
32
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
33
Ind Battle Shooting or

Ind CQB
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
38
Fire Team Attack (FTA)

(Day).
LFTTA
(FTA)
(Day)
(FTA)
(Day)
39
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day
Sect Attack
(Day)
40
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
36
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
37
Pl Attack
(Day)
Participation in IBS/Ind CQB and

Ind F&M during initial training or in
Unit Fire Team or greater level Attack
within 24 months permits exercising
troops to start the progression of
training at Fire Team level.
1. FTA (Day) is the minimum

standard for individuals deploying
in the DCC role.
2. Participation in Fire Team, Sect, Pl
or Coy level attacks within 12 months
permits exercising troops to start the
progression of training at the day
level previously participated in.
3. Offensive exercises are to be
completed in sequence. Though there
is no requirement to complete a night
exercise before the next level of day
exercise.
41
42
5
FTA (Night)
LFTT Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)
Sect Attack (Night)
43
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
FTA
(Night)
1. Night exercises must be conducted at

the day level first.
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Sect Attack
(Night)
LFTTA
2. Night exercises without illumination

(including IR Light) are complex and a
separate progression of training from
Fire Team is required
Pl Attack
(Night)
3. There is no need to complete night

exercises with illumination before
exercise without illumination.
4. Switching from a night exercise
without illumination to using
illumination is acceptable providing
the exercising troops have previously
participated in a night exercise with
illumination.
5. Participation in Fire Team, Sect or
Multiple Pl level night attacks within
12 months permits exercising troops
to start the progression of training at
that level.
1-16
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS ARMY TRAINING YEAR

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
DCC
WHT
WHT
Nil
SAA
Instr
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
Rifle ACMT (100m)
ETR/GR/
CGR
Base
Location
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT Prep

ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
10
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
User
11

and Assessment
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN

Only
IBSR
IBS
IBS
12
4
TLFTT
Remarks

deployment.
User

sequence.
13
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
14
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
15
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV

during LFTT
16

Sights
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
NVD
NVD

17
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
LA
LA
18

(FMT)
ETR
19

(Sharpshooter)
LFTTA

Vehicle
LFTTA
S/Veh
S/Veh

Vehicle
LFTTA
M/Veh
M/Veh
22

Ranges
DCCT
MTLR
MTLR
23
DCCT
LRS
LRS
20
21
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
FMT
Adv
Instruction.
1-17
Identifying the POA
25m
CQM
LMG Only
25
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
LMG Only
26
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
LMG Only
27
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
LMG Only
28
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
29
25m
CQM
CQM
30
25m
CQM
CQM

be conducted.
31
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
SectDef
(Night)

34
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Day)
Pl Def
(Day)

35
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Night)
Pl Def
(Night)

Ind CQB
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
38

(Day).
LFTTA
FTA
(Day)
FTA
(Day)
39
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
Sect Attack
(Day)
40
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)
41
Coy Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Day)
42
BG Attack (Day)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
FTA
(Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Sect Attack
(Night)
45
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
46
Coy Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Night)
47
BG Attack (Night)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Night)
24
32
33
36
37
43
44
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)

in the DCC role.
exercise.
(including IR Light) are complex and
a separate progression of training
from Fire Team is required
illumination.
that level.
1-18
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS ARMY CONTINGENCY/COMMITTED YEAR

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
BCC
DCC
WHT
WHT
Nil
SAA
Instr
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
Rifle ACMT (100m)
ETR/GR/
CGR
Base
Location
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT Prep

ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
10
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
User
11

and Assessment
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN

Only
IBSR
IBS
IBS
12
4
TLFTT
Remarks

deployment.
User

sequence.
13
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
14
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
15
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV

during LFTT
16

Sights
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
NVD
NVD

17
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
LA
LA
18

(FMT)
ETR
19

(Sharpshooter)
LFTTA

Vehicle
LFTTA
S/Veh
S/Veh

Vehicle
LFTTA
M/Veh
M/Veh
22

Ranges
DCCT
MTLR
MTLR
23
DCCT
LRS
LRS
20
21
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
FMT
Adv
Instruction.
1-19
Identifying the POA
25m
CQM
LMG Only
25
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
LMG Only
26
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
LMG Only
27
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
LMG Only
28
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
29
25m
CQM
CQM
30
25m
CQM
CQM

be conducted.
31
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
SectDef
(Night)
34
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Day)
35
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Night)

Ind CQB
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
38

(Day).
LFTTA
FTA
(Day)
FTA
(Day)

in the DCC role.
39
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
Sect Attack
(Day)
40
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)

41
Coy Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Day)

exercise.
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
FTA
(Night)
1. Night exercises must be conducted at

the day level first.
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Sect Attack
(Night)

44
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)

(including IR Light) are complex and
a separate progression of training from
Fire Team is required
45
Coy Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Night)

without
illumination
to
using
illumination is acceptable if the
exercising troops have previously
illumination.
24
32
33
36
37
42
43
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)



that level.
1-20
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS RN/RM RIFLE INITIAL TRAINING

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
Practice
Range
RCO
Qual
RN
BCC
RM
DCC
Nil
WHT
WHT
Remarks
WHT
LF1 Grouping Prone

DCCT
LF1
LF1
LF2 Grouping Prone

25m
LF2
LF2

Standing Supported
DCCT
LF3
LF3

Standing Supported
25m
LF4
LF4
WHT Zeroing
Nil
WHT
WHT
LF5 Zeroing
25m Zeroing Procedure with Retests as
required
25m
LF5
LF5

Repeat of practices from LF 2 and 4 for
those yet to achieve the guide standards
DCCT
PRAC 1
PRAC 1
LF 6 CQM Identifying POA
15 to 3m
A or B
LF6
LF6
1. RCO requires the SA (A) (90) qual

if conducted on a LFTTA.
10
LF 7 CQM Accelerated Fire
15 to 3m
A or B
LF7
LF7
11
LF 8 CQM Failure to Stop
15 to 3m
A or B
LF8
LF8
2. CTCRM only These shoots are

conducted as part of a CQM/CQB
package along with serials 30 32.
12
LF9 CQM Multiple Targets
15 to 3m
A or B
LF9
LF9
13
WHT Wind Allowance, Miss Drill and

Application of fire.
Nil
WHT
WHT
14

to 300m
DCCT
LF10
LF10
15

100m
LF11
LF11
16

200m to 300m
200m
LF12
LF12
LF13
LF13
17

to 300m
DCC Only
300m
DCCT
1-21
18

100m
LF14
LF14
19

to 300m
200m
DCC Only
300m
LF15
LF15
20
DCCT
PRAC 2
PRAC 2
21

to 100m
100m
LF16
LF16
22

to 200m
200m
LF17
LF17
23

to 300m
300m
LF18
LF18
24
Prac 3 Stage 2 DCC Consolidation
DCCT
PRAC 3
PRAC 3
25
ACMT
200m
ACMT
(BCC)
300m
200m
Annual
CBRN
Annual
CBRN
IBSR
IBS
IBS
26
27
1. CTCRM only - Prac 1 is fired as

part of the CQM/CQB package
ACMT
(DCC)
STAGE 4 TLFTT
28
IBSR (Fixed Firing Points Only)
29
Automatic Fire
DCCT/
ETR/
LFTTA
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
30
The Transition
15 to 3m
A,B or
CQBI
CQM
CQM
31
15 to 3m
A,B or
CQBI
CQM
CQM
32
Firing Whilst Closing
15 to 3m
A,B or
CQBI
CQM
CQM
33
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
34
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
35
Firing with NVD and TI Sights
25m/ ETR/
GR/ CGR
NVD
NVD
36
Fire with HMNVS and LA
25m/ ETR/
GR/ CGR
LA
LA
STAGE 5 LFTT
37
Sect Def (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Def
(Day)
Sect Def
(Day)
38
Sect Def (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Def
(Night)
Sect Def
(Night)
39
Individual (Ind) Battle Shooting or

Ind CQB
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind
CQB
IBS/Ind
CQB
40
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
Ind F&M
(Day)
41
Fire Team Attack

(FTA) (Day)
LFTTA
(FTA)
(Day)
(FTA)
(Day)
42
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA (Night)
FTA
(Night)
1-22
Acceptable on DCCT with firing

point furniture.
LF is mandatory if auto fire is used
on LFTT. If not DCCT maybe used
1. CTCRM only Conducted with
LF6-9 as part of a CQM/CQB
package.
Desirable LF, DCCT is acceptable.
Range as per LF Lesson

See note 1
43
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
44
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
45
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)
See note 1
46
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
See note 1
Note 1: Theses additional shoots are conducted by CTCRM to allow all Mne/YOs to leave CTCRM at Operation performance
Standard (OPS) so they can join a Cdo unit anywhere in the CORM Cycle.
1-23
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS RM STANDING TASK YEAR

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Range
RCO Qual
RM
DCC
Nil
SAA Instr
WHT
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT
(Prep)
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
User

and Assessment
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual
CBRN

Only
IBSR
IBS
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
10
4
TLFTT
Practice
WHT
11
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
12
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
13
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
14

Sights
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
NVD
15
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
16

(Sharpshooter)
LFTTA

Vehicle
LFTTA
S/Veh

Vehicle
LFTTA
M/Veh
19

Ranges
DCCT
MTLR
20
DCCT
LRS
17
18
1-24
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
Remarks

deployment.

from each other and do not have
to be completed in any particular
sequence.
2. Operational Shooting skills
during LFTT.
LA
Adv
Instruction.
Identifying the POA
25m
CQM
22
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
23
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
24
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
25
The Transition
25m
CQM
26
25m
CQM
27
25m
CQM
28
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)

31
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Day)
2. Night exercises must be

conducted at the day level first
32
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Night)

Ind CQB
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
35

(Day).
LFTTA
(FTA) (Day)
36
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)
21
29
30
33
34
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
1. LMG must only complete serials

2124, 26, 27.
2. Rifle must only complete serials
25 - 28
3. Rifle CQM LF Lesson 6-9 must be
be conducted

Ind F&M during initial training or Fire
Team or greater level Attack within
Fire Team level.

in the DCC role.
2. Participation in Fire Team, Sect,
Pl or Coy level attacks within 12
months permits exercising troops to
start the progression of training at
the day level previously participated
in.
completed in sequence. Though
there is no requirement to complete
a night exercise before the next level
of day exercise.
38
39
40
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA (Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)

conducted at the day level first.
2. Night exercises without
illumination (including IR Light) are
complex and a separate progression
of training from Fire Team is required
3. There is no need to complete
night exercises with illumination
before exercise without illumination.
illumination.
to start the progression of training
at that level.
1-25
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS RN/RM FORCE GENERATION YEAR

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
3
ACMT
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
RN
BCC
RM
DCC
Nil
SAA
Instr
WHT
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT Prep
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT (BCC)
ACMT
(DCC)
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
User
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
User
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
User

and Assessment
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN

Only
IBSR
IBS
IBS
10
4
TLFTT
11
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
12
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
13
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
14

Sights
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
15
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
16

(Sharpshooter)
LFTTA
Adv

Vehicle
LFTTA
S/Veh

Vehicle
LFTTA
M/Veh
19

Ranges
DCCT
MTLR
20
DCCT
LRS
17
18
1-26
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
NVD
Remarks

deployment.

sequence.
2. Operational Shooting skills are
only mandatory if employed during
LFTT.
3. RN personnel only may complete
the LNV serial via LF, DCCT or
BDFL Night Vision DVD
LA

Instruction.
Identifying the POA
25m
CQM
CQM
22
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
CQM
23
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
CQM
24
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
CQM
25
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
26
25m
CQM
CQM
27
25m
CQM
CQM
28
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)

31
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Day)

conducted at the day level first
32
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl
Def (Night)

Ind CQB
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
35

(Day).
LFTTA
FTA
(Day)
36
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
38
Coy Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Day)
39
BG Attack (Day)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
42
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
43
Coy Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Night)
44
BG Attack (Night)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Night)
21
29
30
33
34
40
41
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)

2124, 26, 27.
25 - 28
be conducted.

Ind F&M during initial training or Fire
Team or greater level Attack within
Fire Team level.
in the DCC role.
in.
of day exercise.
illumination.
5. Participation in Fire Team, Sect
or Pl level night attacks within 12
that level.
1-27
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS RN/RM COMMITTED YEAR

Mandatory
Objective
Discretionary
Mandatory
Objective
Ser
Stage
1 and 2
Zeroing/
Application
of Fire
Practice
WHT
Range
RCO
Qual
RN
BCC
RM
DCC
Nil
SAA
Instr
WHT
ACMT Preparation
ETR/GR/
CGR
ACMT Prep
Rifle ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
SDM LSW ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Sharpshooter ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
LMG ACMT
ETR/GR/
CGR
User
Service Pistol ACMT
25m
User

and Assessment
ETR/GR/
CGR
Annual CBRN

Only
IBSR
10
4
TLFTT
ACMT (BCC)
LF 5 must be completed as the

progression to this ACMT
ACMT
(DCC)
IBS
11
Automatic Fire
Auto Fire
Auto Fire
12
Moving Targets
DCCT/
MMTTR
Moving
Target
Moving
Target
13
LNV
ETR/GR/
CGR
LNV
LNV
14

Sights
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
15
25m/
ETR/GR/
CGR
16

(Sharpshooter)
LFTTA
Adv

Vehicle
LFTTA
S/Veh

Vehicle
LFTTA
M/Veh
19

Ranges
DCCT
MTLR
20
DCCT
LRS
17
18
1-28
4
TLFTT
(Spec to Role)
Remarks

deployment.

sequence.
2. Operational Shooting skills
during LFTT.
NVD
LA

Instruction.
Identifying the POA
25m
CQM
CQM
22
Accelerated Fire
25m
CQM
CQM
23
Failure to Stop
25m
CQM
CQM
24
Multiple Tgts
25m
CQM
CQM
25
The Transition
25m
CQM
CQM
26
25m
CQM
CQM
27
25m
CQM
CQM
28
Moving Target
DCCT
CQM
CQM
SectDef (Day)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Day)
SectDef (Night)
LFTTA
SectDef
(Night)
31
PlDef (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Day)
32
PlDef (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Def
(Night)

Ind CQB
IBSR/
LFTTA
IBS/Ind CQB
Ind F&M (Day)
LFTTA
Ind F&M
(Day)
35

(Day).
LFTTA
FTA
(Day)
36
Sect Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Day)
37
Pl Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Day)
38
Coy Attack (Day)
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Day)
39
BG Attack (Day)
LFTTA
BG Attack
(Day)
FTA (Night)
LFTTA
FTA
(Night)
Sect Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Sect Attack
(Night)
42
Pl Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Pl Attack
(Night)
43
Coy Attack (Night)
LFTTA
Coy Attack
(Night)
21
29
30
33
34
40
41
CQM
5
LFTT
Defence
Exercises
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(Day)
5
LFTT
Offensive
Exercises
(NIGHT)

2124, 26, 27.
25 - 28
be conducted.


in the DCC role.
in.
of day exercise.
illumination.
5. Participation in Fire Team, Sect
or Pl level night attacks within 12
that level.
1-29
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS RAF REGT ENDURING COMMITTED

PERIOD
(Reserved)
1-30
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS RAF REGIMENT CONTINGENT

OPERATIONAL TRAINING YEAR (COT 1/COT 2)
(Reserved)
1-31
GUIDE TO COMMANDERS CONTINGENCY/COMMITTED YEAR

(JEF1/JEF2)
(Reserved)
1-32
CHAPTER 2
MANAGEMENT OF SHOOTING TRAINING (PERSONAL
WEAPONS)
Personal Weapon Concept
0201. Personal Weapon. All service
personnel, on joining a unit, are issued
with a personal weapon. The individuals
appointment and the unit establishment will
determine whether their personal weapon
is to be a Rifle, LSW, LMG or Pistol. The
individual is to retain that weapon as their
personal weapon when practicable except:
a. On posting and attendance
on courses.
CONTENTS
PERSONAL WEAPON CONCEPT
2-1
SAFETY 2-2
QUALIFICATION AND AUTHORISATION
2-2
NIGHT SHOOTING
2-2
CBRN CONDITIONS
2-3
AIDS TO TRAINING AND FIRING
2-3
PHYSICAL FITNESS
2-3
COMBAT SHOOTING COACHING
2-4
SHOOTING RECORDS
2-4
COMBAT SHOOTING COMPETITIONS
2-5
PURPOSE BUILT RANGES AND THEIR USES 2-6
b.
When the weapon requires repair or replacement.
c.
On change of appointment within a unit.
d. In accordance with the rules contained in Reference A if personnel

change their type of personal weapon during the year, having passed their
Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests (ACMT), they are required to pass the
Weapon Handling Tests (WHT) and ACMT on the new personal weapon to
ensure safe handling and effective operational use.
0202. Test Requirements. Details of WHTs and ACMTs, with respective Training
Performance Standards and Pass/Marksmanship Standards are in the specific
personal weapon chapter.
0203. Change of Weapon Sight. Where a personal weapon remains the same,
but the type of sight changes i.e. SUSAT to LDS, individuals need not repeat the
ACMT and other progressive shoots. In such circumstances the individual is to be
formally trained on the sight, and must then conduct the relevant zeroing practice.
0204. Change of Pistol. Where an individual has completed the requisite
progression of training with a Pistol and is then issued with another Pistol i.e. on
arrival in-Theatre, a POA confirmation shoot is to be conducted. This does not apply
when a different type of Pistol is issued, in which case the entire progression is to be
completed
2-1
Safety
0205. It is mandatory for all firers to have passed WHTs prior to live firing of a
weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers must
confirm that all personnel firing any weapon have passed the relevant WHTs within
the previous six months of firing
Qualification and Authorisation
0206. SAA Instructor Qualification. It is mandatory that in all units the basic
weapon handling lessons, laid down in the relevant weapon General Staff Publications
(GSP), are given by a qualified Skill At Arms (SAA) Instructor; who themselves are
proven competent to handle the weapons being taught by passing the relevant WHTs
within the last six months.
0207. Course Qualification. The qualification needed by an Officer, WO or NCO
to plan, conduct and supervise live firing, is to have attended and qualified on an
appropriate course listed in Reference A.
0208. Pamphlet No 21. Reference A also lays down the powers of COs and the
rules to be followed if they wish to authorise non-qualified personnel to be employed
as Safety Supervisors
Night Shooting
0209. Importance. Night shooting is a key element of meeting the OSR and cannot
be over emphasised. Night shooting, at the Limit of Night Visibility (LNV), with CWS
and with HMNVS and LA live firing (LF) lessons and assessments are included as
operational shooting skills covered in Stage 4 TLFTT. Night shooting exercises are
included in the suggested shooting progression in LFTT.
0210. Limit of Night Visibility (LNV). The night shooting requirement for all
Services is to fire at the LNV using the optic sight or by instinctive pointing of the iron
sight.
0211. Firing with NVD and TI. To gain maximum benefit from NVD and TI sights
they are to be issued as a personal equipment item to selected users.
0212. Firing with HMNVS and LA. Where issued all members of the section will
be equipped with HMNVS and LA, providing the capability for snap shooting from the
patrol position and accurate fire from other combat fire positions out to 200 metres.
2-2
0213. Night Firing with Illumination. It is anticipated that the majority of night
firing with illumination will take place during LFTT. However, if either ground or airborne illuminances are available, units are encouraged to include night shooting with
illumination practices during their standard range firing periods. There is sufficient
scope within the LF lessons in LFMT, for units to select appropriate night shooting
with illumination practices to match the standard of their soldiers training. In doing
so, however, the appropriate parts of Reference A and range orders should be read to
determine the safety constraints for ranges.
CBRN Conditions
0214. To prepare personnel for the CBRN threat, it is necessary that Skill at Arms
training, both weapon handling and marksmanship, be carried out wearing protective
clothing. An annual CBRN Instructional Shoot and Assessment for all personal
weapons has been included at the end of each weapon chapter. Where possible
CBRN LF should be conducted in full IPE. The minimum level of CBRN protection
that should be worn is respirator and CBRN gloves. Units are also to carry out LFTT
wearing CBRN protection. Units who have a specialist CBRN role may wish to conduct
all LF lessons in CBRN conditions.
Aids to Training and Firing
0215. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). To avoid wasting time and ammunition the
SAC is to be used to bore sight weapons before zeroing. When weapons have been
zeroed, the SAC is to be used to record the Personal Zero Position (PZP) readings.
Thereafter, SAC is to be used before any LF lesson to ensure that readings have not
changed. To save range time it is recommended that bore sighting is conducted on
the day prior to the lesson.
0216. Tracer. Tracer ammunition may be used to assist in the observation of strike
when firing Advanced Application of Fire shoots. There are strict limitations on the use
of tracer on some types of range and under certain climatic conditions. Range orders
will specify any limitations that are in force.
0217. Sandbags. The use of the sandbag for support while shooting is not permitted
during any lessons or tests in LFMT or TLFTT.
Physical Fitness
0218. Requirement. Unless personnel are fully fit they are unlikely to be able to
shoot to the best of their ability under operational conditions. Physical fitness and
coordination are essential for accurate shooting and are to be fully integrated into the
training sequence. Service personnel must be fit enough to:
a. Handle their personal weapon without unnecessary strain in all firing
positions.
b.
Control their breathing, particularly after physical exertion.

2-3
0219. Physical Fitness in Training the Battle Shot. Although general physical
fitness is necessary, particular emphasis is to be given to strengthening the muscles
in the upper body that are required for shooting, particularly in the unsupported firing
positions. In LFMT personnel are not expected to fire under physically strenuous
conditions but rather concentrate on improving their basic marksmanship skills.
Short dashes are incorporated into the practices to simulate the rapid move to a
firing position before firing. Endurance fitness becomes a factor in TLFTT where the
Fire and Movement Test for personnel employed in the Basic Close Combat Role
is proceeded by a 300 metre march and the Fire Team Attack where the shoot is
preceded by a 1.2 km march.
Combat Shooting Coaching
0220. Importance. The importance of combat shooting coaching cannot be overemphasised. Comparisons can be made to any other skill or sport expert tuition
and practice are essential. During All Arms Phase 1 Training or during Infantry Phase
2 Training, instructors will invariably be qualified and trained on coaching techniques
and procedures. If standards are to be maintained and improved on, and backward
shots developed, combat shooting coaching is equally important in units.
0221. Role of the Unit Training Officer (UTO). The UTO is responsible to the CO
for the planning of unit shooting activity to meet operational requirements and the
coordination of unit shooting performance. A major task of the UTO, therefore, is to
train sub-unit combat shooting coaches and monitor their performance. After learning
the techniques and procedures, a combat shooting coach can only become effective
by practising, and COs must encourage this. Additional support,guidance and training
is available from Bde Training Teams and the Divisional Operational Shooting Training
Teams (OSTTs).
0222. Qualities of the Combat Shooting Coach. Combat shooting coaches need
the following key qualities:
a.
To be a good instructor to be enthusiastic, convincing and patient.
b. To be a good shot with a sound understanding of this volume and the

combat shooting coaching techniques and procedures.
0223. Related Information. Information on combat shooting coaching and how to
train the sub-unit combat shooting coach is contained in DCC Training Volume 4,
Marksmanship Coaching. DCC Training Volume II, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm) System
(Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment contains information on Zeroing,
Bore sighting and the Small Arms Collimator (SAC).
Shooting Records
0224. The following shooting records should be maintained for all soldiers:
a.
2-4
AB 608 Personal Weapon Record Book (Recruit training only).
b.
AFB 6994 Personal Weapon Record Book (Trained Soldier).
c. Sub-Unit Shooting Record, to be held and maintained in the sub-unit

office to enable the sub-unit commander to monitor the shooting ability of his
soldiers (All Units).
d.
Results of mandatory tests on unit computer systems (All Units).
Combat Shooting Competitions

0225. Purpose and Value of Combat Shooting Competitions. The value of
combat shooting competitions is too often underestimated. Service combat shooting
competition is an integral and important part of personnels shooting training. Matches
exist for Rifle, LSW, Pistol and LMG. Its value in meeting the requirements of
operational shooting can be highlighted in the following areas:
a. Incentive. Competition is a powerful incentive to units and individuals to
aspire to high standards of marksmanship.
b. Interest. Competition matches maintain interest. They are framed to
provide a real challenge and will usually be more difficult than the ACMT.
Interest will be maintained if units enter competitions regularly.
c. Battle Training. Competition stress has a similar effect to battle
stress. The keener the competition, the greater the pressure. Simultaneous
firing of team combat shooting matches are a particularly good way of
creating pressure. Qualities which competition shooting develops include
determination, esprit de corps, concentration, self confidence and confidence
in weapons and equipment.
0226. Operational Shooting Competitions. Details of Operational Shooting
Competitions are given in Chapter 13 & 14 of this pamphlet. In summary matches are
organised as follows:
a. Central Matches. Central matches are those organised and fired by
units, corps and District/Division at Operational Shooting Competitions
(OSCs). They should be organised on the broadest possible basis with
teams made up of all classes of shots. A good shooting team is an invaluable
asset as it is a source of shooting know how and the team members should
be used as coaches to assist the unit training staff. District/Division and
Command Competitions are also the vehicle for selecting unit teams to
compete annually in Army Operational Shooting Competition (AOSC), which
includes the Queens Medal Competition for Shooting Excellence.
b. Non-Central Matches. Non-central matches are those fired on unit
ranges or at specific weapons concentrations, such as for GPMG(SF) or
Sniper. They are of particular value in maintaining interest and ensuring
shooting is practised throughout the year.
2-5
0227. Army Rifle Association (ARA). The ARA is part of CD Combat, under the
authority of AD DCC and is located at the National Shooting Centre at Bisley, Surrey.
The ARA is responsible for all Target Shooting matters.
Purpose Built Ranges and Their Use
0228. The following purpose built ranges are available for Training the Battle Shot:
Serial
2-6
Type of Range
Type of Training

Trainer (DCCT)
1. Simulated firing of LFMT and some TLFTT of

Training the Battle Shot.
2. Individual and team advanced marksmanship
shoots using authored practices or video.
3. Remedial training for backward shots.
4. Training of sub unit shooting coaches.
Tube/Pipe Range
1. Confirmation of zeroing.
2. Predominantly in operational bases.
25 Metre Range
1. Introduction to full bore shooting.

2. Practice at grouping shoots and remedial
training.
3. Zeroing.
5. TLFTT.
25 Metre Barrack Range
1. These ranges will gradually supersede the

existing 25 m Range. Their function is identical to
the 25 m Range but they have 6 lanes.
2. TLFTT CQM.
Gallery Range/Converted
Gallery Range (CGR)
1. LFMT Stage 1 (Grouping and Zeroing).

2. LFMT Stage 2 (Application of Fire).
3. LFMT Stage 3 (Annual Combat Marksmanship
Test).
4. TLFTT Operational Shooting Skills.
Electric Target Range (ETR)

2. LFMT Stage 2 (Application of Fire).
3. LFMT Stage 3 (Annual Combat Marksmanship
Tests).
4. TLFTT.
a. Operational Shooting Skills.
b. Fire and Movement Test.
Mechanical Moving Target

Trainer Range (MMTTR)

2. TLFTT.
3. Firing at Moving Targets (6 lanes).
100 Metre Baffle Range
A study is currently in progress to approve a new

design for the 100 m Baffle Range.
300 Metre Baffle Range

German Type B/Type C
10
Individual Battle Shooting

Range (IBSR)
1. Type B (Rifle Practices Only).

2. Type C (Rifle and Machine Gun Practices).
Note: No firing between firing points.
1. TLFTT Firing From Other Positions.
2. LFTT.
a. Close Quarter Battle (CQB).
b. Attack (up to pairs only).
c. Defence.
3. These ranges are purpose built.
2-7
2-8
CHAPTER 3
THE RIFLE
Scope
0301. Chapter 3 sets out all Rifle live
firing (LF) lessons to be completed in
LFMT Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the
Battle Shot. It includes the application of
LF lessons to all Arms and Services and
the progression and frequency with which
they are to be fired.
0302. This progression and frequency of
firing is essential for preparing firers for the
Rifle Annual Combat Marksmanship Test
(ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also essential
in preparing the firer for mandatory TLFTT
and LFTT. The detail of TLFTT and LFTT
are in Chapters 10 and 11 respectively.
CONTENTS
SCOPE 3-1
TRAINING AND FIRING SEQUENCE
3-1
SAFETY 3-2
CONDUCT OF LF LESSONS
3-2
WEAPON HANDLING TESTS

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
3-4
DEFINITION OF STANDARDS
3-5
WHT 3-6
LF LESSONS
3-13
RIFLE ACMT PREPARATION
3-65
RIFLE ACMT
3-69
RIFLE ACMT BASE LOCATION
3-75
CBRN INSTRUCTION/ ASSESSMENT
3-81
0303. The L22A1 Carbine is categorised as a Rifle. The OMS requirement for the
Carbine is the same as for the Rifle ACMT (Basic Close Combat Role).
0304. The OMS requirement for the Rifle when fitted with UGL is Rifle ACMT
(Dismounted Close Combat Role).
Training and Firing Sequence
0305. Phase 1 Initial Training. The LF lessons contained within the Commanders
Guide are to be fired by all recruits during Services Phase 1 Training. Reserve recruits
are to achieve the same standards as regular recruits:
0306. DCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMTPreparation is to be
fired in accordance with MATTs by all DCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units
whose personal weapon is the Rifle.
0307. BCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be
fired in accordance with MATTs by all BCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units
whose personal weapon is the Rifle or Carbine.
0308. ACMT Familiarisation with DCCT. After the ACMT Preparation and before
the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT
practices will improve first time pass rates and the overall standard of shooting.
3-1
0309. Remedial Training. DCCT provides an invaluable aid to the remedial training
of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever they
are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. All Rifle LF
lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a rehearsal
prior to firing on the range.
Safety
0310. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to live firing of a
confirm that all firers firing any weapon have completed the relevant WHTs within the
previous six months of firing.
Conduct of LF Lessons
0311. General Requirements. The general requirements of equipment and outline range procedures which apply to all ranges are shown below. Any requirements
specific to a particular LF lesson are contained at the start of each lesson.
0312. Stores. The following stores are required:
Rifles complete to CES
Cleaning material
Issued, serviceable hearing protection
Combat helmets
Issued Body Armour
Personal Shooting Record Book
Coaching Aide Memoire (AC 71158)
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC Complete
Stop watch
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
As required
As required
0313. Dress. The dress for Rifle LF lessons should include belt order webbing,
combat helmets and body armour. Additionally, when OSPREY, Mark 7 helmets,
ballistic eye protection and rifle ancillaries are issued, the firer should be given the
opportunity to practice with them. The dress rules for Phase One Recruits and Trainee
Combat Infantrymen should be applied sensibly with a gradual increase in the amount
of additional equipment. However, the conditions for the ACMT are to be rigorously
applied.
0314. DCCT. Firers are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other
shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in
order to familiarise themselves with the conditions.
0315. SAC. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the rifle prior to firing a grouping
practice. Once zeroed, the Personal Zeroing Position (PZP) is to be noted in the firers
shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to any future live firing
lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT.
3-2
0316. Weapon and Firing Preparation.

a. Where possible, rifles should be prepared for firing prior to moving to
the range, to ensure they are prepared under ideal conditions and not those
that may be experienced on the range.
b. Each firer is to have the issued, serviceable hearing protection and their
shooting record card in their possession.
c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using Optic Sights at 25 metres.
During grouping practices it must be emphasised to firers that they are to take
the correct Point of Aim (POA) for each shot and avoid aiming off.
d.
If fire trenches are not available the prone position is to be used.
0317. Aiming Marks. The POA is to be the bottom centre of the white patch.
0318. Coaching. DCC Training Volume IV, Marksmanship Coaching and the
Coaching Aide Memoire contain details of the coaching requirements. Some essential
points to ensure are:
a. The RCO and all coaches on the range must have prior knowledge of
coaching techniques.
b. Where possible a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient
coaches the Master Coach system should be used.
c. For ranges up to and including 300 metres, sights are to be set at 300.
Firers are to be reminded to alter their sights (SUSAT) prior to firing shoots
at 400 metres.
d. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be
recorded on the firers personal shooting record card.
e. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary
and advanced application of fire practices.
0319. CQM Coaching. DCC Training Volume IV, Marksmanship Coaching and the
Coaching Aide Memoire contain details of the coaching requirements. Some essential
points to ensure are:
a. The Conducting Officer and all the coaches on the range must have
prior knowledge of CQM coaching and firing techniques.
b. Where possible, a coach should be with each firer. If there are insufficient
coaches all POAs should be recorded on the firers personal shooting record
card.
c. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during practices to avoid
the need for dressing forward when possible.
3-3
d. Shot cadence or tempo can be judged in the following manner, for half
second cadence say and between shots (1 and 2 and 3) and for quarter
second cadence, the sights should just have time to bounce onto the target
prior to pulling the trigger again (1, 2, 3, 4).
e. CQM LFMT 5 Pistol can be carried out as a single action, double action
or press drill practice to cover all the nuances of the weapon.
f.
From CQM LFMT 6 onwards the firer should be encouraged to wear
their primary weapon and carry out a dry transition. This will not only practice
the firer in a realistic situation but reinforce the fact that the pistol is a
secondary weapon system and only used in an emergency.
g. The accuracy of the rifle and pistol differs and the scoring areas on the
target reflect this(see Fig 3-1a).Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to
enable firers and coaches to gain the maximum information from the shots
fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed as spotters, using
binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximum value from
this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity to
discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0320. Spotters. Where possible, to enable the firers and coaches to gain the
maximum benefit from the shots being fired, members of the waiting detail should
be employed as spotters, using binoculars to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve
maximum training value from this type of firing, it is essential that firers are given every
opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0321. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of
progress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing.
0322. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the firers at the end
of each practice. Details of the scoring system are shown in each individual lesson.
0323. End of Lesson Procedure. At the end of each LF lesson the following drills
are to be completed once the range is cleared:
a.
Questions from the firers on the range period.
b.
Normal safety precautions/declaration.
c.
Pack kit.
d. Summary of standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson,

forecast of next LF lesson.
WHTs General Instructions
0324. Purpose. The purpose of WHTs is to provide a measure of personal weapon
handling skill throughout the Services in line with operational safety and handling
requirements. Mandatory testing ensures that handling skills of all personnel are
monitored accurately and rectified if necessary.
3-4
0325. Testing and Results.

a. All tests are to be carried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified,
competent instructor. Standards are to be measured:
(1)
At an appropriate stage during Phase 1 Recruit Training.
(2) At intervals in accordance with MATTs for regular and reserve

units.
b. Results. All results must be recorded in accordance with unit and chain
of command procedures.
0326. Conduct. NSPs are to be carried out by the instructor on all weapons and
drill ammunition prior to any WHT taking place. Tests are as per the tables in this
section and are to be completed consecutively using drill ammunition.
a. Initial Training. Tests 1-10 are to be completed prior to initial live firing.
Tests 11-14 are to be conducted before LF Lesson 5. Test 15-17 are to be
conducted before LF Lesson 10.
b. Regular & Reserve Units. All tests (1-17) are to be conducted as part
of MATTs.
0327. Dress. Tests are to be carried out wearing belt order webbing with combat
helmet.
Definition of Standards
0328. Handling, Gunners Goals and Progress . Handling Gunners Goals and
Progress achieved in WHTs are defined as::
Pass

Pass in all tests.
Fail

Fail in any test.
0329. Training Performance Standards. A firer is considered competent on

achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the firer
is not competent in the use of the Rifle. Retesting is to be carried out on completion of
remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
3-5
WHTs Rifle - Safe Handling

Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
3-6
Test No. 1
Safety
Rifle, unloaded. Safety Catch at F, change lever at R. Weapon lying on
the ground.
1. Order the firer to Take control of the weapon. The firer, without
further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out normal safety
precautions.
1. Standard:
Pass:
Fail:
Test No. 2
Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling
Rifle with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out),
flannelette and oil.
1. Order the firer to Strip the rifle as for daily cleaning. Ask the
following questions:
a. What size flannelette is used to clean the barrel?
b. What size flannelette is used to oil the barrel?
c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning in the following
conditions (choose any 2 conditions)

(1) Heavy rain and damp conditions.

(2) Dry, sandy or dusty conditions.

(3) Cold and extreme cold conditions.

(4) Hot, wet conditions.
2. Order the firer to indicate the parts of the combination tool that are used
to clean the gas plug.
3. Order the firer to Assemble the Rifle and carry out the function test.
4. Ask the following question:
a. If during the function test, or at any time you notice the change lever
over-rotates beyond its stops, what action is to be taken.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 or 2 mistakes.
Fail More than 2 mistakes.
2. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety.
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
30 Rounds, magazine.
Instructors Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine. Fit
depressor.
1. On the command Go the firer fills their magazine with 30 Rounds by
hand.
No time limit
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 4
Loading Standing Position
Rifle, one magazine in fastened pouch.
Instructors Note: Load with a magazine fitted with a depressor.
Give the command Load. Pouches must be refastened.
Instructors Note: Leave rifle loaded for Test No 5.
1. The firer is to be told that no time limit is imposed but that all actions
should be carried out quickly and correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than 1 mistake.
Test No. 5
Ready Drill Prone Position
Rifle loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets
1. Order Prone Position Down.
2. Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order Ready or
issue a range.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Ready Drill only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) Forward Assist
1. Order Fire.
2. Order Rifle firing alright rifle stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward on the
cocking handle and continue firing.
3. Order Rifle fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and Forward Assist
Drills only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
3-7
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
3-8
Test No. 7
IA and Loose Magazine Drill
Rifle loaded, representative targets.
1. Order Fire Rifle firing alright rifle stops. Firer to carry out
the IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward on the
2. Order Rifle still fails to fire.
3. On examination of body and chamber order Rounds in magazine
chamber clear. Allow the firer to complete the drill.
4. Order Rifle fires alright Stop..
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Loose Magazine Drill only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 8
IA and Obstruction Drill
Rifle loaded, representative targets
1. Order Fire Rifle firing alright rifle stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking Handle not fully forward.
2. On examination of body and chamber, order Obstruction.
3. When the firer has removed the magazine and attempted to clear
the obstruction by hand or using a tool from the maintenance kit, order
Obstruction Clear.
4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber, order Chamber
Clear.
5. Firer is to complete the obstruction drill.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Obstruction Drill only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 9
IA and Empty Magazine Drill
1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Holding Open Catch,
with the working parts held to the rear, order Test and adjust fire Rifle
firing alright rifle stops.
2. Firer is to carry out the IA...Empty Magazine. Firer is to carry out the
drill for an empty magazine.
3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order Rifle
fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Empty Magazine Drill only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 10
Unloading
Rifle loaded and ready (from Test No. 9)
The test follows on from Test No.9. Give the command Unload. The test
is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it
in the magazine and fastened the pouch.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
3-9
WHTs Rifle - Zeroing

0330. The zeroing test is to be completed prior to attempting LF 5 and is designed
to ensure the firer is competent in zeroing his own rifle. If the firer fails the test they
are to be given remedial training on Rifle lesson prior to attempting the test again.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
3-10
Test No. 11
Group size and Correct Zeroing Position (CZP)
Coaching Aide Memoire for soldier.
Ask the soldier the following questions based on the sight fitted to the rifle
and the distance fired:
Q - What is the maximum permissible extreme spread prior to zeroing the
rifle?
A - 25m optic - 38 mm
25m iron - 50 mm
Q What is the CZP for your rifle?
A 100 m optic 90 mm above the POA 25 m optic - 22 mm below the
POA
A 100 m iron 100 mm above the POA 25 m iron 25 mm below the
POA
Standard:
Pass: Correct answers.
Fail: Incorrect answer.
Test No. 12
Alterations
Coaching Aide Memoire for soldier.
Ask the soldier one of the following three questions with answers
dependant on the sight fitted to the rifle and the distance fired:
Q 1 - If the MPI is 250 mm high and 100 mm left what alterations would be
made?
Q 2 - If the MPI is 200 mm low and 350 mm right what alterations would be
made?
Q 3 - If the MPI is 100 mm low and 50 mm left what alterations would be
made?
Standard:
Pass: Correct answer.
Note: The soldier is to accurately estimate the adjustments required.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 13
Sight Adjustment
Rifle with sighting system Comb tool
Using the answers gained from Test No 2, the soldier is to demonstrate
how the adjustments are to be made to the sight.
Standard:
Pass: All corrections need to be correctly applied.
Note: The solider is to indicate the adjustments using the sight and
combination tool to aid his explanation. No adjustments are to be made to
the sight.
Test No. 14
Permissible Variation
Nil
Ask the soldier the following questions based on the sight fitted to the rifle
and the distance fired:
Q 1 On completion of the 5 round check group, how do you know that the
rifle is zeroed?
A - PV at 100 m:
SUSAT & iron sight is 50 mm.
LDS is 30 mm
A - PV at 25 m:
SUSAT & iron sight is 13 mm
LDS is 10 mm
Q 2 If the PV is greater than the distance allowed what procedure is to be
followed?
A - Leave the 5 round check group on the target and fire another 15
Rounds in order to repeat the zeroing procedure.
Standard:
Pass: Each question correctly answered.
WHTs Rifle - Application of Fire

0331. The Application of Fire test is to be completed prior to attempting LF 10 and
is designed to ensure the firer is competent in applying his fire correctly. If the firer
fails the test they are to be given remedial training prior to attempting the test again.
Subject
Stores
Test No. 15
Wind Allowance
Representative Fig 11 target.
Representative aiming aid.
3-11
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
3-12
Ask the firer 2 of the questions below, including one from questions 3 and
4:
Q 1 Where would you aim at 100 m with a strong wing L R?
Q 2 Where would you aim at 200 m with a fresh wind R L?
Q 3 Where would you aim at 300 m with a fresh wind L R?
Q 4 Where would you aim at 300 m with a strong wind R L?
Standard:
Pass: 2 correct answers.
Test No. 16
Miss Drill
As for Test 15.
Ask the firer the following question:
Q After firing 2 Rounds you identify that you are missing the target. What
action would you take, and why?
A Aim at the base centre of the target in order to observe strike and then
aim off accordingly.
Standard:
Pass: Correct answer.
Test No. 17
Application of Fire
As for Test 15.
Ask the firer 2 questions from the list below:
Q 1 You identify that after firing your group the MPI is forming in the area
of the helmet. Where would you aim so that the MPI lands centrally on the
target?
of the left edge of the target. Where would you aim so that the MPI lands
centrally on the target?
his right shoulder. Where would you aim so that the MPI lands centrally on
the target?
Q 4 You identify that after firing your group the MPI that one round is on
the left edge of the target and the other round is on the right edge of the
target. What action would you take, and why?
Standard:
Pass: 2 correct answers.
Rifle LF 1. DCCT Grouping at 25 Metres (Prone)

A. RCO Notes
0332. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire the rifle correctly in the
prone position.
0333. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted using DCCT.
0334. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all
practices.
0335. Stores.
Complete DCCT equipment
0336. Miscellaneous. Instructors should be aware that additional time may be
required in this lesson for the adjustment of sights to obtain correct eye relief.
B. Conduct of the Lesson

Preliminaries
0337. Safety. Normal safety precautions.
0338. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate where necessary the range
safety rules applicable to DCCT.
Practice Details
0339. Practice details are as follows
Practice 1. Grouping
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone (Unsupported)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
4 x 25 mm square aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at each aiming mark.

2. The firer is to apply their safety catch and stand up after each group.
3. Discuss the groups and record the group sizes.
3-13
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone (Supported,bipod or magazine rested)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. The firer is to apply their safety catch and stand up after each
group.
Firers Goals and Progress

0340. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress:
a.
Basic Close Combat Role
61-85mm
b.
Dismounted Close Combat Role
46-65mm
End of Lesson Procedure
3-14
Rifle LF 2. Introductory Shoot at 25 Metres (Prone)

A. RCO Notes
0341. Aim. To confirm that the firer knows how to prepare the rifle for firing. To
confirm that they can aim, hold and fire the rifle in the prone position and confirm that
they know how to clean the rifle after firing.
0342. Conduct. This lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with
screens placed 25 metres from firers.
0343. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all
practices.
0344. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x witness screen with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks per firer
40 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
0345. Miscellaneous. If the MPI of the groups in the prone position are badly
misplaced from the CZP, the sights should be adjusted by the coach (These
adjustments should not be discussed with the firer.)

Preliminaries
0347. Preparing the Rifle for Firing. Remind the squad of the procedures for
cleaning the rifle before firing. Weapons must be bore sighted before live firing
commences.
0348. Confirm by practice. Prepare the rifles for firing.
0349. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range
safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
0350. Firing Practice. Explain that a firer who can fire their shots into a small group
can become a good shot. The firer will not group well unless they are:
a.
Determined that each shot will be a good one.
b.
Applies the marksmanship principles.
c.
Always aims in the same place.
d.
Tells the coach what the aim picture was like at the moment of firing.
0351. Confirm by questions.
3-15
Practice Details
0352. Practice details are as follows:
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone (Unsupported)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Range/Positioning
25 m Prone (Supported,bipod or magazine rested)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions


a.
61-85mm
b.
Dismounted Close Combat Role
46-65mm
After Firing Procedure

0354. Cleaning after Firing. Confirm Stripping, Cleaning and Assembling.
0355. Confirm by practice. Rifles are to be inspected and left lightly oiled.
0356. Care after Cleaning. Remind: Under normal circumstances the bore,
chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and reoiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the rifle has been fired.
3-16
Rifle LF 3. DCCT Grouping at 25 Metres (Other Positions)

A. RCO Notes
0357. Aim. To practise the firer in holding, aiming and firing the rifle correctly in the
sitting, kneeling, squatting, standing positions.
0358. Conduct. This practice is to be conducted using DCCT.
practices.
0360. Stores
0361. Miscellaneous. The Coach is to explain to the firer that the position of
the group is not relevant at this stage and that the MPI will be adjusted during later
shoots. However, the firer should note that the MPI is likely to change depending on
the position being used.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Grouping (Fired Twice)
Range/Positioning
25 m Sitting, Kneeling or Squatting, Standing Unsupported, Kneeling

and Standing Supported
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group from two of the nominated positions.

3. Repeat the practice until all positions have been fired.
3-17

Position
BCC
DCC
Sitting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Supported
or Squatting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Standing Supported
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Unsupported
or Squatting
106-150mm
86-120mm
Standing Unsupported
106-150mm
86-120mm
3-18
Rifle LF 4. Grouping at 25 Metres (Other Positions)

A. RCO Notes
0366. Aim. To practise the firer in holding, aiming and firing their rifle correctly in the
sitting, kneeling, squatting and standing positions.
practices.
0369. Stores
Normal range stores (25 m range)
1 x witness screen target with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks per firer
0370. Miscellaneous.
a. The Coach is to explain to the firer that the position of the group is not
relevant at this stage and that the MPI will be adjusted during later shoots.
However, the firer should note that the MPI is likely to change depending on
the position being used.

Preliminaries
0372. Preparing the Rifle for Firing. Remind the squad of the procedures for
cleaning the rifle before firing.
Practice Details
3-19

Range/Positioning
25 m Sitting, Kneeling or Squatting, Standing Unsupported,

Kneeling,Standing Supported
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group from two of the nominated positions.

3. Repeat the practice until all positions have been fired.

Position
BCC
DCC
Sitting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Supported
or Squatting
61-75mm
56-65mm
Standing Supported
61-75mm
56-65mm
Kneeling Unsupported
or Squatting
106-150mm
86-120mm
106-150mm
86-120mm
3-20
Rifle LF 5. Zeroing at 25 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0376. Aim. To zero the weapon by superimposing the firers MPI onto the CZP,
practices.
0379. Stores.
1 x witness screen target
2 x 25 m zeroing chart for each firer
0380. Miscellaneous
a. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers (when applicable) are to
be fully conversant with the details in Ref B relating to Zeroing.
b.
Weapons must be bore sighted before live firing commences.
Preliminaries

Practice Details
Range/Positioning
25m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire 3 x 3 round groups at the same aiming mark.

2. The firer is to apply their safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt their
position between each group.
3. Discuss the group and measure the group size.
4. Identify the MPI and adjust for zero if necessary.
3-21
Practice 2. Check Group

Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a 3 round check group to confirm zero.

2. If the correct zero is not achieved (see Rifle Lesson 17), repeat
Practice 1 using the group plus a further 6 Rounds.
3. Once zero is confirmed record settings using the SAC.

0384. The following 3 round group sizes are necessary to be considered zeroed:
a.
b.
Dismounted Close Combat Role 38mm
50mm

0385. Personal Zeroing Positions (PZPs) are to be recorded once correctly zeroed.
3-22
Rifle Practice 1. DCCT Stage 1 Confirmation

A. RCO Notes
0386. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire their rifle correctly in all
combat positions
0387. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted using DCCT.
practices.
0389. Stores.
Preliminaries

Practice Details
0393. Repeat practices from Rifle LF 1 and 3 as required.
0394. The following group sizes are be achieved as confirmation of stages:
Position
BCC
DCC
Prone
50mm
38mm
Sitting
65mm
55mm
Kneeling Supported or Squatting
65mm
55mm
Standing Supported
65mm
55mm
Kneeling Unsupported or Squatting
130mm
110mm
130mm
110mm
3-23
Rifle LF 6. Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM Identifying

Points Of Aim (POA)
A. RCO Notes
0395. Aim. To identify the firers Point of Impact and POA at 3m to 15m.
0396. Conduct. Planning Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with
the RAU that CQM practices are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on
LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified. CQM is not to be conducted on 1908
Design Barrack Ranges.
practices.
0398. Stores
Normal range stores
2 x Figure Targets with 2 x 25mm square aiming marks per target
Preliminaries

Practice Details
03101. Practice details are as follows.
Practice 1. Identify and Apply the POA
Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2x Figure Target with 2 x 25mm aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire 3 well aimed shots at the nominated aiming mark

2. Discuss the fall of shot and subsequent aim off.
3. Repeat the practice at the different ranges to confirm the POA.
4. Record the POA.

03102. Record all Points of Aim.
3-24
Rifle LF 7. Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM Accelerated

Fire Training
A. RCO Notes
03103. Aim. To practice and confirm the ability of a firer to apply accelerated firing
techniques in order to achieve multiple, rapid and accurate hits on target.
practices.
03106. Stores
Normal range stores
2 x Fig 11/21 CQM Target per firer (see Fig 3-1)

Preliminaries
03109. Firing Practice. Explain that learning to quickly adopt the correct position
and hold of a weapon will allow a firer to engage a target with increasing speed and
accuracy at close quarters.
3-25
Practice Details
Practice 1. Accelerated Fire.
Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21.
2. 5 x 3 second exposure.
1. Fire 2 shots per exposure with 1 second shot cadence at the left
target.
2. Dress forward and discuss the results.
3. Repeat the practice on the right target.
4. Dress forward and discuss the results, record the scores on the
right target only.
Practice 2. Accelerated Fire

Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.

Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a half second shot cadence.

Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a quarter second shot cadence.
3-26
Scoring
03111. Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within the outer
scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target.
HPS 80
Pass 56
3-27
Fig 3-1a Figure 21 CQM Target
Fig 3-1b Figure 11 CQM Target
Fig 3-1c Figure 22 CQM Target
3-28
Rifle LF 8. Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM Failure to Stop

A. RCO Notes
03112. Aim. To confirm the firers ability to rapidly engage a target using two POA.
practices.
03115. Stores
Normal range stores
2 x Fig 11/21 CQM Target per firer (see Fig 3-1)
Preliminaries

03118. Firing Practice. Explain that the firer may be required to engage the body
and subsequently the head with well aimed rapid shots in order to defeat the enemy
at close quarters.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Failure to Stop
Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21.
1. Firer in the CQB stance.
2. Order Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire two shots at the body and two to the head within each
engagement.
4. Discuss the fall of shot, record scores.
3-29

Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.

Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.

Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
HPS 128
Pass 90
3-30
Rifle LF 9. Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM Multiple

Targets 15-3 Metres
A. RCO Notes
03121. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging multiple targets by rapid shooting at
close range whilst firing from the right and left sides of the body..
practices.
03124. Stores
Normal range stores
2 x Fig 11/21 CQM Target (see Fig 3-1)
Preliminaries

a. Firers must have been formally taught, practiced and deemed
competent in the technique of engaging from the left side of the body.
The RCO is to confirm this before firing from the left side of the body
is permitted.
b. Firing from the left side must only be conducted using the CQB red
dot sight. Under no circumstances should left sided firing be attempted
using any other sight.
c. Firers are to be reminded to take great care when firing from the
left side of the body and to keep the head away from the movement of
the cocking handle in order to prevent serious injury.
d. When firing from the left hand side of the body the firers must
keep their hands in the conventional position and the weapon should
be tilted to the right to reduce the risk of the firer being struck by ejected
cases.
3-31
03127. Firing Practice. Explain that when confronted with multiple targets at close
range, a firer must quickly decide the priority of engagement before engaging rapidly
and accurately.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Pairs
Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
1. On command or appearance of the targets, fire two Rounds at each
target.
2. After the second engagement, dress forward and discuss the
results.
3. Record the scores
4. Repeat the practice firing from the left side of the body.
5. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Pairs
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Pairs
Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
3-32
Practice 4. Pairs
Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
HPS 128
Pass
90
3-33
Rifle LF 10. DCCT - Establishing the Point of Aim and Apply

Fire (All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
03130. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire their rifle in the prone,
sitting, kneeling or squatting and standing position from 100m to 300m and apply fire
to the centre of the target.
practices.
03133. Stores.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Deliberate
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen
Instructions
1. Use 5 Rounds to identify the MPI.

2. Apply fire with the next 5 Rounds
3. Record the group size and note the appropriate POA.
3-34
Range/Positioning
100 m Sitting Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions

3. Record the group size and note the POA.
Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
3-35
Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling Supported/ Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
200 m Standing Supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
200 m Sitting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.

Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 5
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Scoring
03137. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA. Fire a further
5 Rounds.
03138. Achieving group sizes in relation to the ESA and applying fire successfully.
3-36
Rifle LF 11. Establish the Point of Aim and Apply Fire at 100m
(All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
sitting, kneeling or squatting and standing position at 100m and apply fire to the centre
of the target.
03140. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without
SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS, or a GR.
practices.
03142. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x 1.220 m screen with Figure 11 per firer
1 x 1.220 m screen with Figure 12 per firer or
1 x Figure 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range)
45 x Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or SARTS

Figure 12d
Instructions
1. Check Zero
3-37
Range/Positioning
100m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions

3. Record the group size and note the appropriate POA on the
shooting record card.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 2.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 2.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 2.
Instructions
As per Practice 2.
Scoring
03146. After the 5 shots the target is lowered and all shot holes are indicated with
spotting discs.
5 Rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
3-38
Rifle LF 12. Establishing the Point of Aim and Apply Fire at

200-300m (All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
sitting, kneeling or squatting and standing position at 200 to 300m and apply fire to
the centre of the target.
practices.
03152. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x 1.220 m screen with Figure 11 per firer or
1 x Figure 11 per firer (on SARTS converted range)
50/60 x Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions

3. Record the group size and note the appropriate POA on the
3-39
Range/Positioning 200 m Kneeling Supported/ Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Range/Positioning 200 m Standing Supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Range/Positioning 200 m Sitting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Range/Positioning 200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Practice 6. Deliberate (DCC Only)
Range/Positioning 300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As per Practice 1.
Instructions
As per Practice 1.
Scoring
spotting discs.
5 Rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
3-40
Rifle LF 13. Dcct Advanced Application of Fire up to

300 Metres (All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
03159. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid shooting from
the prone, sitting, standing, kneeling and standing positions.
practices.
03162. Stores.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
03165. As time permits additional selected practices to provide familiarisation can be
conducted in CBRN conditions. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
8 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals.
1. Firers in the prone position.
2. Fire 3 x sighters one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
3. Identify the corrected POA.
4. Fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when hit.
4. Order Watch and Shoot
3-41
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Sitting
8 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters
1. Firers in the sitting position.
Practice 3. Snap/Rapid
Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported Squatted/prone
Ammunition
16 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters
Target/ Exposure
3. 2 x 12 second exposures with an interval to allow all firers to adopt
the standing alert position.
1. Fire 3 x sighters from both positions one round at each exposure,
targets fall when hit.
2. Firer in the standing alert position.
3. On the appearance of the target, the firer is to fire one round
Instructions
standing then adopt either the kneeling unsupported/squatting or prone
position and fire a further 4 Rounds at the exposure.
4. Firers must adopt the standing alert position between exposures.
5. Targets up and hold.
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-42
200 m Prone
8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals.
Practice 5. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Fire Trench

8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 1 x 10 second exposure
1. Firers in the fire trench.
3. Fire 5 Rounds at the exposure, targets up and hold.
200 m Kneeling Supported

8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 1 x 8 second exposure followed by 4 x 4 second exposures with
irregular intervals
1. Firers in the kneeling supported position.
3. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point,
ready.
4. On appearance of the target run onto the firing point, adopt the
kneeling supported position and fire one round at each exposure.
5. Order Watch out.

8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals .
1. Firers in the standing supported position.
3-43
Practice 8. Snap/Rapid DCC ONLY

Ammunition
13 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters.
Target/ Exposure
irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure.
ready.
4. On appearance of the target move onto the firing point, adopt the
Instructions
prone position and fire one round at each exposure, targets fall when
hit.
5. Order Watch out.
6. After the fifth exposure, target is up and hold, order Stop, five
Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
Scoring
03166. One point per hit. Sighters are not scored.
03167. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below is
a guide to progress.
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1&2
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
4&5
200 m
10
10
6&7
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
10
3-44
HPS
Rifle LF 14. Advanced Application of Fire at 100

Metres(All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
03168. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by deliberate, snap and rapid
shooting from the prone, sitting, kneeling/squatting positions and standing positions.
03169. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideally fitted
with SARTS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR.
03170. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the practice details.
practices.
03172. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres per firer
SARTS converted range

Preliminaries
03173. Safety. Normal safety precautions
Practice Details
03175. The practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
8 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters.
3-45
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Sitting
8 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters
1. Firers in the sitting position.
Range/Positioning 100 m Standing and Kneeling Unsupported/ Squatting/Prone
Ammunition
16 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 3 x Sighters.
Target/ Exposure
1. Fire 3 x sighters from both positions one round at each exposure,
targets fall when hit.
Instructions
Scoring
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1&2
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
3-46
HPS
Rifle LF14 Time Chart

03178. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
17
26
37
47
Timings
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
1. Fall when hit.
Remarks
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
1. Fall when hit.
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
DOWN
18
1. Reset watch and repeat once.

2. Up and hold
3-47
Rifle LF 15. Advanced Application of Fire up to 300 Metres

(All Positions)
A. RCO NOTES
03179. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire at longer
ranges out to 300m.
03180. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideally
converted for SARTS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR.
03181. Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings of the
shoot.
03183. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 at 200-300 metres per firer
32/45 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-48
200 m Prone
8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals
Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Fire Trench

8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
1. Firers in the fire trench.

8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
irregular intervals.
3. Firer in the standing alert position, 5 m behind the firing point, ready.
4. On appearance of the target run onto the firing point, adopt the
5. Order Watch out.

8 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
3. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals
3-49

Ammunition
13 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 3 x Sighters
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
hit.
5. Order Watch out.
Scoring.
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
1&2
200 m
10
10
3&4
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
10
3-50
HPS
Rifle LF 15 Time Chart

allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
19
33
45
58
Timings
DOWN
11
25
39
51
1:04
1. Fall when hit.
Remarks
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
DOWN
16
1. Up and Hold
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
1. Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
1. Fall when hit.
300 m
Figure 11
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
1:15
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
1:26
1. Fall when hit.

2. Final exposure up and hold.
3-51

A. RCO Notes
the prone, sitting, standing, kneeling/squatting positions.
practices.
03193. Stores.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
03196. As time permits additional selected practices to provide familiarisation can be
conducted in CBRN conditions. Practice details are as follows:
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-52
100 m Prone and Sitting

10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
4. Apply Safety move into the sitting position.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Range/Positioning 200 m Prone and Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals, followed by 1 x 10
second exposure
1. Firer in the prone position.
Instructions
4. Apply Safety move into the Fire Trench.
6. Order Five Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Kneeling Supported and Standing Supported

10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
irregular intervals, followed by 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular
intervals .
3. Order Watch out.
4. After the fifth exposure order adopt the Standing Supported
position.
5. There will be five more exposures, fire one round at each, targets fall
when hit.
3-53

Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
ready.
Instructions
hit.
3. Order Watch out.
Scoring.
03198. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below are
to be achieved as confirmation of stages
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
10
3-54
HPS
Rifle LF 16. Advanced Application of Fire at 100 Metres

(All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
the prone, sitting, standing, kneeling and standing positions.
03200. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR, ideally fitted
with SARTS. Where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR.
practices.
03203. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 12d at 100 metres per firer

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
3-55
Practice 2. Snap/ Rapid

Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
03207. One point per hit.
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
HPS
Rifle LF16 Time Chart

allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
1. Fall when hit.

100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
DOWN
18

2. Up and hold.
3-56
Timings
Remarks

(All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
03210. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from the
prone, fire trench kneeling and standing supported positions at longer ranges out to
200.
shoot.
03214. Stores.
Normal range stores

Preliminaries
Practice Details
3-57
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
second exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
intervals .
3. Order Watch out.
position.
when hit.
Scoring
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
200 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
3-58
HPS

allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
19
33
45
58
UP
16
Timings
DOWN
11
25
39
51
1:04
DOWN
27
1. Fall when hit.

2. Reset watch and move into fire
trench
3. Final exposure up and hold
Remarks
200 m
Figure 11
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
1. Fall when hit.

2. Reset watch, adopt standing
supported.
3. Fall when hit.
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
3-59

(All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
prone at longer ranges out to 300m.
shoot.
03225. Stores.
Normal range stores

Preliminaries
Practice Details
3-60
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
ready.
Instructions
hit.
3. Order Watch out.
Scoring
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
300 m
10
HPS
10

allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
300 m
Figure 11
Timings
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
1:15
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
1:26
Remarks
1. Fall when hit.
2. Final exposure up and
hold.
3-61

A. RCO Notes
03232. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid shooting
from the prone, sitting, standing unsupported, kneeling supported and kneeling
unsupported/squatting positions.
practices.
03236. Stores.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-62

10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
second exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
intervals .
3. Order Watch out.
position.
when hit.
3-63
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
ready.
Instructions
hit.
3. Order Watch out.
Scoring
03241. The OMS for each practice or group of practices shown in the table below are
to be achieved as confirmation of stages
OMS Requirement
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
10
3-64
HPS
Rifle ACMT Preparation

A. RCO Notes
03242. Aim. To prepare the firer for the ACMT; by zeroing the weapon and identifying
the MPI of groups fired from all of the ranges and firing positions used during the
ACMT in order to establish the correct Points of Aim (POA).
03243. Firing Requirement. This shoot must be fired annually by all personnel
employed in the DCC and BCC Role whose personal weapon is the Rifle/Carbine,
immediately prior to the ACMT It is not fired during Phase 1 Other Arms Recruit
Training or during Infantry Phase 2 Training because the LF lessons are fired instead.
03244. Ranges. This ACMT Preparation can be conducted on the same range as
the ACMT, ETR, GR, CGR.
03245. Timing. Each
practices 1 to 7.
detail will take approximately 120 minutes to complete
03246. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch
(on the centre of the figure) per firer.
1 x Figure 11/21 Stick In at 50m per firer
1 x Figure 12 on a screen (GR) at 100 metres per firer
1 x Figure 11 at 200 and 300 metres per firer
1 x Figure 11 on a screen (GR) at 200 and 300 metres per firer or
1 x Figure 11 at 200 and 300 metres per firer
91 DCC 85 BCC x Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
a. The dress and equipment for the ACMT Preparation is to be the same
as the ACMT.
b. Weapons must be collimated or bore sighted before live firing
commences.
c. Firers must achieve a 300 mm group with 20 Rounds from the prone
position at 100 metres with Iron Sight or 225 mm group with Optic Sight
during Practice 1 before adjusting their sights.
3-65
d. Coaching is permitted during the ACMT Preparation. However, as

the LF is for trained soldiers they must be encouraged to make their own
decisions when zeroing, establishing MPI and recording their POA for all
ranges and firing positions used in the ACMT.
e. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and soldiers are to be fully
conversant with the details in Ref B relating to zeroing and application of fire.
f.
To maximise First Time Pass Rates (FTPR), after this ACMT Preparation
and before the ACMT is fired on a range, the ACMT should be conducted on
the DCCT to familiarise firers with the practices

Preliminaries
03250. Preparation.
Practice 1. Zeroing
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
20 Rounds
Figure 12d
2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt his
position between groups.

Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12d
2. If the correct zero is not achieved repeat Practice 1 using the group
Instructions
plus a further 15 Rounds.
3. Once zero is confirmed record settings using the SAC.
3-66
Practice Details
Practice 3. Establish POA 3-15 m
Range/Positioning 3-15 m Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
12 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11/21 Stick in
1. At each range fire two well aimed shots at the nominated aiming mark.
Instructions
2. Estb the POA.
3. Fire a shot to confirm the POA.
Practice 4. Establish POA 100 m
100 m Prone,Sitting, Standing unsupported, Kneeling or Squatting
Range/Positioning
unsupported
Ammunition
24 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 or Figure 12 (on a screen) or SARTS Figure 12
1. Fire 3 Rounds application to confirm the MPI.
2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed
Instructions
3. Firers are to record their POA on the shooting record.
4. Fire further Rounds (3 maximum) to confirm the POA.
5. Repeat the practice for each firing position.
Range/Positioning 200 m Prone, Kneeling Supported Fire Trench, Standing Supported
Ammunition
24 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
2. If possible all shots are to be signalled or viewed.
Instructions
4. Fire further Rounds (3 maximum) to confirm the POA.
Practice 6. Establish POA 300 m (DCC only)
Range/Positioning 300m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4. Fire further Rounds (3 maximum) to confirm
the POA.
3-67
Additional Practices
Range/Positioning 100 300 m
Ammunition
Remaining Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As Per ACMT
Concentrating on known or likely weaknesses conduct selected ACMT
Instructions
practices
3-68
Rifle/Carbine ACMT
A. RCO Notes
03252. Firing Requirement.
a. ACMT (DCC Role) is to be fired by all Infantry firers during Infantry
Phase 2 Training, annually by all combat infantrymen, RLC Firer Pioneer
Support personnel and personnel employed in the DCC Role whose personal
weapon is the Rifle.
b. ACMT (BCC Role) is to be fired by all firers during Phase 1 Other
Arms Recruit Training and annually by all Other Arms and Service personnel
employed in the Basic Close Combat Role whose personal weapon is the
Rifle/Carbine.
03253. Ranges. Rifle/Carbine ACMT can be fired on an ETR, GR or CGR.
03254. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete.
03255. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 1 x 75 x 100 mm white patch
1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer
2 x Figure 11/21 Stick In, with 2 x 25 mm aiming marks per target
SARTS
1 x Figure 11 at 200/300 metres per firer
2 x Figure 11/21 Stick In, with 2 x 25 mm aiming marks per target
03256. Rules.
a. BCC firers who have not fired LF6 to 9 (CQM) are not to fire practice
1 (only applicable to Phase 1 Other Arms Training).
b. The dress and equipment for the test is to be combat dress, combat
helmet, hearing protection and belt order webbing, body armour (as issued).
c.
No extra time will be given for stoppages.
d.
Coaching and signalling are not permitted.
e.
If fire trenches are not available, the prone position is to be used.
03257. Time Charts. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
03258. Ammo. DCC - 79 Rounds, BCC 69 Rounds, this includes 5 Rounds for check
zeroing and 8 Rounds to confirm CQB POA.
3-69

Preliminaries
03261. Preparation.
Practice. Check Zero
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12
1. Fire 1 x 5 round group at the aiming mark.
Instructions
2. Confirm the Zero and record the group size.
Practice. Confirm CQB POA
Range/Positioning 3, 5, 10 and 15m Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21 with 2 x 25 mm aiming mark
1. At each range, fire 1 well aimed shot at the nominated aiming mark.
Instructions
2. Establish the POA.
3. Fire a second shot to confirm the POA..
Practice Details
Practice 1. CQM
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-70

16 Rounds
1. 2 x Figure 11/21
2. 1 x 4 second exposure at each range
1. Firer in the CQB stance at 15m.
2. Multiple Targets, fire two shots at each target.
3. Order Watch and shoot.
4. Apply Safety move to 10m and repeat 15m practice.
5. Apply Safety move to 5m.
6. Failure to Stop, fire two shots at the body and two to the head of the
left target.
8. Apply Safety move to 3m and repeat 5m practice.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
second exposure
Instructions
3-71
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
intervals .
3. Order Watch out.
position.
when hit.

Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
ready.
Instructions
hit.
3. Order Watch out.
Scoring
03263. Practice 1 - Two points per hit, inner scoring area. One point per hit, outer
03264. Practices 2 to 6 - One point per hit.
Standards
03265. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer fails a practice
they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who fail are to have
coaching before re-testing.
3-72
Prac
Range
Rounds
15 - 3m
2
3
OMS Requirement
HPS
BCC
DCC
Mksmn
16
22
22
26
32
100 m
10
10
100 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
200 m
10
10
300 m
10
NA
10
DCC
66
58
68
82
BCC
56
48
60
72
Less Prac 1
40
26
34
40
Totals
03266. Marksman. To qualify as a Marksman a firer must achieve the Marksman

score or more for all practices at the first attempt. Firers are NOT permitted to re-shoot
practices or the whole ACMT in order to qualify as a Marksman. Marksmen are entitled
to wear the badge for one year before they must re-qualify.
3-73
Rifle/Carbine ACMT Time Chart

03267. With the exception of Practice 1, one extra second has been included for
target movement. On certain gallery ranges additional time maybe required.
Practice
Range/Target
15 3m
Figure 11/21
Stick in
UP
05
DOWN
09
1. Up and hold.
2. Exposures controlled by whistle or
commands.
3. Repeat 3 times.
100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
1. Fall when hit.

100 m
Figure 12
UP
05
DOWN
18

2. Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
200 m
Figure 11
300 m
Figure 11
DOWN
11
25
39
51
1:04
DOWN
16
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
DOWN
14
26
40
52
1:05
1:26
1. Fall when hit.

2. Reset watch and move into fire trench
3. Final exposure up and hold
UP
05
19
33
45
58
UP
05
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
UP
05
17
26
37
47
UP
05
21
35
47
1:00
1:15
3-74
Timings
Remarks
1. Fall when hit.

2. Reset watch, adopt standing
supported.
3. Fall when hit.
1. Fall when hit.

2. Final exposure up and hold.
Rifle ACMT (Base Location)

A. Instructors Notes
03268. Firing Requirement. ACMT (Base Location). Rifle/Carbine ACMT (Base
Location) is to be fired annually by all personnel employed in the Base Location whose
personal weapon is the Rifle/Carbine.
03269. Ranges. Rifle/Carbine ACMT (Base Location) can be fired on an ETR, GR,
CGR
Note: ETR can only be used where the facility exists for the Fig 12 to be presented
during practice 8.
practices.
03271. Stores.
Normal range stores
CGR range
1 x Figure 11 -Left Coffin
1 x Figure 12 -Right Coffin
03272. Rules.
a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order
webbing, combat helmet, combat body armour (as issued) and issued,
serviceable hearing protection.
b.
c.
d.
Iron or Optic Sight may be used.
e. The ammunition allocated for the ACMT includes 5 Rounds for check
zeroing.
03274. Ammunition. ACMT(Base Location) 82 Rounds.
3-75

03276. Range Safety. Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range
03277. Preparation.
Practice. Check Zero
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
2. Confirm the Zero and record the group size.
Practice Details
Range/Positioning 100 m Standing Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
2. 5 x 6 second exposures with intervals of 5 seconds.
3. Firers are to fire one round at each exposure, from the standing
Instructions
supported position.
4. Targets are fall when hit. Firers are to adopt the standing alert position
between exposures.
Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-76

10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. One exposure of 35 seconds.
2. Order 10 Rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3. Firers are to fire 10 Rounds rapid at this exposure.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Standing/ Kneeling Supported

10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 double exposures of 6 seconds (down for 5 seconds and up for
6 seconds) with irregular intervals of 5 to 10 seconds between double
exposures.
1. Firers in Standing Alert position.
3. On appearance of the first exposure firers are to fire one round,
then adopt the kneeling supported position and fire a further round at
this exposure.
4. Targets are fall when hit.
5. Firers are to adopt the standing alert position between double
exposures.
100 m Kneeling / Squatting Unsupported

10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 x 10 second exposures with irregular intervals of 5 to 10 seconds
between exposures.
1. Firers in the standing alert position.
3. On the appearance of the target firers are to adopt the kneeling/
squatting position and fire two Rounds at each exposure.
4. Targets are up and hold
5. Firers are to adopt the standing alert position between exposures.

10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 x double exposures.
3. At each double exposure the targets are up for 10 seconds, down
for 4 seconds, up for 6 seconds.
1. Firers in the standing alert position 5m behind the FP.
2. Order Watch Out.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to move onto
the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and fire one
round at each exposure.
5. Between double exposures firers will be ordered Apply your
Safety Catches, Stand up, dress back 5m then adopt the standing
alert position.
3-77
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by a 15
Target/ Exposure
second intervals and 1 x 15 second exposure.
1. Firers in prone position.
3. Firers are to fire one round at each exposure.
Instructions
5. After fifth exposure order Stop, 5 Rounds Rapid, Watch and
Shoot.
6. Firers are to fire 5 Rounds at this exposure.
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-78
100 m Standing and Kneeling Supported

10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 5 x double exposures.
3. At each double exposure the targets are up for 8 seconds, down for
5 seconds, up for 6 seconds.
1. Firers in the standing supported position 5m to the rear of the firing
point.
2. Order Watch Out.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to move to
the firing point, adopt the standing supported position and fire one
round at that exposure, firers are then to adopt the kneeling supported
position and fire a further round at the next exposure.
5. Between double exposures firers will be ordered Apply your
safety catches, stand up and dress back five metres, adopt the
standing alert position.
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12 at foot of Mantlet (see note).
1. Firers in the nominated position.
3. Fire one round at each exposure.
Note: Figure 12 stick-in targets are to be positioned in front of the mantlet. Firers
are to move forward of the 100m firing point until 50m in front of the target. Targets
positioned in the Hythe frames or SARTS on top of the Mantlet may only be engaged
where Range Standing Orders permit their use.
Scoring
Standards
03280. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each
firing distance (see relevant table below). Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing
distance will constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the
firing distances where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail
are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before retesting.
Prac
1-7
Range
100 m
Total Rounds
65
OMS Requirement
45
HPS
65
50 m
49
70
Totals
3-79
Practice
Range/Target
100m
Figure 11
100m
Figure 11
Timings
Fall when hit.
Figure 11
100m
UP DOWN
05
12
17
24
29
36
41
48
56
1:03
1:09 1:16
1:26 1:33
1:38 1:45
1:54 2:01
2:06 2:13
Targets fall when hit.
Figure 11
100m
Targets up and hold.
Figure 11
100m
UP DOWN
05
16
31
42
50
1:01
1:11 1:22
1:31 1:42
UP DOWN
05
16
20
27
Figure 11
100m
UP
05
15
23
32
40
Figure 11
100m
UP
05
19
DOWN
14
26

Reset stopwatch and
repeat.
50 m
Figure 12
UP
05
13
25
34
44
DOWN
10
18
30
39
49
Up and hold (stick-in)
3-80
Remarks
UP DOWN
05
12
17
24
29
36
41
48
53 1.00
UP DOWN
05 41
DOWN
10
20
28
37
45
1:00 1:16

Reset stopwatch and
repeat 4 times.
Fall when hit for SARTS

& ETR
Annual Firing in CBRN Conditions Instructional Shoot and

Assessment
03281. Aim. To practise and assess the firer in engaging targets in CBRN conditions
by deliberate, snap and rapid shooting from the prone and kneeling unsupported and
supported positions.
03282. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR if converted
to SARTS, or a GR.
03283. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour to complete all practices.
If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings.
03284. Time Chart. A time chart for Practices 5 to 8 is included after the practice
details.
03285. Stores.
Normal range stores
Gallery Range (Practices 1 to 4)
1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with a 760 mm and a
1.220 m circle at 100 metres
1 x Figure 11 at 200 metres per firer or
1 x Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres
1 x Figure 11 per firer at 200 metres
03286. Miscellaneous. Full IPE should be worn. As a minimum firers are to wear
respirator and CBRN gloves.

Preliminaries
3-81
Practice Details
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fire 5 Rounds to identify the POA.
Instructions
2. Record the score and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
Range/Positioning 100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Range/Positioning 200 m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Assessment Details
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-82
100 m Kneeling Unsupported

5 Rounds
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12d.
2. 5 x 6 second exposures with 5 second intervals.
1. Fire in the nominated position.
4. Targets fall when hit.
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Prone
5 Rounds
3. Fire five Rounds at the exposure.

5 Rounds
1. Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.
200 m Prone
5 Rounds
2. 1 x 12 second exposures.
2. Order Five Rounds Rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire five Rounds at the exposure.
Scoring
Standards
firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will
constitute a failure of the LF lesson, however, only the practices at the firing distances
where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo
further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
3-83
Practice
Range
Total
Rounds
5&6
100m
7&8
200m
OMS Requirement
HPS
DCC
BCC
10
10
10
10
13
11
20
Totals
TIME CHART
allowed.
3-84
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05
12
17
24
29
36
41
48
53 1:00
Timings
Fall when hit.
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
14
19
28
32
41
45
54
59 1:08
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Remarks
Up and hold.
Royal Gibraltar Regiment Rifle ACMT (DCC Role)

03294. Firing Requirement. The Royal Gibraltar Regiment (RG) Rifle ACMT (DCC
Role) is only to be fired by RG firers during Infantry Phase 2 Training and is to be fired
annually by all RG combat infantrymen whose personal weapon is the rifle.
03295. Ranges. Due to the limited ranges available in Gibraltar, RG Rifle ACMT
(DCC Role) must be fired on two separate ranges to complete the test. These ranges
consist of a 25 metre Barrack Range and 125 metre ETR. Practices to be conducted
on each are as follows:
a.
25 metre Barrack Range
Practices 1 to 3.
b.
125 metre ETR
Practices 4 to 10.
practices. These timings do not include movement between ranges.
03297. Rules.
webbing, combat helmet, combat body armour (as issued) and issued,
b.
c.
d.
SUSAT only is to be used.
e.
f.
Whistle to control 25m practices.
03299. Ammunition. 60 rounds.

Preliminaries
safety rules (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
3-85
Practice Details
Practice 1. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
25 m Prone
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12 (100m representative target).
1. Firer in the nominated position.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2. On the appearance
of the target, the firer is to fire one round standing then adopt either the
Instructions
kneeling unsupported/ squatting or prone position and fire a further 4
rounds at the exposure.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3-86
5 Rounds
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2. 5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals, followed by 15
seconds later by 1 x 10 second exposure.
4. After the fifth exposure order Stop, 5 rounds rapid, Watch and
Instructions
Shoot..
5. Fire 5 rounds at the exposure.
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
125 m Fire Trench

5 Rounds
1. Firer in the standing alert position inside the fire trench, loaded,
ready.
2. The appearance of the target is the signal to adopt the nominated
position and fire one round at each exposure.
3. Between exposures order Apply safety catches, adopt the standing
alert position.
5. Order Watch Out.
125 m Fire Trench

5 Rounds
2. Fire 5 rounds at each exposure.
3. Up and hold.
4. Order Five rounds, rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3-87
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
125 m Fire Trench

5 Rounds
125 m Prone
5 Rounds
2. 1 x 8 second exposure followed 5 seconds later by 4 x 4 second
exposures with intervals of 5 10 seconds between intervals.
position and fire one round at each exposure.
4. Order Watch Out
Practice 9. Rapid/Snap
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
exposures with intervals of 5 12 seconds between intervals.
1. Firer in the standing alert position, loaded, ready.
position and fire 5 rounds at each exposure.
Instructions
4. After the first exposure order Stop, Watch and Shoot.
5. Fire one round at each of the remaining exposures.
7. Order Five rounds, rapid, Watch Out.
3-88
Scoring
03303. Practice 1 - Two points per hit, inner scoring area. One point per hit, outer
Practices 2 to 6 - One point per hit.
Standards
coaching before re-testing
Prac
Representative
Range
Rounds
1&3
100m
OMS Requirement
HPS
Score
Mksm
10
10
100m
10
10
200m
10
10
5&6
200m
10
10
7&8
300m
10
10
300m
10
10

score or more for all practices at the first attempt. Firers are NOT permitted to reshoot practices or the whole ACMT in order to qualify as a Marksman. Marksmen are
entitled to wear the badge for one year before they must re-qualify.
3-89
ROYAL GIBRALTAR REGIMENT RIFLE ACMT (DCC ROLE)

TIME CHART
03306. One extra second has been included for manual target movement on 25
metre Barrack Range and mechanical target movement on ETR.
Practice
3-90
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
25 m
UP
Figure 12 (100 m
05
representative target.) 17
26
37
47
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
25 m
UP
Figure 12 (100 m
05
representative target.)
DOWN
18
25 m
Figure 12 (100 m
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (200 m
05
26
37
47
1:07
DOWN
10
22
31
42
52
1:18
1. Fall when hit.
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (200 m
05
DOWN
14
1. Reset watch and

repeat 4 times.
2. Fall when hit.
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (200 m
05
DOWN
16
Up and hold.
125 m
Figure 11 (300 m
As for Practice 1.
Fall when hit.
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (300 m
05
33
45
58
Reset watch and

repeat once.
As for Practice 1.
DOWN
14
24
38
50
1:03
2. Up and hold.
Fall when hit.
125 m
UP
Figure 11 (300 m
05
43
60
1:15
1:25
DOWN
21
36
48
1:05
1:20
1:30
1. Up and hold
2. Fall when hit
3-91
3-92
CHAPTER 4
Scope
THE LIGHT SUPPORT WEAPON (LSW)
0401. Chapter 4 sets out all LSW live

lessons to the Arms and Services and the
progression and frequency with which they
are to be fired.
firing is essential for preparing personnel
for LSW Annual Combat Marksmanship
Tests (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is
also essential in preparing the firer for
mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The actual
detail of TLFTT and LFTT is in Chapters 10
and 11 respectively
Contents
SCOPE 4-1
4-1
SAFETY 4-1
4-2
WEAPON HANDLING TESTS GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS 4-4
4-4
WHTs 4-5
LF LESSON 1
4-9
LF LESSON 2
4-11
LF LESSON 3
4-13
LF LESSON 4
4-15
LF LESSON 5
4-19
LSW ACMT PREPARATION
4-25
ACMT 4-29
CBRN INSTRUCTION/ASSESSMENT
4-35

0403. Other Arms and Services Phase 1 Training. The LF lessons contained
within the Commanders Guide are to be fired by all recruits during Other Arms and
Services Phase 1 Training. Reserve recruits are to achieve the same standards as
regular recruits.
0404. Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be fired annually
by all BCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units whose personal weapon is the
LSW.
the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT Prac
tices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting.
0406. Remedial Training. DCCT provides an invaluable aid to the remedial train
ing of the poor shot. COs are encouraged to make full use of the facilities wherever
they are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. All
LSW LF lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a
rehearsal prior to firing on the range.
Safety
confirm that all personnel firing any weapon have completed the relevant WHTs prior
to firing.
4-1
LSW complete to CES
Cleaning material
Combat Helmets
Body Armour
Coachs Aide Memoire (AF B71158)
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC
Stop watches
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
Complete
As required
As required
0410. Dress. The dress for LSW LF lessons should include belt order webbing,
Combat Helmets and body armour. Additionally, when OSPREY, Mark 7 helmets,
ballistic eye protection and LSW ancillaries are issued, the firer should be given the
opportunity to practice with them. The dress rules for Phase One Recruits and Trainee
Combat Infantrymen should be applied sensibly with a gradual increase in the amount
of additional equipment. However, the conditions for the ACMT are to be rigorously
applied.
0411. DCCT. Personnel are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other
a. Where possible, LSWs are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to
b. Check each firer has the issued, serviceable hearing protection and his
shooting record card in his possession.
c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using SUSAT at 25 metres. During
grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they are to take the
correct point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off.
4-2
d.
0414. Aiming Marks. The POA is to be the bottom centre of the patch for Iron
sights and at the bottom right or left corner when optic sights are used.
0415. Coaching. DCC Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm)
System (Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment contains full details of
coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are:
a. The conducting officer and all coaches on the range must have prior
knowledge of coaching techniques.
Personnel are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing at ranges
beyond 300 metres.
and advanced application of fire lessons.
0416. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable firers and coaches to gain
the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should
be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot or burst. To
achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given
every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0417. Guide to Progress. Firers who do not attain the suggested measure of pro
gress should be given further coaching or firing practice before progressing.
are to be completed once the range has been cleared:
a.
b.
c.
Pack kit.

forecast of the next LSW LF lesson.
4-3

(1)

units.
0422. Conduct. NSPs are to be carried out by the instructor on all weapons and drill
ammunition prior to any WHT taking place. Tests are to be completed consecutively
and are to be carried out in barracks using drill ammunition.
helmet and Issued Body Armour.
0424. Handling Standards. Handling Standards achieved in WHTs are defined as:
Pass Pass in all tests.
Fail
Fail in any test.

is not competent in the use of the LSW. Retesting is to be carried out on completion of
remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
4-4
WHTs LSW
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1
Safety
LSW unloaded. Safety Catch at F, change lever at R. Weapon lying on
the ground.
further direction, is to pick up the weapon and carry out full normal safety
precautions.
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
LSW with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out),
1. Order the firer to Strip the LSW as for daily cleaning. Ask the following
questions:
c. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following
conditions? (choose any 2 conditions)
3. Order the firer to Assemble the LSW and carry out the function test
a. If during the function test, or at any time you notice the change lever overrotates beyond its stops, what action is to be taken..
1. Standard:
Pass 1 to 2 mistakes.
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
30 rounds, magazine.
On the command Go the firer fills his magazine with 30 rounds by hand.
Instructors Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine, fit
depressor.
Standard: No time Limit
4-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
4-6
Test No. 4
Loading Prone Bipod Supported Position
LSW, magazine in fastened pouch.
1. Order Bipod Supported Position down.
2. Give the command Load. Pouches must be refastened.
Instructors Note: Load with the magazine fitted with the depressor. Leave
weapon loaded for Test No 5.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 5
LSW loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets
Once the firer has aligned himself, on to the target order Ready or issue
a range.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) and Forward Assist
LSW loaded representative targets
1. Order Fire.
2. Order LSW firing alright LSW stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward on the cocking
handle and continue firing.
3. Order LSW fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and Forward Assist
Drills only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake. Fail More than 1 mistake.
4. Award no qualification if any mistake affects safety
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 7
LSW loaded, rep- representative targets.
1. Order Fire LSW firing alright LSW stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward on the cocking
handle and continue firing.
2. Order LSW still fails to fire.
Chamber clear. Alloy the firer to complete the drill.
3. Standard:
Test No. 8
1. Order Fire LSW firing alright LSW stops. Firer to carry out the
IA...Cocking handle NOT fully forward.
2. On examination of the body and chamber, order Obstruction.
Obstruction Clear.
4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber order Chamber
Clear.
5. Firer is to complete the Obstruction Drill.
3. Standard:
4-7
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
4-8
Test No. 9
with the working parts held to the rear, order Test and adjust fire
LSW firing alright LSW stops.
3. When the firer has completed the drill and continued firing, order Stop.
3. Standard:
Test No. 10
Unloading
LSW loaded and ready (from Test No. 9)
The test follows on from Test No. 9. Give the command Unload. The test
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
LSW LF 1. Introductory Shoot At 25 Metres (Prone)

A. RCO Notes
0426. Aim. To confirm that the firer knows how to prepare the LSW for firing. Then
by firing single shots and controlled bursts, confirm that the firer can aim, hold and fire
the weapon. Finally, to confirm that he knows how to clean the LSW after firing.
screens placed 25 metres from the firers.
practices.
0429. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x sheet of talc per coach
1 x Non-permanent marker pen per coach
1 x witness screen per firer each with 4 x 25 mm square aiming marks
34 rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer

Preliminaries
Preparation for Firing
0432. Explain that the procedures for preparing the LSW for firing and cleaning after
firing are the same as for the rifle.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Familiarisation Single Rounds
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x 25 mm aiming marks on a screen
Instructions

4-9
Practice 2. Familiarisation Bursts on Screen

Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds (4 mags of 3 rounds)
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of 3 rounds at each aiming mark.

2. Discuss the groups, record the group sizes.
Practice 3. Confirmation Bursts

Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of 2-3 rounds at each aiming mark.

2. Discuss the groups and record the first round and burst group sizes.

0434. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress during
practice 1:
a.
Basic Close Combat Role 61-85mm

0436. Confirm by practice. LSWs are to be inspected and left lightly oiled.
chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and reoiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the LSW has been fired.
4-10
LSW LF 2. Zeroing at 25 Metres

A. RCO Notes
practices.
0441. Stores.
0442. Miscellaneous
a. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers (when applicable) are to
b.
Weapons must be bore sighted before live firing commences.
c. Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of

the MPI from the CZP when firing from positions other than prone. Coaches
are to emphasise the importance of this to their firers.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
0445. Practice details are as follows
4-11
Range/Positioning
25m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions


Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 1 using the group plus a further 6 rounds.

0446. The following 3 round group sizes are necessary to accurately zero:
a.
50mm

4-12
LSW LF 3. Application of the Group at 100 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0448. Aim. To confirm that the firer can apply his group to the centre of the target
from the prone and fire trench positions.
0449. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without
practices. If SARTS is used it may be possible to reduce the timings.
0451. Stores
Normal range stores
2 x 1.220 m screens with Figure 11 per firer or

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Grouping Single Rounds
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group.

2. Discuss the group, position of the MPI and note any adjustments
needed to the POA.
3. Repeat the practice.
4-13
Practice 2. Grouping Bursts

Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire 9 rounds in bursts of 2-3 rounds at the same aiming mark.

needed to the POA.
3. Record the group size.
Practice 3. Grouping Single Rounds

Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

needed to the POA.
3. Record the group size
Practice 4. Grouping Bursts

Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

needed to the POA.
3. Record the group size.
Scoring
spotting discs.
0456. The firer/coach will identify the MPI and establish the new POA.
4-14
LSW LF 4. Elementary Application of Fire 200400 METRES

A. RCO Notes
0458. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by deliberate fire, using single
shots and controlled bursts, from the prone and fire trench positions.
0459. Conduct. The lesson should ideally be conducted on either a CGR (with or
without SARTS), or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS.
practices. If SARTS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings.
0461. Stores.
Normal range stores
Gallery Range or CGR without SARTS
100300 m 1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed with
a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle
400 m
1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer
SARTS
Figure 11 with scoring area image on monitor (100-200 metres)
Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor (300-400 metres)
54 rounds 5.56 mm 4B1T ammunition per firer
(Ball ammunition if tracer ban is in force)
a. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when the lesson is fired on
an ETR without SARTS, Practices 4, 5 and 6 are to be fired from the 400 m
firing point at a single Figure 11 on the 200 m bank of targets. This will restrict
the number of firers to 8 (Targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12).
b. Sufficient ammunition has been allocated to fire bursts of 3 rounds.
Firers are only to fire the number of bursts indicated in the instructions column
of the practice details, regardless of whether all allocated rounds are used.
c. Firers are to be reminded of the need to count rounds fired and to
regulate the length of bursts to 23 rounds.

Preliminaries
4-15
Practice Details
Practice 1. Deliberate Single Rounds
Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen or SARTS Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application.

2. All shots are to be signalled.
record card.

Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

record card.
Practice 3. Deliberate Bursts

Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire 4 bursts of 2-3 rounds.

2. Fire is judged to be effective if the figure target is hit once in each
burst.
3. Score 4 points for each effective engagement.
4. MPI is to be indicated after each burst.

Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

record card.
4-16

Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

3. Discuss and record results, noting the appropriate POA on the
Practice 6. Deliberate Bursts

Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire 4 bursts of 23 rounds.

2. Fire is judged to be effective if the figure target is hit once in each
burst.
3. MPI is to be indicated after each burst.

Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Triple Figure 11
Instructions


Range/Positioning
400 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Triple Figure 11
Instructions

4-17
Scoring
spotting discs.
5 rounds. After the 5th shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
4-18
LSW LF 5. Advanced Application of Fire 100400 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0469. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by snap, rapid and burst fire
0470. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR (with or
without SARTS), where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR.
practices.
0473. Stores.
Normal range stores
ETR
1 x Figure 11 at 100/200 metres
1 x Triple Figure 11 at 300 metres
CGR
Left Coffin Triple Figure 11
} In each
Right Coffin Single Figure 11
} lane Gallery Range
1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer at 400 metres or SARTS
Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metres
Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer at 400 metres

Preliminaries
0476. Miscellaneous. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when 400m
practices are fired on an ETR with or without SARTS, the number of firers may be
restricted to 8 (targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12).
4-19
Practice Details
Practice 1. Snap Single Rounds
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.

5 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals.
Firer in the nominated position.
Order Watch and Shoot.
Fire one round at each exposure.
Practice 2. Rapid Single Rounds

Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5 m to the rear of
the firing point.
2. Order Watch out.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to run onto
the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire 10
4. Target up and hold.
Practice 3. Timed Bursts

Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-20

3. Fire one burst of 23 rounds at each exposure.
4. Fire is judged to be effective if the target is hit once in each burst.

Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.


Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

intervals of 10 seconds.
the firing point.
2. Order Watch out.
the firing point, adopt the nominated position (bipod down) and fire
one burst of 2-3 seconds at each exposure.
4. Score 2 points for each engagement.

Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-21

Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.


Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions


Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

3. Fire one burst of 23 rounds at each exposure.
Practice 10. Snap Single Round

Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-22
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTS Figure 11.

Scoring
0478. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice:
Practices 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 10 One point per hit
Practices 3, 5 and 9
2 points per successful engagement

Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
1-3
100m
27
16
23
4-6
200m
27
16
23
7-9
300m
27
16
23
10
400m
12
12
4-23
LSW LF 5 TIME CHART

allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 11
100 m
Figure 11
100 m
Figure 11
200 m Figure 11
4-24
Timings
Remarks
UP DOWN
05
10
16
21
25
30
35
40
43
48
UP DOWN
05 26
Fall when hit.
UP
05
21
37
53
DOWN
11
27
43
59
Fall when hit.
As for Practice 1.
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
19
29
35
45
51
1:01 1:07
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
300 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
300 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
300 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 3.
10
400 m
Triple Figure 11
UP
05
17
28
40
DOWN
12
24
35
47
Up and hold.
1. Fall when hit.

2. Personnel fire from
the 400 m firing point
on an ETR.
1. Up and hold.
on an ETR.
1. Fall when hit.
on an ETR.
Up and hold.
LSW ACMT Preparation

A. RCO Notes
employed in the BCC Role whose personal or alternate weapon is the LSW,
immediately prior to the ACMT . It is not fired during Phase 1 Other Arms Recruit
Training or during Infantry Phase 2 Training because the LF lesson sequence is fired
instead.
the ACMT, ETR, GR, CGR.
0484. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 120 minutes to complete practices
1 to 8.
0485. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 on a screen with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch (bottom centre
of the patch on the centre of the figure) per firer.
1 x Figure 11 at 100,200, 300 metres per firer
1 x Triple Figure 11 at 400 metres per firer or
1 x Figure 11 at 100,200, 300 metres per firer
1 x Triple Figure 11 at 400 metres per firer
25 x rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Zeroing)
80 x rounds 5.56 mm 4BiT ammunition per firer
as the ACMT.
commences.
c. Firers must achieve a 225 mm group with 20 rounds from the prone
position at 100 metres with Optic Sight during Practice 1 before adjusting
their sights.
the LF is for trained personnel they must be encouraged to make their own
4-25
e. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and personnel are to be fully

conversant with the details in Ref B relating to Zeroing and Application of Fire.
f.
the DCCT to familiarise firers with the practices.

Preliminaries
safety rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
Practice Details
Practice 1. Zeroing
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d
2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up, and then re-adopt his

Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-26

Figure 12d
plus a further 15 rounds.

Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 2-3 rounds bursts application to confirm the MPI.

3. Fire further bursts to confirm the POA.

Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds application to confirm the MPI.

4. Fire further rounds (5 maximum) to confirm the POA.

Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions


Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions

4-27

Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions


Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

4-28
LSW ACMT
A. RCO Notes
0490. Firing Requirement. ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel whose
personal weapon is the LSW.
0491. Ranges. LSW ACMT can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or CGR. Where
the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS the firing point monitors are to be
positioned where the firers cannot view them.
0492. Ranges. LSW ACMT can be fired on an ETR, GR or CGR.
0493. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete.
0494. Stores.
CGR Left Coffin

Right Coffin
Triple Figure 11 } In each

Single Figure 11 } lane
ETR 100 m and 200 m

300 m
Single Figure 11
Triple Figure 11
SARTS 100-300 m

400 m
Figure 11

Figure 11 with triple Figure image on
monitor
0495. Rules.
webbing, combat body armour (as issued), combat helmets and issued,
b.
c.
d.
Optic Sight only is to be used.
e.
f.
All positions are to be bipod supported.
0497. Ammunition. ACMT 73 rounds.
0498. Magazines. Magazines are to be filled and used in the following order: 17,
17, 27 and 12
4-29
B. CONDUCT OF THE LESSON

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

4. Targets fall when hit

Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4-30

3. Fire one burst of 2-3 rounds at each exposure.

Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

the firing point.
2. Order Watch out.

Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions


Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

4-31

Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

the firing point.
2. Order Watch out.

Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions


Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

04102. Scoring.
Practices 1, 3, 5, 6 and 8 One point per hit.
Practices 2, 4 and 7
4-32
2 points per effective engagement
04103. Standard. The OMS for each practice is shown in the table below. If a firer
fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who
fail are to have coaching before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
BCC
1&2
100m
17
13
3&4
200m
17
13
5-7
300m
27
16
23
400m
12
12
4-33
LSW ACMT Time Chart

ranges this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 11
UP
05
15
23
32
39
DOWN
09
19
27
36
43
Fall when hit.
100 m
Figure 11
UP
05
21
37
53
DOWN
11
27
43
59
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
UP
DOWN
05 21
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 2
Fall when hit.
300 m
Figure 11
UP
05
17
27
38
47
DOWN
10
22
32
43
52
1. Up and hold.
2. Personnel fire from 400 m
firing point on an ETR.
300 m
Figure 11
UP
DOWN
05 21
1. Up and hold.
300 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 2
1. Fall when hit.

400 m
Triple Figure 11
4-34
Timings
UP
05
18
30
41
DOWN
12
25
37
48
Remarks
Up and hold.
Annual Firing in CBRN Conditions

Instructional Shoot And Assessment
to SARTS, or a GR.
details.
04109. Stores.
Normal range stores

Preliminaries
4-35
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds to identify the POA.

record card.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
4-36
Assessment Details
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. Order Five rounds rapid, Watch and Shoot.
3. Fire five rounds at the exposure.
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Prone
5 Rounds
4-37
Scoring
Standards
04116. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will
where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
BCC
5&6
100m
10
10
7&8
200m
10
10
Time Chart
allowed.
4-38
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 12
17 24
29 36
41 48
53 1:00
Fall when hit.
Remarks
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
59 1:08
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Up and hold.
CHAPTER 5
INFANTRY SECTION DESIGNATED MARKSMAN
(SDM (LSW))
Scope
0501. Chapter 5 sets out all SDM live
firing (LF) lessons to be completed in LFMT
Stages 1, 2 and 3 of Training the Battle
Shot. It includes the application of lessons
to the Infantry and the progression and
frequency with which they are to be fired.
firing is essential for preparing personnel
for the Infantry SDM AnnualCombat
Marksman- ship Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage
3. It is also essential in preparing the firer for
mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The detail of
TLFTT and LFTT is in Chapters 10 and 11
respectively.
Contents
SCOPE 5-1
5-1
SAFETY 5-2
5-2

INSTRUCTIONS 5-4
5-4
WHTs 5-5
LF LESSON 1
5-9
LF LESSON 2
5-11
LF LESSON 3
5-13
LF LESSON 4
5-15
LF LESSON 5
5-18
LF LESSON 6
5-20
LF LESSON 7
5-24
ACMT PREPARATION
5-27
ACMT 5-31
5-37

0503. Combat Infantrymans Course (CIC). The LF lessons listed within the
Commanders Guide are to be fired by all recruits during Combat Infantrymans
Course (CIC) using Optic Sight. Reserve recruits are to achieve the same standards
as regular recruits:
0504. Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be fired annually
by all DCC Role Firers in Regular and Reserve units whose personal weapon is the
SDM (LSW).
the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT Prac
tices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting.
SDM (LSW) LF lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or
as a rehearsal prior to firing on the range.
5-1
Safety
to firing.
SDM (LSW)) complete to CES
Cleaning material
Combat Helmets
Issued Body Armour
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC
Stop watches
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
Complete
As required
As required
0510. Dress. The dress for (SDM (LSW)) LF lessons should include belt order
webbing, Combat Helmets and body armour). Additionally, when OSPREY, Mark 7
helmets, ballistic eye protection and (SDM (LSW)) ancillaries are issued, the firer
should be given the opportunity to practice with them. The dress rules for Phase One
Recruits and Trainee Combat Infantrymen should be applied sensibly with a gradual
increase in the amount of additional equipment. However, the conditions for the ACMT
are to be rigorously applied.
0511. DCCT. Personnel are to fire the boresighting practice before firing any other
a. Where possible, SDM (LSW)s are to be prepared for firing prior to
moving to the range, to ensure they are prepared under ideal conditions and
not those that may be experienced on the range.
5-2
c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using SUSAT at 25 metres. During
d.
0514. Aiming Marks. The POA is to be the bottom centre of the patch for Iron
sights and at the bottom right or left corner when optic sights are used.
0515. Coaching. DCC Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm)
System (Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment contains full details of
Personnel are to be reminded to alter their sights prior to firing at ranges
beyond 300 metres.
a.

5-3
b.
c.
Pack kit.

forecast of the next SDM (LSW) LF lesson.
(1)

units.
helmet and Issued Body Armour.
Fail
Fail in any test.

achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates that the
firer is not competent in the use of the SDM (LSW). Retesting is to be carried out on
completion of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
5-4
WHTs SDM (LSW)

Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1
Safety
SDM (LSW) unloaded. Safety Catch at F, change lever at R. Weapon
lying on the ground.
precautions
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
SDM (LSW) with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool
out), flannelette and oil.
1. Order the firer to Strip the SDM (LSW) as for daily cleaning. Ask the
3. Order the firer to Assemble the SDM (LSW) and carry out the
function test.
a. If during the function test, or at any time you notice the change lever
over-rotates beyond its stops, what action is to be taken.
1. Standard: Pass 1 to 2 mistakes.
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
30 rounds, magazine, stopwatch.
Instructors Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine, fit
depressor.
Standard:
Pass Less than 75 seconds.
Fail Over 75 seconds.
5-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
5-6
Test No. 4
Loading Prone Bipod Supported Position
SDM (LSW), one magazine in fastened pouch.
1. Order Bipod Supported
Position down.
Instructors Note: Leave weapon loaded for Test No 5.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 5
SDM (LSW) loaded (from Test No. 4), representative targets
a range.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the Ready Drill only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) Forward Assist
SDM (LSW) loaded representative targets
1. Order Fire.
2. Order SDM (LSW) firing alright SDM (LSW) stops. Firer to carry
out the IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward on the
3. Order SDM (LSW) fires alright Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and Forward Assist Drills
only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 7
SDM (LSW) loaded, - representative targets.
1. Order Fire SDM (LSW) firing alright SDM (LSW) stops. Firer to
carry out the IA...Cocking handle fully forward. Firer is to tap forward
on the cocking handle and continue firing.
2. Order SDM (LSW) still fails to fire.
chamber clear. Alloy the firer to complete the drill and fire.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 8
SDM (LSW) loaded, representative targets.
1. Order Fire SDM (LSW) firing alright SDM (LSW) stops. Firer to
carry out the IA...Cocking handle NOT fully forward.
Obstruction Clear.
4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber order Chamber
Clear.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
5-7
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
5-8
Test No. 9
SDM (LSW) loaded, representative targets.
with the working parts held to the rear, order Test and adjust fire
SDM (LSW) firing alright SDM (LSW) stops.
3. When the firer has completed the drill and continues firing, order SDM
(LSW) fires alright Stop.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 10
Unloading
SDM (LSW) loaded and ready (from Test No. 9)
2. Standard:
SDM LF 1. Introductory Shoot at 25 Metres (Prone)

A. RCO Notes
0526. Aim. To confirm that the firer knows how to prepare the SDM(LSW) for firing.
Then by firing single shots confirm that the firer can aim, hold and fire the weapon.
Finally, to confirm that he knows how to clean the SDM (LSW) after firing.
practices.
0529. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x sheet of talc per coach
1 x Non-permanent marker pen per coach

Preliminaries
Preparation for Firing
0532. Explain that the procedures for preparing the SDM (LSW) for firing and
cleaning after firing are the same as for the rifle.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Familiarisation Single Rounds
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at each aiming mark.

5-9
Practice 2. Familiarisation Bursts on Screen

Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds (4 mags of 3 rounds)
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of 3 rounds at each aiming mark.

2. Discuss the groups, record the group sizes.
Practice 3. Confirmation Bursts

Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of 2-3 rounds at each aiming mark.


0534. The following group sizes should be used as a guide to progress during
practice 1:
a.
Dismounted Close Combat Role 46-65mm

0536. Confirm by practice. LSWs are to be inspected and left lightly oiled.
chamber and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and reoiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the LSW has been fired.
5-10
SDM LF 2. Zeroing at 25 Metres

A. RCO Notes
practices.
0541. Stores.
0542. Miscellaneous
a. Firers must achieve a 50 mm group with 3 rounds from the prone
position at 25 metres with Iron Sight or 38 mm group with Optic Sight during
Practice 2 before their sights are adjusted.
b. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers (when applicable) are to
c. Weapons must be collimated or bore sighted before live firing
commences.
d. Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of

Preliminaries
Practice Details
5-11
Range/Positioning
25m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions


Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions


0546. The following 3 round group sizes are necessary to accurately zero:
a.
Dismounted Close Combat Role 38mm

5-12
SDM LF 3 Grouping at 100 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0548. Aim. To confirm that the SDM can apply his group to the centre of the target
0549. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without
practices. If SARTS is used, it may be possible to reduce the timings.
0551.
Stores.
Normal Range Stores
2 x 1.220m screens with Figure 11 per firer or
1 x Figure 12d per firer (onSARTSconverted range)
Preliminaries
0553. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the Range
Safety Rules (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
Practice Details
0554. Practice details as follows:
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d.
Instructions

2. Discuss the group, record the group size.
5-13
Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTS Figure 12d.
Instructions

needed to the POA.
3. Record group size.
Standards
0555. The group sizes that should be achieved are:
Practice 1 150 mm
Practice 2 150 mm
5-14
SDM LF 4 Elementary Application of Fire 200 400 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0556. Aim. To practise the SDM in engaging targets by deliberate fire, using single
shots, from the prone and fire trench positions.
0557. Conduct. The lesson should ideally be conducted on either a CGR (with or
without SARTS), or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS.
0559.
Stores.
Normal range stores
Gallery Range or CGR without SARTS
100-300 m
1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer inscribed
with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m circle
400 m
CGR and ETR fitted with SARTS
CGR Left CoffinTriple Figure 11 } In each
Right CoffinSingle Figure 11 } lane ETR
100m and 200m Single Figure 11
300mTriple Figure 11
or
SARTS Figure 11 with scoring area image on monitor (100-200 metres)
SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor (300-400 metres)

Preliminaries
Practice Details
5-15
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d.
1. Fire 1 x 5 rounds groups at the aiming mark.
Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen or SARTSFigure 11
Instructions

3. Discuss results and note the appropriate POA on the shooting
record card.
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

record card.
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

record card.
5-16
Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

record card.
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 on a screen or SARTSTriple Figure 11
Instructions

record card.
Range/Positioning
400 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 on a screen or SARTSTriple Figure 11
Instructions

record card.
Scoring
spotting discs.
spotting discs.
5-17
SDM LF 5 Elementary Application of Fire 400 600 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0566. Aim. To practise the SDM in engaging targets at longer ranges by
deliberate fire, using single shots from the prone position.
0567. Conduct. The may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS),
or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS.
0569.
Stores.
Normal range stores
Gallery Range
1.220 m circle
or
SARTSConverted Range
1 x Figure 11 per firer with Triple Figure 11 image on monitor

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-18

Figure 12d.
Practice 2. Deliberate (Fired Twice)

Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

record card.
4. Repeat the practice and record the score.

Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

record card.

Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

record card.
Scoring
spotting discs.
spotting discs.
5-19
SDM LF 6 Advanced Application of Fire 100 400 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0576. Aim. To practise the SDM in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from
the prone and fire trench positions.
0578.
Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
0579. Timing.
practices.
0580.
Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all
Stores.
Normal range stores
1.220 m circle
ETR
1 x Figure 11 at 100/200 metres
1 x Triple Figure 11 at 300 metres CGR Left Coffin - Triple Figure 11 } In each
Right Coffin - Single Figure 11 } lane Gallery Range
1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metres
1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer at 400 metres or
SARTS Figure 11 per firer at 100-300 metres
SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer at 400
metres

Preliminaries
0583. Miscellaneous. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when the lesson
is fired on an ETR, firing from 400m may restrict the number of firers to 8 (Targets 1
to 4 and 9 to 12).
Practice Details
5-20
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 11.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or SARTSFigure 11.

Practice 3. Rapid
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure

Instructions
1. Firer in the standing alert position (bipod folded), 5m to the rear of

the firing point.
2. Order Watch Out.
rounds at the exposure.
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

5-21
Practice 5. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Rapid
Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
1. Triple Figure 11 or SARTSFigure 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
0585. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each
practice.
Practices 2 to 8 One point per hit.
5-22

Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
DCC
2&3
100m
15
11
15
4&5
200m
15
11
15
6&7
300m
15
11
15
400m
12
12
SDM LF 6 Time Chart

Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 10
16 21
25 30
35 40
43 48
Fall when hit.
Remarks
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and Hold
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
200 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and Hold
300 m Figure 11
(200m bank of tgts)
As for Practice 2.
1. Fall when hit.

2. Personnel fire from the
400 m firing point on an ETR
with or without SARTS.
300 m Figure 11
(200m bank of tgts)
UP DOWN
05 18
1. Up and hold.
400 m firing point on an ETR
with or without SARTS.
400 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
17 24
28 35
40 47
Up and Hold
5-23
SDM LF 7 Advanced Application of Fire 400 600 Metres

A. RCOS Notes
0587. Aim. To practise the SDM in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from
the prone position.
0589.
Time Chart. A time chart is included after the Practice Details.
practices.
0591. Stores.
Normal range stores
ETR
1.220 m circle
or
SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-24

Figure 12d.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Scoring
0595. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each
practice.
5-25
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
DCC
400m
12
12
500m
12
12
600m
12
12
SDM LF 7 Time Chart

0597. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain
gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to
be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
400 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
22 29
39 46
56 1:03
500 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
600 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
5-26
Remarks
Up and Hold
SDM ACMT Preparation

A. RCO Notes
employed in the DCC Role whose personal or alternate weapon is the SDM (LSW),
immediately prior to the ACMT.
the ACMT (ETR, GR, CGR).
1 to 7.
05102. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 at 100, 200 and 300 metres per firer
1 x Triple Figure 11 at 400, 500 and 600 metres per firer or
1 x Figure 11 at 100, 200 and 300 metres per firer
1 x Triple Figure 11 at 400, 500 and 600 metres per firer
75 x rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer
as the ACMT.
commences.
c. Firers must achieve a 225 mm group with 20 rounds from the prone
position at 100 metres with Optic Sight during Practice 1 before adjusting
their sights.
5-27
e. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and personnel are to be fully

conversant with the details in DCC Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The
SA80 A2 and LSW (5.56 mm) System (Rifle, Light Support Weapon and
Carbine) and Associated Equipment relating to Zeroing and Application of
Fire.
f.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Zeroing
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or

SARTS Figure 12d
2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up and then re-adopt his

Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-28
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or

SARTS Figure 12d

Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions


Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions


Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions


Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

5-29

Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

5-30
SDM ACMT
A. RCO Notes
05107. Firing Requirement. SDM (LSW)) ACMT is to be fired annually by all
combat infantrymen who are appointed SDM.
05108. Ranges. SDM ((LSW)) ACMT can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or
CGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS, the firing point monitors
are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them.
05109. Stores. CGRs and ETRs are to be rigged as follows:
CGR.

Right Coffin
Left Coffin
Single Figure 11 } In each

Triple Figure 11 } lane
ETR.

100 m and 200 m

300 m
Single Figure 11
Triple Figure 11
SARTS Ranges. 100-300 m SARTS Figure 11

400-600 m
SARTS Figure 11 with Triple Figure 11
image on monitor
05110. Range Conducting Officers are to note that when the lesson is fired on an
ETR, firing from 400m may restrict the number of firers to 8 (Targets 1 to 4 and 9 to 12)
05111. Timings. It will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices of
ACMT. If an ETR is used, these timings might reduce.
05112. Rules.
a. The dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt
order webbing, combat helmet, combat body armour (as issued) and issued,
b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages
c.
d.
Optic sight only is to be used.
e.
f.
g.
Ammunition allocation for ACMT includes 5 rounds for check zeroing.
05113. Time Charts. Time charts for the ACMT are included after the Practice
Details.
05114. Ammunition. ACMT 85 rounds including grouping.
5-31
Preliminaries

05117. Revision.
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 11.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
5-32

irregular intervals
the firing point.
2. Order Watch Out.
3 rounds at each exposure.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 5. Rapid
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

the firing point.
2. Order Watch Out.
5-33
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

the firing point.
2. Order Watch Out.
Practice 7. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

the firing point.
2. Order Watch Out.
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

the firing point.
2. Order Watch Out.
one round at each exposure.
05119. Scoring. All practices On point per hit.
5-34
fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Firers who
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS
Requirement
HPS
DCC
600m
12
12
500m
21
15
21
400m
12
12
300m
20
14
20
200m
10
10
100m
5-35
SDM ACMT Time Chart

be allowed.
5-36
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
600 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
42 49
Up and hold.
500 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
28 35
39 46
Up and hold.
500 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
Up and hold.
400 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
Up and hold.
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
1. Up and hold.
400 m firing point on an
ETR.
300 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
25 30
35 40
46 51
55 1:00
1. Up and hold.
400 m firing point on an
ETR.
200 m Figure 11
As for Practice 5.
Up and hold.
100 m Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 17
24 28
33 37
43 47
51 55
Up and hold.
Annual Firing in CBRN Conditions

Instructional Shoot And Assessment
to SARTS, or a GR.
details.
05126. Stores.
Normal range stores

Preliminaries
5-37
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire 5 rounds to identify the POA.

record card.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per Prac 1
5-38
Assessment Details
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

5-39
Scoring
Standards
05133. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS at each firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will
where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo
further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
5&6
100m
10
10
7&8
200m
10
10
DCC
HPS
Time Chart
allowed.
5-40
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 12
17 24
29 36
41 48
53 1:00
Fall when hit.
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
59 1:08
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Remarks
Up and hold.
CHAPTER 6
SHARPSHOOTER RIFLE 7.62MM L129A1
Scope
0601. Chapter 6 sets out all L129A1
live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in
lessons to the Arms and Services and the
are to be fired.
0602. This progression and frequency
of firing is essential for preparing
personnel for the L129A1 Annual Combat
Marksmanship Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage
3. It is also essential in preparing the firer
for mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The actual
detail of TLFTT and LFTT are in Chapters
10 and 11 respectively.
Contents
SCOPE 6-1
6-1
SAFETY 6-2
6-2
INSTRUCTIONS 6-4
6-4
WHTs 6-5
LF LESSON 1
6-8
LF LESSON 2
6-11
LF LESSON 3
6-14
LF LESSON 4
6-16
LF LESSON 5
6-20
LF LESSON 6
6-23
ACMT PREPARATION
6-25
ACMT 6-29
6-35

0603. Initial Training. The LF lessons listed within the Commanders Guide are
to be fired by all DCC role personnel during initial training of the L129A1. Reserve
personnel are to achieve the same Firers Goals and Progress as regular personnel:
0604. DCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be
fired annually by all DCC Role firers in Regular and Reserve units whose personal
weapon is the L129A1.
the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT once available to familiarise firers with
the ACMT Practices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of
shooting.
Rifle LF lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a
rehearsal prior to firing on the range.
6-1
Safety
to firing.
L129A1 complete to CES
Cleaning material
Combat Helmets
Body Armour
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC
Stop watch
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
Complete
As required
As required
0610. Dress. Dress for L129A1 LF lessons should include belt order webbing.
Combat helmets and body armour are to be worn for all DCCT and LF lessons.
0611. DCCT (Once Programmed). Personnel are to fire the bore sighting practice
before firing any other shoots using DCCT. Firers can be given a preview of all the
practices on DCCT in order to familiarise themselves with the conditions.
0612. Small Arms Collimator (SAC).. The SAC is to be used to bore sight the
L129A1 prior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the PZP reading from SAC is
to be noted in the firers shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to
any future LF lesson. The SAC cannot be used for lessons fired on DCCT.
a. Where possible, weapons are to be prepared for firing prior to moving
to the range, to ensure they are prepared under ideal conditions and not
those that may be experienced on the range.
6-2
c. Observation of fall of shot is obvious using ACOG at 25 metres. During

d.
0614. Aiming Marks. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to
be the bottom centre of the white patch.
0615. Coaching. Ref D contains full details of coaching requirements. Some
essential points to ensure are:
c. All group sizes, MPIs, POAs for other positions, and scores are to be
d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during all elementary
a.
b.
c.
Pack kit.

forecast of the next L129A1 LF lesson.
6-3

(1)

units.
helmet and issued body armour.
Fail Fail in any test.
is not competent in the use of the L129A1. Retesting is to be carried out on completion
of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
6-4
WHTs 7.62mm Sharpshooter Rifle L129A1

Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1
Safety
Rifle unloaded. Weapon lying on the ground.
precautions
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
Rifle with sling fitted, unloaded, cleaning roll (with combination tool out),
1. Order the firer to Strip the Rifle as for daily cleaning. Ask the
2. Order the firer to Assemble the Rifle and carry out the function test.
1. Standard:
Pass Up to 2 mistakes.
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
20 rounds, magazine, stopwatch.
Instructors Note: All ammunition is to be removed from the magazine on
completion, fit depressor.
No time limit
6-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
6-6
Test No. 4
Loading
Rifle, one magazine in fastened pouch.
Instructors Note: Leave weapon loaded for Test No 5.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 5
Ready Drill
1. Order Prone position down.
a range.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) and Loose Magazine
Rifle loaded representative targets
1. Order Fire Rifle firing alright Rifle stops. Firer to carry out the
IA.
2. On examination of the body and chamber, orderRounds in the
magazine no rounds in the chamber the firer is to check the magazine
is correctly fitted operate the bolt release catch and continue firing.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the (IA) and loose magazine
only .
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 7
1. Order Fire Rifle firing alright Rifle stops. Firer to carry out the
IA.
Obstruction Clear.
4. When the firer has visually inspected the chamber, order Chamber
Clear.
6. Order Stop.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 8
1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon and apply the Bolt Release Catch,
with the working parts held to the rear, order Test and adjust
Fire Rifle firing alright rifle stops.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 9
Unloading
Rifle loaded and ready
is not complete until the firer has recovered the ejected round, replaced it in
the magazine and fastened the pouch.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
6-7
LF 1. Grouping and Zeroing at 100 Metres (All Positions)

A. RCO Notes
0626. Aim. To zero the weapon by superimposing the personnel MPI onto the CZP,
and compare the MPI of groups fired from the kneeling/squatting, sitting, standing
positions and note any requirement to aim off.
SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS or a GR. During the reprogramming of
SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR.
0628. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 2 hours to complete all practices
0629. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 x 1.220 m screens with Figure 12 per firer each with a 75 mm x 100 mm
white patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of
the figure
or
a. Firers must achieve a 75 mm group with 20 rounds from the prone
position at 100 metres during Practice 2 before their sights are adjusted.
b. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and personnel (when applicable)
are to be fully conversant with the details in Ref D relating to Zeroing.
c. The ACOG and Red dot Reflex sight must be bore sighted before live
firing commences.
d. Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of
e. In order to complete Practice 3 on a SARTS range, the practice is
divided into 3A and 3B. 3A presents a target for 1 minute, enabling 2 shots on
fall when hit. 3B presents the target for 15 minutes up and hold enabling the
Grouping procedure to be completed.

Preliminaries
6-8
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone bipod supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d
2. Discuss the group and record the group size.
Practice 2. Zeroing
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
7 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d
1. Fire two rounds off the POA to stabilise the adjustment mechanism.
3. If the correct zero is not achieved (see Rifle Lesson 16, repeat
Range/Positioning
100m prone unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 12 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen or

SARTS Figure 12d
6-9
Instructions

3. Compare with the MPI achieved in the prone position and note any
requirement to aim off.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

SARTS Figure 12d
3. Compare with the MPI achieved in the prone bipod supported
position and note any requirement to aim off.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

SARTS Figure 12d
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

SARTS Figure 12d

6-10
LF 2. Elementary Application of Fire up to 300 Metres

(All Positions)
A. RCO Notes
0635. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets by deliberate fire from the prone
(with and without bipod support), kneeling supported, kneeling unsupported/squatting,
sitting unsupported and standing supported positions.
0636. Conduct. It may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS),
or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS. During the
reprogramming of SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR
0637. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 2 hours to complete all practices
0638. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m
circle per firer at 100 metres.
1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen inscribed with a 760 mm and a 1.220 m
circle per firer at 200-300 metres
or
1 x Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres
1 x Figure 11 per firer at 200-300 metre
39 rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer (if required).
0639. Miscellaneous. POA from LF1 and the effect of range and wind should be
discussed before each practice.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
6-11
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone bipod supported.
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

SARTS Figure 12d
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 on a screen or
SARTS Figure 11
record card.
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone Unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
SARTS Figure 11
record card.
Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling unsupported/ squatting.
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-12
SARTS Figure 11
record card.
Range/Positioning
200 m Kneeling supported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
SARTS Figure 11
record card.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
SARTS Figure 11
record card.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Range/Positioning
300 m prone bipod supported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
SARTS Figure 11
record card.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
spotting discs.
3 rounds. After the 3rd shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
6-13
LF 3 Elementary Application of Fire

400 600 Metres
A. RCO Notes
0646. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets at longer ranges from the prone
position (with and without bipod support).
0647. Conduct. The may be conducted on either a CGR (with or without SARTS),
or a GR. It may also be conducted on an ETR if converted to SARTS. During the
reprogramming of SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR
practices. If AMS is being used it may be possible to reduce the timings.
0649. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 on a 1.2 metre screen per firer or
SARTS Converted Range
1 x Figure 11 per firer on monitor

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-14

SARTS Figure 12d

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a 1.2m screen
Instructions

record card.
4. Repeat the practice and record the score..

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

record card.

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

record card.
Scoring
spotting discs.
3 rounds. After the 3rd shot the target is lowered and all shots are indicated with
spotting discs.
6-15

100 300 Metres
A. RCO Notes
0656. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging targets by snap and rapid fire from the
combat positions.
0657. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on an ETR or CGR (with or without
SARTS), where these ranges are not available it may be fired on a GR. During the
reprogramming of SARTs this LF lesson may have to be fired on a GR.
practices.
0660. Stores.
Normal range stores
ETR
1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres
1 x Figure 11 at 200-300 metres CGR Gallery Range
SARTS Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres
Preliminaries

Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100m Prone bipod supported
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-16

Figure 12d.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100m Kneeling supported

3 Rounds
100 m Standing supported

3 Rounds

3 Rounds
200 m Prone unsupported

3 Rounds
6-17
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 9. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-18
200 m Sitting supported

3 Rounds

3 Rounds

3 Rounds
300 m Sitting supported

3 Rounds
Scoring
0664. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each practice.
a guide to progress
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
100m
200m
12
12
300m
Ser
Range
1
2
3
HPS
LF 4 Time Chart
be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
100 m Figure 12
UP DOWN
06 11
16 21
25 30
Fall when hit.
100 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
200 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
300 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
300 m Figure 12
As for Practice 2.
Fall when hit.
6-19

400 600 Metres
A. RCO Notes
prone position.
practices.
0671. Stores.
Normal range stores
ETR
1 x Figure 12 at 100 metres
1 x Figure 11 at 200-300 metres CGR Gallery Range
SARTS Figure 12d per firer at 100 metres

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12d.
Instructions
6-20
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400 m Prone
15 Rounds
500 m Prone
15 Rounds
600 m Prone
15 Rounds
Scoring
0675. Scores are to be recorded and announced at the conclusion of each practice.
6-21

Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
400m
15
12
15
500m
15
11
15
600m
15
11
15
LF 5 Time Chart
be allowed.
6-22
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
400 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
23 30
40 47
56 1.03
1.15 1:22
Remarks
500 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
600 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Up and Hold
Up and Hold
LF 6. Grouping (All Positions) With Red Dot Reflex Sight

A. RCOs Notes
0678. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets at short range using the Red
dot reflex sight.
SARTS), an ETR if converted to SARTS or a GR. During the reprogramming of
practices.
0681. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 x 1.220 m screens with Figure 12 per firer each with a 75 mm x 100 mm
white patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of
the figure
or
33 x rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer.
a.
Weapons must be boresighted before live firing commences.
b.
Firers are to record in their Shooting Record Card any displacement of
Preliminaries

Practice Details
Range/Positioning 50 m Prone bipod supported
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
6-23
Range/Positioning 50 m Kneeling unsupported /squatting
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
Range/Positioning 50 m Standing unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
As per practice 2
Range/Positioning 100 m Kneeling unsupported/squatting
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
As per practice 2
Range/Positioning 100 m Sitting unsupported
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
SARTS Figure 12d
Instructions
As per practice 2
6-24
L129A1 ACMT Preparation

A. RCO Notes
0686. Aim. To prepare the firer for the ACMT; by zeroing and identifying the MPI of
groups fired from all the ranges and firing positions used during the ACMT in order to
establish the correct Points of Aim
0687. Firing Requirement. This shoot is to be fired annually by all soldiers who are
appointed as Sharpshooters with the 7.62mm Sharpshooter Rifle, prior to the ACMT
0688. Ranges. The ACMT Preparation can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or
CGR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS, the firing point monitors
are to be positioned where the firers cannot view them. During the reprogramming of
0689. Timing. It will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. If an
ETR is used, these timings may reduce
0690. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 at 200-400 metres per firer or
1 x Figure 11 at 200-400 metres per firer
as the ACMT.
b. The ACOG and Red dot Reflex sight must be bore sighted before live
firing commences.
c. Coaching is permitted during the ACMT Preparation. However, as
d. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and personnel are to be fully
conversant with the details in Ref D relating to Zeroing and Application of
Fire.
6-25
e. In order to complete Practice 2 on a SARTS range, the practice is

divided into 3A and 3B. 3A presents a target for 1 minute, enabling 2 shots on
fall when hit. 3B presents the target for 15 minutes up and hold enabling the
Grouping procedure to be completed.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Zeroing
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

20 Rounds
Figure 12

Ammunition
7 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12
1. Fire two rounds off the POA to stabilise the adjustment mechanism.
Instructions
3. If the correct zero is not achieved (see Rifle Lesson 16, repeat
6-26
Range/Positioning 50 m Standing
Ammunition
3 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3. If possible the shots are to be signalled or viewed.
4. Record the MPI and POA.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Standing
3 Rounds
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12
As per practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100 m Kneeling/ squatting unsupported

3 Rounds
1. Figure 12 or SARTS Figure 12
As per practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m prone unsupported

3 Rounds
As per practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

3 Rounds
As per practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
300 m Sitting
3 Rounds
As per practice 3.
6-27
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
300 m Prone bipod supported or unsupported

3 Rounds
As per practice 3.

Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3. If possible the shots are to be signalled or viewed.
4. Record the MPI and POA.
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per practice 10
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As per practice 10
6-28
L129A1 ACMT
A. RCO Notes
0695. Firing Requirement. The ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel who
are appointed as Sharpshooters with the 7.62mm Sharpshooter Rifle.
0696. Ranges. The ACMT can be fired on an ETR, Gallery Range or CGR. Where
the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS, the firing point monitors are to be
positioned where the firers cannot view them.
0697. Stores
CGR.

Right Coffin
Left Coffin
Figure 12
Figure 11
ETR.

100 m
200-600 m
- Figure 12
- Figure 11
SARTS Ranges.

100
200-600 m
SARTS Figure 12
SARTS Figure 11
0698. When fired on an ETR, lane restrictions may apply from the 400m firing point
and beyond.
0699. Timings. It will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all practices. If an
ETR is used, these timings might reduce.
06100. Rules.
webbing, combat helmet, body armour and issued, serviceable hearing
protection.
b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages
c.
d.
Optic sight only is to be used.
e.
f.
g.
Ammunition allocation for ACMT includes 5 rounds for check zeroing.
Details.
06102. Ammunition. ACMT 61 rounds including grouping.
6-29
Preliminaries

06105. Preparation.
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12.
Instructions
Practice Details
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-30
50 m Standing
3 Rounds
3. Fire 1 round at each exposure.
100 m Standing and kneeling/squatting unsupported

6 Rounds
2. 3 x double exposures of 3 seconds per exposure
2. Order watch and shoot
3. On appearance of the target fire 1 round from the standing and then
adopt the kneeling or squatting position and fire a further round at the
second exposure.
4. All targets are fall when hit
5. Only 1 round is to be fired from each position.
6. Stand up between exposures
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200 m Prone unsupported

5 Rounds
2. 5 x 7 second exposures standing in between exposures.
1. Fire in the standing alert position. Both hands must be on the rifle.
2. Order watch out
3. On appearance of the target the firer is to drop into the nominated
position and fire 1 round at the target.
5. Apply safety catch and stand up between exposures.
5 Rounds
3. Fire 5 rounds rapid.
4. Targets up and hold
3 Rounds
2. 1 x 1 second flash exposure followed 4 seconds later by 3 x 4
second exposures at irregular intervals.
1. Firer in the standing alert position, 5m to the rear of the firing point.
2. Order Watch Out.
3. The appearance of the 1 second target is the signal for the firer to
run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position and fire 1 round
at each subsequent exposure.
300 m Sitting
3 Rounds
2. 3 x 4 second exposures at irregular intervals
6-31
Practice 7. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 9. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 10. Snap

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
6-32

5 Rounds
2. Order watch and shoot
3. On appearance of the target fire 5 rounds rapid.
5 Rounds
2. 1 x 1 second flash exposure followed 5 seconds later by a 3 second
exposure.
3. To be completed 5 times in total.
1. Firer in the standing alert position 5m to the rear of the firing point.
2. Order Watch Out.
3. The appearance of the 1 second target exposure is the signal for
the firer to run onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position and
fire 1 round at the further exposure.
5. On completion apply safety catch and move back 5 metres to the
rear.

5 Rounds

8 Rounds
irregular intervals
3. On the first exposure fire a maximum of 3 rounds at the exposure.
4. All subsequent exposures are to be engaged with 1 round only.
Practice 11. Snap

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

8 Rounds
irregular intervals
3. On the first exposure fire a maximum of 3 rounds at the exposure.
4. All subsequent exposures are to be engaged with 1 round only.
Scoring
One point per hit.
Standard
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
50m
100m
200m
4&5
200m
300m
300m
300m
400m
10
500
11
600
33
52
Total
6-33
L129A1 ACMT Time Chart

be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
100 m
Figure 12
200 m
Figure 11
200 m
Figure 11
200 m
Figure 11
4
5
300 m
Figure 11
300 m
Figure 11
300 m
Figure 11
6-34
400 m
Figure 11
10
500 m
Figure 11
11
600 m
Figure 11
Timings
UP DOWN
05
08
19
22
30
33
UP DOWN
05
09
19
23
30
34
UP DOWN
05
13
UP DOWN
05 16
UP DOWN
06
07
11
16
25
30
36
41
UP DOWN
05
10
19
24
30
35
UP DOWN
05 16
UP DOWN
05
06
11
15
UP DOWN
05
10
19
24
30
35
41
46
50
55
UP DOWN
05
14
25
30
40
45
49
54
1.00 1.05
1.07 1.12
As per Practice 10
Remarks
1. Fall when hit
Up and hold
1. Repeat 4 times.
2. Fall when hit
Up and hold
1. Fall when hit
1. Fall when hit
Up and hold
1. Reset and repeat 4 times.
1. Fall when hit
1. Fall when hit
1. Fall when hit
1. Fall when hit
Firing in CBRN Conditions Instructional Shoot and Assessment

A. RCO Notes
to SARTS, or a GR. Where the assessment (Practices 5 to 8) is fired on ranges
converted to SARTS the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the firers
cannot view them.
details.
06113. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 12
1 x Figure 11
or
1 x Figure 12d per firer
1 x Figure 11

Preliminaries
6-35
Practice Details
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
record card.
Range/Positioning 100 m Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
record card.
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
record card.
Range/Positioning 200 m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
record card.
6-36
Assessment Details
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 8. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

5 Rounds
100 m Prone
5 Rounds

5 Rounds
200 m Prone
5 Rounds
6-37
Scoring
Standards
firing distance in Practices 5 to 8. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance will
where the OMS was not met need to be fired again. Firers who fail are to undergo furtheir practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
5&6
100m
10
10
7&8
200m
10
10
Firing In CBRN Time Chart

allowed.
6-38
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 12
17 24
29 36
41 48
53 1:00
Fall when hit.
Remarks
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
59 1:08
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
As for Practice 6.
Up and hold.
CHAPTER 7
THE LIGHT MACHINE GUN (LMG)
Scope
0701. Chapter 7 sets out all LMG live
lessons to all Arms and Services and the
are to be fired.
0702. This progression and frequency
of firing is essential for preparing gunners
for LMG Annual Combat Marksmanship
Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3. It is also
essential in preparing the gunner for
mandatory TLFTT and LFTT. The actual
detail of TLFTT and LFTT is in Chapters 10
and 11 respectively.
Contents
SCOPE 7-1
7-1
SAFETY 7-1
7-2
INSTRUCTIONS 7-4
7-4
WHTs 7-5
LF LESSON 1
7-7
LF LESSON 2
7-9
LF LESSON 3
7-11
LF LESSON 4
7-14
LF LESSON 5
7-17
LF LESSON 6
7-20
ACMT PREPARATION
7-24
ACMT 7-27
CBRN ASSESSMENT
7-31

0703. Initial Training. The LF lessons listed within the Commanders Guide are to
be fired by all DCC role personnel during initial training of the LMG. Reserve personnel
are to achieve the same Gunners Goals and Progress as regular personnel:
0704. DCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMT Preparation is to be
fired annually by all DCC Role gunners in Regular and Reserve units whose personal
weapon is the LMG.
the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise gunners with the ACMT
Practices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting.
0706. Remedial Training. DCCT provides an invaluable aid to the remedial training
are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing. All LMG LF
lessons can be fired on DCCT and may be used as a remedial aid or as a rehearsal
prior to firing on the range.
Safety
0707. It is mandatory for all gunners to have completed WHTs prior to their first live
firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting officers
must confirm that all gunners firing any weapon for the first time have completed the
relevant WHTs prior to firing.
7-1
LMG complete to CES
Cleaning material
Combat Helmets
Issued Body Armour
Personal Shooting Record Card (AF B6994A/B)
Binoculars
First aid kit
SAC
Stop watch
1 per firer
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
1 per coach
Complete
As required
As required
0710. Dress. Dress for LMG LF lessons should include belt order webbing. Combat
helmets and body armour are to be worn for all DCCT and LF lessons.
0711. DCCT. Gunners are to fire the bore sighting practice before firing any other
shoots using DCCT. Gunners can be given a preview of all the practices on DCCT in
0712. Sighting System. The LMG can be fitted with iron sights or optic sights.
Initial training should be conducted using the iron sights.
0713. Small Arms Collimator (SAC). SAC is to be used to bore sight the LMG
prior to firing a grouping practice. Once zeroed, the PZP reading fro m SAC is to be
noted in the gunners shooting record card and the reading is to be checked prior to
any future LF lesson.
a. Where possible, LMGs are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to
c. During grouping practices it must be emphasized to gunners that they
are to take the correct point of aim for each shot and avoid aiming off.
d.
7-2
0715. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be the bottom
centre of the white patch.
0716. Coaching. Ref C and the Coaching Aide Memoire contain full details of
c. If using Iron sights the aperture marked with 3 is used for all ranges up
to and including 300 metres, for ranges beyond 300 metres use the aperture
marked with 6. If using SUSAT for ranges up to and including 300 metres,
sights are to be set at 300. Gunners are to be reminded to alter their sights
prior to firing at ranges beyond 300 metres.
recorded on the gunners personal shooting record card.
0717. Spotters. When grouping at 25 metres, to enable gunners and coaches to
gain the maximum information from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail
should be employed as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot
or burst. To achieve maximum value from this type of live firing, it is essential that
gunners are given every opportunity to discuss the results of their shooting with their
coach.
0718. Gunners Goals and Progress. Gunners who do not attain the required
Gunners Goals and Progress should be given further coaching and firing practice
before firing again.
0719. Scoring. Scores are to be recorded and announced to the gunners at the end
a.
Questions from the gunners on the range period.
b.
c.
Pack kit.

forecast of the next LMG LF lesson.
7-3

handling skill throughout the Army in line with operational safety and handling
monitored accurately and rectified if necessary. It is an indication of a units operational
readiness.
a.
WHTs are to be taken as follows:

(1) At an appropriate stage during Other Arms Phase 1 Recruit
Training.
(2)
In accordance with MATTs for regular and Reserves units.
helmet.
0725. Handling, Gunners Goals and Progress . Handling Gunners Goals and
Progress achieved in WHTs are defined as:
Fail Fail in any test.
is not competent in the use of the LMG. Retesting is to be carried out on completion
of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
7-4
WHTs LMG
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 1
Safety
Gun unloaded.
1. Order the firer to Take control of the gun.
2. The firer, without further directive, is to carry out the normal safety
precautions on the gun.
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
Stripping Cleaning Assembling
LMG
Spare parts wallet, complete. 1 Spare barrel.
1. Order the firer to strip the gun for daily cleaning. Ask him the
following:
a. What size flannelette is used to oil the bore?
b. What size flannelette is used to oil the cylinder?
2. Order the firer to Assemble the gun and carry out the function test.
1. The main purpose of this test is to assess the firers ability to strip and
assemble the gun. He should therefore be assessed with this in mind.
2. Standard:
Test No. 3
Loading
LMG
Soft pouch containing belt of 15 drill rounds.
Gunner stood behind the gun. Safety catch at Fire. Soft pouch on the
ground on the left of the gun. Order Load.
1. Standard:
Test No. 4
Ready Drill
As for Test No. 3
1. Order 200.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
7-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
7-6
Test No. 5
Immediate Action (IA)
As for Test No. 4
1. Order Fire.
2. Order Gun firing alright - Gun stops. After the Gunner cocks the
gun, order Live Round Ejected. Once the gunner operates the trigger
order Gun fails to fire. Once the gunner has completed the IA Drill,
order Gun fires alright Stop.
1. No time limit is imposed but all actions should be carried out quickly and
correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA) and Gas Stoppage
As for Test No. 5
1. Order Fire.
2. Order Gun firing alright - Gun stops. After the Gunner cocks the
gun, order Live Round Ejected. Once the gunner operates the trigger
order Gun gunners one or two more rounds and stops again. Once
the gunner cocks the gun, order Live round ejected. After the gunner
changes the barrel and operates the trigger, order Gun fires alright
Stop.
1. No time limit is imposed but all actions should be carried out quickly and
correctly.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 7
Unloading
As for Test No. 5
1. Gunner behind the gun loaded with the safety catch applied order
Unload. The test is not complete until the gunner is standing up behind
the gun.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
LMG LF 1. Introductory Shoot 25 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0727. Aim. To teach the preparation of the gun for firing and then to confirm that
the firer can hold, aim and fire the LMG in controlled bursts. Finally to teach cleaning
the gun after firing.
0728. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on a 25 metre range or ETR with
screens placed 25 metres from the gunners.
practices.
0730. Stores.
Normal range stores
30 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) per firer
Preliminaries
0732. Safety. Normal safety precautions (to include checking of barrels for
obstructions).
0733. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate, as necessary, the range
0734. Preparing the Gun for Firing. Remind the squad of the procedures for
preparing the gun before firing.
0735. Confirm by practice. Prepare the guns for firing.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Familiarisation
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds (Two 3 round belts)
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fire each belt in one burst. Carry out IA after each expended belt.
7-7
Practice 2. Length of Burst

Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds (Four 3 round belts)
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of three rounds at each aiming mark.

Practice 3. Confirmation
Range/Positioning
25 m Prone
Ammunition
12 Rounds (One 12 round belt)
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire one burst of three rounds at each aiming mark.

Gunners Goals and Progress

0737. An average burst group size of 125 mm in Practice 3.
0738. Cleaning After Firing. Confirm stripping, cleaning and assembling.
0739. Confirm by practice. Guns are to be inspected and left lightly oiled.
0740. Care After Cleaning. Remind: Under normal conditions the bore, chamber
and other gas affected parts must be thoroughly cleaned, inspected and re-oiled daily
for a minimum period of five days after the gun has been fired.
7-8
LMG LF 2. Grouping at 100 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0741. Aim. To determine the gunners grouping ability with the LMG.
SARTS), an ETR (with or without SARTS), a GR, a 100 m Zeroing Range or a MMTTR.
practices.
0744. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 x 1.220 m screens with Fig 11 per firer (1 x 1.220 m screen per firer on an
ETR or MMTTR) each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch positioned with
the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure
or
1 x Fig 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range)
60 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) ammunition per firer.

Preliminaries
obstructions).
rules. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Figure 11 with 75 mm x 100 mm white patch on a screen in front and

rear target frames or SARTS Figure 12d
1. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each target.
2. Examine the targets and record group sizes.
3. Repeat 1 and 2 above.
4. Calculate the average group size from the total of four groups fired
and record.
5. Rounds remaining are to be handed in.
7-9
Range/Positioning
100 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d
1. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds at the target.
2. Examine the target, record the group size.
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d
1. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds at the target.
2. Examine the target, record the group size.

0748. The standard to be achieved in Practices 2 and 3 is:
Pass 750 mm group.
7-10
LMG LF 3. Zeroing at 100 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0749. Aim. To superimpose the firers Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on the Correct
Zero Position (CZP).
SARTS), an ETR (with or without SARTS), a GR, a 100 m Zeroing Range or a MMTTR.
practices.
0752. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x 1.220 m screen with Fig 11 per firer with a 75 mm x 100 mm white patch
positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the figure
or
1 x Fig 12d per firer (on SARTS converted range)
40 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) ammunition per firer (SUSAT) (includes 5
rounds fire trench)
60 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link) ammunition per firer (Iron sights) (includes 5
rounds fire trench)
a. Gunners are to achieve a burst group size of 675 mm with 20 rounds in
Practice 2 before sights are adjusted.
b. The correct zero position (CZP) is 125 mm above the point of aim. In
Practice 3 the gun is correctly zeroed if the distance from the CZP to the MPI
is within 50 mm.
c. If Iron sights are used both barrels are to be zeroed. If using SUSAT the
registration practice should be fired with the second barrel.
d. Practice 6 is only to be fired if you completed practices 1, 2 and 3 with
the SUSAT fitted.
Preliminaries
obstructions).
7-11
Practice Details
Practice 1. Limbering Up
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Stop butt (off the edge of the zeroing screen) If using SARTS range,
firers may engage the target
Instructions
Fire 5 rounds in bursts.
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d
Stand up after every second burst.
2. Discuss the group size and position.

Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round burst to determine MPI.

2. If correct zero is not achieved, repeat Practice 2 using the group plus
a further 15 rounds.
Practice 4. Iron Sight Zero Second Barrel

Range/Positioning
100m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 2
7-12
Practice 5. Iron Sight Check Group

Range/Positioning
100m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 3
Practice 6. SUSAT Register Second Barrel

Range/Positioning
100m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 3
Practice 7. MPI Check (Iron Sight or SUSAT)

Range/Positioning
100m Fire Trench
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 2
Instructions
As for Practice 3

0757. A 5 round burst group size of 450 mm in Practice 3 and 5
7-13
LMG LF 4. Application of Fire at 200 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0758. Aim. To practise gunners in engaging targets at 200 metres.
SARTS), an ETR (if converted to SARTS) or a GR.
practices.
0762. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 x Double Fig 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer
1 x SARTS Fig 11 per firer with double Fig 11 image on monitor
60 x 5.56 mm rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) ammunition per firer
0763. Miscellaneous. Determine the firers expected scoring area and confirm the
POA/wind allowance.

Preliminaries
obstructions).
Practice Details
Practice 1. Sighting
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire two bursts of 3-5 rounds.

2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
7-14
Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11.

3. Fire 20 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds.
4. MPI to be signalled at the end of the exposure.
Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11
Instructions

Practice 4. Timed
Range/Positioning
200 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Scoring
0767. After each burst the target is lowered and the MPI is indicated with spotting
discs.
7-15
LMG LF 4 Time Chart

ranges this will be insufficient, therefore, additional time for target movement is to be
allowed.
Practice
Range/ Target
200 m Double
Figure 11
200 m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 1:07
200 m Double
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
As for Practice 1.
200 m Double
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 2.
7-16
Timings
No time limit
Remarks
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of each burst to be signalled, (2 x
bursts).
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI to be signalled at end of exposure.
LMG LF 5. Application of Fire at 300 and 400 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0770. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets at 300 and 400 metres.
practices.
0774. Stores.
Normal range stores
GR or CGR without SARTS:
1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer
1 x SARTS Fig 11 per firer with Triple Fig 11 image on monitor
0775. Miscellaneous. Determine the gunners expected scoring area and confirm
the POA/wind allowance.

Preliminaries
obstructions).
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

7-17
Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11.

Practice 3. Timed
Range/Positioning
300 m Fire Trench
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

Practice 5. Timed
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-18

Scoring
0779. After each burst the target is lowered and the MPI is indicated with spotting
discs.
LMG LF 5 Time Chart

allowed
Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
300 m
Triple Figure 11
No time limit
300 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 51
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI to be signalled at end of exposure.
300 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 36
As for Practice 2.
400 m
Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
As for Practice 1.
400 m
Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 2.
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of each burst to be signalled.
7-19
LMG LF 6. Advanced Application of Fire at 200, 300 and 400

Metres
A. RCO Notes
0782. Aim. To practise the gunners in taking up fire positions and engaging fleeting
targets at ranges of 200, 300 and 400 metres.
0783. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on either a CGR or ETR (with
SARTS) or a GR.
practices.
0786. Stores.

Normal range stores

1 x Double Fig 11 per firer (200 metres)

1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer (300 and 400 metres) SARTS converted range

1 x SARTS Fig 11 per firer with Double Fig 11 image on monitor (200 metres)

1 x SARTS Fig 11 per firer with Triple Fig 11 image on monitor (300 and 400
metres)

0787. Miscellaneous. Determine the gunners expected scoring area and confirm
the POA/wind allowance.

Preliminaries
obstructions).
Practice Details
7-20
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

1. Gunners lined up 50 metres to the rear of the firing point with guns
loaded and carried by the carrying handle.
2. Order Watch out
Advance. Gunners are to advance at the walk.
3. After 10 metres the RCO is to signal the targets to be raised.
4. The appearance of the targets is the signal for the gunners to run
onto the firing point, adopt the nominated position, make ready and fire
15 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds.
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 4. Timed
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. 6 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals over a period of one
minute.
7-21
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 6. Timed
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. 4 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals over a period of two
minutes.
3. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure.
Scoring
0791. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice:
Practice 2
One point per hit
Practices 4 and 6
5 points per successful engagement

fails a practice they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Gunners who
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
200m
15
15
300m
30
15
30
400m
20
10
20
7-22
LMG LF 6 Time Chart

allowed.
Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
200 m Double
Figure 11
No time limit
200 m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 1:06
Up and Hold.
300 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
As for Practice 1.
300 m Triple
Figure 11
Up Down
05 09
13 17
22 26
34 38
44 48
54 58
Fall when hit.
400 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 1.
400 m Triple
Figure 11
Up Down
05 10
45 50
1:10 1:15
1:55 2:00
Fall when hit.
1. Up and hold.
7-23
LMG ACMT Preparation

A.RCO Notes
whose personal is the LMG, immediately prior to the ACMT.
the ACMT (ETR, GR, and CGR).
1 to 5.
0798. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x double Figure 11 at 200 metres per firer
1 x triple Figure 11 at 300 and 400 metres per firer
as the ACMT.
commences.
c. Gunners must achieve a 675 mm group with 20 rounds from the prone
position at 100 metres with Iron Sight or Optic Sight during Practice 1 before
adjusting their sights.
the LF is for trained gunners they must be encouraged to make their own
e. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and gunners are to be fully
conversant with the details in Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,
Pamphlet No. 8, LMG (5.56 mm) and Associated Equipment relating to
Zeroing and Application of Fire.
f.
To maximise First Time Pass Rates, after this ACMT Preparation and
before the ACMT is fired on a range, the ACMT should be conducted on the
DCCT to familiarise gunners with the practices.
7-24

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Zeroing
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 11
1. Fire 20 rounds in 3- 5 bursts at the same aiming mark.
2. The firer is to apply his safety catch, stand up, after every second
burst.

Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 11
1. Fire a 5 round burst to determine MPI.

Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
25 Rounds (Max)
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11
Instructions

2. If possible all bursts are to be signalled or viewed.
3. Gunners are to record their POA on the shooting record.
4. Fire further rounds (3-5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
7-25

Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
35 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

2. If possible all bursts are to be signalled or viewed

Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
40 Rounds (max)
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11
Instructions

2. If possible all bursts are to be signalled or viewed.
4. Fire further rounds (3-5 maximum) to confirm the POA.
Note Targets positioned in the Hythe frames or SARTS on top of the Mantlet may only
be engaged where Range Standing Orders permit their use.
7-26
LMG ACMT
A. RCO Notes
07103. Firing Requirement. ACMT. LMG ACMT is to be fired annually by all
personnel whose personal weapon is the LMG.
07104. Ranges. LMG ACMT can be fired on an ETR (with SARTS), a CGR (with
SARTS) or a GR. Where the test is fired on ranges converted to SARTS the firing
point monitors are to be positioned where the gunners cannot view them.
07105. Stores. CGRs and ETRs are to be rigged as follows:
GR

200 m
300-400 m
Double Figure 11
Triple Figure 11
SARTS Ranges
200 m
SARTS Figure 11 with double

Figure 11 image on monitor
300-400 m
SARTS Figure 11 with triple

Figure 11 image on monitor
07106. Timings. It will take approximately 45 minutes to complete all practices of

ACMT.
07107. Rules.
webbing, combat helmet, combat body armour and issued, serviceable
hearing protection.
b.
c.
d.
Rounds may not be carried forward from one practice to another.
e. Ammunition allocation for ACMT includes 15 rounds for registration

from which 5 rounds are to be fired at each range prior to starting practices.
Details.
07109. Ammunition. ACMT 145 rounds.
7-27
Preliminaries
obstructions).
Practice Details
Practice 1. Defence
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 2. Enemy Counter Attack

Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. 6 x 3 second exposures with irregular intervals over a period of one
minute.
Practice 3. Defence
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-28

minutes.
Practice 4. Attack
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
a. 400 m Prone
b. 300 m Prone
a. 20 Rounds
b. 20 Rounds
1. Triple Figure 11 at 400 and 300 metres.
irregular intervals over a one minute period at each distance.
1. Firer in the prone position at 500 metres, gun loaded with 40
rounds.
2. Order Watch out Advance. Gunners are to advance at the walk.
3. When the gunners are 35 metres from the firing point the RCO is to
signal the targets to be raised.
4. The appearance of the targets is the signal for the gunners to run to
the 400 metre firing point, adopt the prone position, make ready and
fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure.
5. Targets fall when hit, after the fourth exposure order Prepare to
Move, the gunners are to make safe with a 20 round belt.
6. Order Watch out Advance. Gunners are to advance at the walk.
7. Repeat the procedure at 300 metres.
Practice 5. Point of Fire

Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 at 200 metres.

exposures with irregular intervals over a one minute period.
1. Firer in the prone position at 300 metres, gun loaded with 20
rounds.
2. Order Watch out.
3. The appearance of the target for 1 second is the signal for the
gunners to run to the 200 metre firing point, adopt the prone position
and make ready.
4. 30 seconds after the initial exposure there will be 4 exposures of 4
seconds. Fire one burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure.
Scoring
Practice 1
One point per hit
Practices 2, 3, 4 and 5
5 points per effective engagement
7-29
Standard
they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Gunners who fail are to have
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
1&5
200m
40
20
40
2&4b
300m
50
25
50
3&4a
400m
40
20
40
LMG ACMT Time Chart

07114. One extra second has been included for target movement.
Practice
Range/ Target
200 m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 1:06
Up and hold.
300 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 09
13 17
22 26
31 35
45 49
56 1:00
Fall when hit.
400 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 10
45 50
1:10 1:15
1:55 2:00
Fall when hit.
4a
400 m
Triple Figure 11
Up Down
05 30
38 43
48 53
1.00 1:05
1. RCO will signal for exposure.

2. Fall when hit.
4b
300 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 4a
As for Practice 4a.
200 m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 07
37 42
50 55
1:10 1:15
1:25 1:30
Fall when hit.
7-30
Timings
Remarks
Firing In CBRN Conditions Instructional Shoot and Assessment

A. RCO Notes
07115. Aim. To practise and assess gunners in engaging targets in CBRN conditions
from the prone position.
to SARTS, or a GR. Where the assessment (Practices 5 to 8) is fired on a range
converted to SARTS the firing point monitors are to be positioned where the gunners
cannot view them.
07119. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 x Double Fig 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer (200 m)
1 x Triple Fig 11 per firer (300 m) SARTS converted range
SARTS Fig 11 per firer with double Fig 11 image displayed on a monitor (200
m) SARTS Fig 11 per firer with triple Fig 11 image displayed on a monitor
(300 m)
07120. Miscellaneous. Full IPE should be worn. As a minimum gunners are to wear
Preliminaries
obstructions).
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 on a screen.

7-31
Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 on a screen.

Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 on a screen
Instructions

Practice 4. Timed
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Triple Figure 11 on a screen.

Practice 5. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
7-32

Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. 6 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals over one minute.
Practice 7. Snap
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. 4 x 4 second exposures at irregular intervals.
Practice 8. Snap
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. 6 x 4 second exposures with irregular intervals over one minute.
Scoring
07124. Sighting practices are not scored.
Practices 2, 4, 5 and 6 1 point per hit.
Practices 7 and 8
5 points per effective engagement.
Standard
they must reshoot that practice only to achieve the OMS. Gunners who fail are to have
7-33
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
5&6
200m
50
30
50
7&8
300m
50
30
50
Time Chart
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
200 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 1.06
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of each burst to be
signalled, (2 x bursts).
200 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 36
300 m
Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 1.
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI to be signalled at end of
exposure.
As for Practice 1.
300 m
Triple Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
As for Practice 2.
200 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 1:06
Up and hold.
200 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 10
15 20
24 29
33 38
44 49
1.00 1.05
Fall when hit.
300 m
Triple Figure 11
Fall when hit.
300 m
Triple Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 10
15 20
26 31
35 40
As for Practice 6.
7-34
Fall when hit.
CHAPTER 8
SERVICE PISTOL
Scope
0801. Chapter 8 sets out all Service Pistol
live firing (LF) lessons to be completed in
the lessons to all Arms and Services and
the progression and frequency with which
they are to be fired.
firing is essential for preparing personnel for
the Pistol Annual Combat Marksmanship
Test (ACMT) in LFMT Stage 3.
Pistol Users
Contents
SCOPE 8-1
PISTOL USERS
8-1
8-1
SAFETY 8-1
8-2
INSTRUCTIONS 8-3
8-4
WHTs 8-4
LF LESSON 1
8-7
LF LESSON 2
8-10
LF LESSON 3
8-11
LF LESSON 4
8-13
LF LESSON 5
8-15
LF LESSON 6
8-17
ACMT PREPARATION
8-20
ACMT 8-22
CBRN ASSESSMENT
8-26
0803. Personnel who are issued with the

Service Pistol, both Regular and Reserve
firers from all Arms and Services, in
headquarters, other staffs and units are to pass the ACMT annually.
0804. Service Pistol User Initial Training. The LF lessons listed within the
Commanders Guide are to be fired by all personnel during initial training of the Service
Pistol. Reserve personnel are to achieve the same firers Goals and Progress as
regular personnel:
0805. Regular and Reserve Units. The ACMTPreparation is to be fired annually
by all personnel in Regular and Reserve units who are issued with the Service Pistol.
the ACMT is fired on the range, use of DCCT to familiarise firers with the ACMT
Practices will improve First Time Pass rates and the overall standard of shooting.
0807. Remedial Training. DCCT provides invaluable aids to the remedial training
are available. However, final confirmation must be by the use of live firing.
Safety
0808. It is mandatory for all firers to have completed WHTs prior to their first live
firing of a weapon, in order to ensure a minimum standard of safety. Conducting
officers must confirm that all firers firing any weapon for the first time have completed
the relevant WHTs prior to firing.
8-1
Pistols with holsters
Magazines
Cleaning rods
Cleaning materials
Helmets Combat
Issued Combat Body Armour
Coaches Aide Memoire (AF B71158)
First aid kit
Stopwatch
As required
2 per pistol
1 per pistol
As required
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per firer
1 per coach
Complete
As required
0811. Dress. Dress for Pistol LF lessons should include belt order webbing,
including a pistol holster. Combat helmets and Combat Body Armour are to be worn
for all LF lessons.
a. Where possible, pistols are to be prepared for firing prior to moving to
the range to ensure they are prepared under ideal conditions and not those
c. Observation of the fall of shot is obvious at short ranges (10 25
metres). During grouping practices it must be emphasized to firers that they
are to take the correct point of aim (POA) for each shot and avoid aiming off.
0813. Aiming Marks. Where white patches are used the POA is to be bottom
centre of the patch.
0814. Coaching. Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms,Pistol L131A1 contains
full details of coaching requirements. Some essential points to ensure are:
8-2
c. All group sizes, Mean Points of Impact (MPI), POAs for all positions
and scores are to be recorded on the firers personal shooting record cards.
d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during snap shooting
practices.
0815. Spotters. When grouping, to enable firers and coaches to gain the maximum benefit from the shots fired, members of the waiting detail should be employed
as spotters, using binoculars, to plot the arrival of each shot. To achieve maximum
value from this type of live firing, it is essential that firers are given every opportunity
to discuss the results of their shooting with their coach.
0816. Firers Goals and Progress. Firers who do not achieve the required Firers
Goals and Progress should be given further coaching before firing again.
a.
b.
c.
Pack kit.
d. Summary of the standard achieved, specific points relevant to lesson,

forecast of the next LF lesson.
handling skill throughout the Army in line with operational safety and handling
monitored accurately and rectified if necessary. It is an indication of a units operational
readiness.
a. Firers in regular and reserve units whose personal or alternate weapon
is the Service Pistol are to complete their tests in accordance with MATTs. All
tests are to be carried out in daylight and conducted by a qualified, current
and competent instructor.
8-3
helmet.
Definition of Firers Goals and Progress
0823. Handling, Firers Goals and Progress. Handling Gunners Goals and
Progress achieved in WHTs are defined as:
Pass
Pass in all tests.
Fail
Fail in any test.
0824. Training Performance Firers Goals and Progress. A firer is considered

competent on achieving the pass standard. Failure to meet the pass standard indicates
that the firer is not competent in the use of the Pistol. Resting is to be carried out after
completion of remedial training on the individual test(s) that were failed.
WHTS General Service Pistol L131A1
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
8-4
Test No. 1
Safety
Unloaded pistol lying on the ground.
1. Order the firer Take control of the pistol. The firer, without further
direction, is to:
a. Pick up the pistol and carry out full normal safety precautions.
1. Standard:
Pass
Fail
Test No. 2
Pistol unloaded, cleaning kit box, flannelette and cleaning rags, cleaning rod,
oil.
1. Order the firer to strip the pistol as for daily cleaning. Ask the
a. What are the differences to normal daily cleaning when in the following
(1) Wet conditions.
b. What materials are provided for cleaning the pistol?
2. Order the firer to Assemble the pistol and carry out the function test
1. Standard:
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Test No. 3
Magazine Filling
Magazine, 17 drill rounds.
The firer will fill the magazine by hand with 17 drill rounds.
Instructors Note: Leave magazine filled with 3 rounds on completion .
No time limit.
Test No. 4
Loading
Pistol, one magazine from test 3. Holster worn by the firer.
Pistol and magazine in the holster. Order Load. Pistols must be secured in
holster at the end of the drill.
Instructors Note: The firer is to load with the magazine containing drill
rounds Leave the pistol loaded for Test 5.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Fail More than
1 mistake.
Test No. 5
Ready Drill Standing Position
Pistol loaded and in the holster (from Test 4), representative targets.
Order Standing Position Ready.
2. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 6
Immediate Action (IA)
Pistol loaded and ready (from Test 5), representative targets.
1. Order Fire Pistol firing alright pistol stops. Firer to carry out the
IA.
2. Firer is to check the magazine is fitted correctly, cock the pistol and
continue firing.
3. Order Stop.
1. The actions tested are those relating to the IA drills only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
8-5
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
Subject
Stores
Conditions
Marking
8-6
Test No. 7
Obstruction Drill
Pistol loaded and ready (from Test 6), representative targets.
1. Order Fire Pistol firing alright Pistol stops. Firer to carry out the
IA.Slide NOT fully forward.
2. On examination of body and chamber, order Obstruction.
3. When the firer has attempted to shake out the obstruction, order
Obstruction NOT clear. When the firer has removed the magazine and
attempted to remove the obstruction by hand, order Obstruction clear.
4. Firer is to complete the obstruction drill.
5. Order Stop - Make Safe.
1. The actions tested are those relating to Obstruction Drills only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 8
Empty Magazine Drill
Pistol made safe with an empty magazine (from Test 7), representative
targets.
1. Instruct the firer to cock the weapon. With the slide held to the rear, order
Fire Pistol firing alright Pistol stops.
1. The actions tested are those relating to Empty Magazine Drills only.
3. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Test No. 9
Unloading
Pistol loaded and ready (from Test 8).
Order Unload. The test is not complete until the firer has secured the
pistol and into the holster and secured the magazine.
1. Standard:
Pass 1 mistake.
Pistol LF 1. Introductory Shoot and Grouping at 10 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0825. Aim. To teach how to prepare pistols for firing, to confirm that the firer can
aim, hold and fire the pistol and how to clean the pistol after firing.
practices.
0827. Stores.
Normal ranges stores
1 x witness screen with 2 x 75 mm x 100 mm aiming marks per firer
30 rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer

Preliminaries
0829. Preparing the Pistol for Firing. Explain and demonstrate:
a.
Strip the pistol as for daily cleaning, clean it.
b.
Inspect the parts to make certain they are serviceable.
c.
In those conditions where oiling is permitted, lightly oil the following:

(1) The guide grooves and rib on the body within which the slides
moves.
(2) A very slight amount in the trigger mechanism and the hammer
swivel pin.
(3)
The guide grooves on the slide.
(4)
The outside of the barrel (except the bullet guide).
(5)
The main spring guide and main spring.
(6)
The inside of the slide (except the face of the breech).
d. Assemble the pistol. Hand operate the slide several times to ensure
that the action works smoothly.
e.
Make certain that the outside of the pistol is always dry.
8-7
f.
Strip, clean and leave dry both magazines.
0830. Confirm by practice.

0831. Range Safety and Discipline. Explain and demonstrate that as the pistol
can be easily discharged in a wrong direction, the following rules are to apply to all
range firing:
a.
Pistols are to be kept in their holsters until on the firing point.
b. When in the alert position, never turn round to talk to the safety
supervisor or coach.
c. The drill for drawing pistols, loading, unloading etc, will be strictly
enforced. Keep the pistol pointing towards the target while clearing a
stoppage.
d. The chair for use on the sitting practice is to be positioned facing the
targets. RCOs are responsible for ensuring that chairs are placed in a position
where they will not become unstable and/or sink into the range floor
e. Coaches are to stand so that they are looking over the firers left
shoulder.
f.
No one must stand near the right shoulder of the firer from the moment
Load is given until the order Ease Springs has been actioned.
0832. Confirm by questions and practice.
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
10 m Standing Kneeling Sitting (Chair)
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x screen with 2 x 75 mm x 100 mm aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group at left target.

3. Fire a further 5 rounds at the right aiming mark.
4. Repeat the practice for each position.

0835. The average group size that should be achieved in the repeat practice is 180
mm.
8-8

0836. Equipment Damage. Sharp tools are NOT to be used to remove carbon
fouling. Scotch bright pads only may be used to clean stubborn carbon fouling from
the breech face. They are NOT to be used to clean any other part of the pistol.
0837. Cleaning after Firing. Explain and demonstrate:
a.
Carry out NSPs, strip the pistol.
b. The bore is easier to clean immediately after firing while the barrel is still
warm. If this is not possible, thoroughly oil the bore to assist later cleaning.
At the appropriate time clean the barrel as taught and, except in sandy
conditions, leave it oiled.
c. With an oily rag, wipe off all fouling from the inside of the slide,
particularly the face of the firing pin hole.
d.
Clean the magazines.
e.
Assemble the pistol then test the functioning.
0838. Care after Firing. Explain:

a. Under normal circumstances the bore must be thoroughly cleaned,
inspected and re-oiled daily for a minimum period of five days after the pistol
has been fired.
b. In very dusty conditions pistols must be dry cleaned and inspected
daily. If oil has to be used to remove rust, use it sparingly and remove all
traces after- wards.
0839. Confirm by questions and practice.
8-9
Pistol LF 2 Identifying Points of Aim (POA)

A. RCO Notes
0840. Aim. To establish the firers Point of Impact and POA at 3 to 15m.
practices.
0843. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 x Figure Targets with 4 x 25mm aiming marks per target

Preliminaries
Practice Details
0846. Practice details are as follows.
Practice 1. Identify and Apply the POA
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure Target with 4 x 25mm aiming marks
Instructions
1. Fire 3 well aimed shots at the nominated aiming marker.

2. Discuss the fall of shot and subsequent aim off.
3. Repeat the practice at all ranges to confirm the POA.

8-10
Pistol LF 3 Accelerated Fire at 3 15 Metres

A. RCO Notes
0850. Timings Each detail will take approximately 40 minutes to complete all
practices.
0851. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 Fig 11/21 targets per firer

Preliminaries
0854. Firing Practice. Explain that learning to quickly adopt the correct position
and hold of a weapon will allow a firer to engage a target with increasing speed and
accuracy at close quarters.
Practice Details
8-11

Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21.
1. Fire 2 shots with 1 second shot cadence at the left target.
right target only.

Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.

Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a half second shot cadence.

Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a quarter second shot cadence.
Scoring
0856. Two points per hit within the CQM scoring area, one point anywhere else on
the target.
HPS 48
Pass 34
8-12
Pistol LF 4 Failure to Stop

A. RCO Notes
practices
0860. Stores
Normal range stores
1 Fig 11/21 target per firer

Preliminaries
and subsequently the head with well aimed shots in order to defeat the enemy at close
quarters.
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 11/21.
3. Fire Two shots at the body and two to the head at each engagement.
4. Discuss the fall of shot, record scores and patch up.
8-13

Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.

Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.

Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
0865. Two points per hit in the central scoring CQM area, one point per hit
everywhere else on the target.
HPS 64
Pass 45
8-14
Pistol LF 5 Close Range Multiple Targets

A. RCO Notes
0866. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging multiple targets by rapid shooting at
close range.
practices.
0869. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 x Fig 11/21 targets per firer

Preliminaries
range, a firer must quickly decide the priority of engagement before engaging rapidly
and accurately.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Pairs
Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 11/21.
1. On command or appearance of the targets, fire two rounds at each
target.
2. After the second engagement, dress forward and discuss the results.
8-15
Practice 2. Pairs
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 3. Pairs
Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Practice 4. Pairs
Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1. 2x Fig 11/21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
0874. Two points per hit in the central scoring CQM area, one point per hit anywhere
else on the target.
HPS 64.
Pass 45
8-16
Pistol LF 6. Advanced Snap Shooting

A. RCO Notes
0875. Aim. To practise snap shooting at a single fleeting enemy from the standing,
kneeling and sitting positions at ranges up to 25 metres.
practices.
0877. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Stopwatch
2 x Figure 11 per firer
1x Chair per firer

Preliminaries
safety rules (see Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
a. If swivel mechanisms are not available, exposure times are to be
controlled using whistle blasts. A short whistle blast signifying the beginning
and a long whistle blast, the end of each exposure.
b. The chair for use on the sitting practice is to be positioned facing the
targets. RCOs are responsible for ensuring that chairs are placed in a position
where they will not become unstable and/or sink into the range floor
Practice Details
8-17
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
15 m Sitting (Chair)
3 x Sighters
6 Rounds
1. 2 x Figure 11.
2. 3 x 5 second exposures with intervals of between 510 seconds.
1. Firer in the sitting position. Made Safe with the pistol holstered.
3. Fire 2 rounds at the left target in each exposure.
4. Make safe and holster the pistol after each exposure.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
20 m Standing and Kneeling

3 x Sighters
12 Rounds
1. 2 x Figure 11.
4. Return to the alert position after each exposure.
5. Repeat the practice in the kneeling position at the right target.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
25 m Standing and Sitting

3 x Sighters
12 Rounds
1. 2 x Figure 11.
5. Repeat the practice in the sitting position at the right target.
Scoring
1 point per hit.
HPS 30
Pass 21
8-18
Pistol LF 6. Time Chart

Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
15 m
2 x Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 11
17 23
31 37
Reset watch and repeat the practice.
20 m
2 x Figure 11
As for Practice 1
25 m
2 x Figure 11
As for Practice 1
8-19
Pistol ACMT Preparation

A. RCO Notes
0883. Aim. To prepare the firer for the ACMT; by identifying the MPI of groups fired
from all of the ranges and firing positions used during the ACMT in order to establish
the correct Points of Aim (POA).
whose personal or alternate weapon is the pistol.
the ACMT.
1 to 3.
0887. Stores.
Normal range stores
4 x Figure 11/21 per firer
38 rounds 9mm ball per firer
as the ACMT.
b. Coaching is permitted during the ACMT Preparation. However, as the
LF is for trained firers they must be encouraged to make their own decisions,
establishing MPI and recording their POA for all ranges and firing positions
used in the ACMT.
c. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers are to be fully conversant
with the details in the appropriate Pistol General Staff Publication.
d. To maximise First Time Pass Rates (FTPR), after this ACMT Preparation

Preliminaries
0890. Range Safety Rules.
a. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules (see
Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
8-20
Practice Details
Practice 1. Confirm CQB POA
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21 with 2 x 25 mm aiming mark
Instructions
1. At each range, fire 1 well aimed shot at the nominated aiming mark.
2. Establish the POA.
3. Fire a second shot to confirm the POA..
Practice 2. Establish POA

Range/Positioning
20m Standing & kneeling
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group to confirm the MPI.


Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round group

2. Discuss the position of the MPI and note adjustments needed to the
POA.
8-21
Pistol ACMT
A. RCO Notes
0892. Firing Requirement. The Pistol ACMT is to be fired annually by all personnel
whose personal or alternate weapon is the Service Pistol.
practices.
0894. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Stopwatch
2 x Figure 11/21 per firer
1x Chair per firer
0895. Rules.
a. Dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order
including pistol holster, combat helmet, body armour and issued, serviceable
hearing protection.
b.
No extra time will be given for stoppages. Coaching is not permitted.
c. If swivel mechanisms are not available, exposure times are to be

controlled using whistle blasts. A short whistle blast signifying the beginning
and a long whistle blast, the end of each exposure.
d. Chairs are to be positioned at 10m prior to practice 4. They are to face
the target and be located in a stable and level position.
0896. Time Charts. Time charts to assist range staff are included after the Practice
Details.
0897. Ammunition. 32 rounds.
0898. Magazines. 4 magazines of 8 rounds are to be used.

Preliminaries
8-22
Practice Details
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
25 m Standing
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11.
1. Firer in the standing alert position, ready, with the safety catch
applied.
3. Fire 4 rounds from the standing position at the left target
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
20 m Standing & Kneeling
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11.
2. 2 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 5-10 seconds
3. Fire 2 rounds at the left tgt on each exposure.
5. Repeat the practice kneeling at the right hand tgt.
Practice 3. CQB
Range/Positioning
15,10,5 and 3m Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 11/21 with 1 x 4 second exposure at each range.
Instructions

2. Multiple tgts fire 2 shots at each tgt.
4. Apply safety/Holster move to 10m and repeat 10m practice.
5. Apply safety/holster move to 5m.
7. Failure to stop fire 2 shots at the body and 2 shots to head of the
left tgt.
9. Apply safety/holster move to 3m and repeat the 5m practice.
10. Record scores.
8-23
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
10 m Sitting (Chair)
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11/21.
2. 2 x 7 second exposures with an interval of 5-10 seconds.
1. Firer in the sitting chair position with the pistol made safe in the
holster.
2. Fire 2 rounds at the left tgt on the first exposure.
3. Make safe and return the pistol to the holster after the first exposure.
4. Fire 2 rds at the right tgt on the second exposure.
Scoring
08102. Practice 1 & 2 one points per hit, practice 3 & 4 2 points per hit within the inner
or outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else on the target.
Standards
Prac
Range
Rounds
1&2
20/25 m
3&4
3-15 M
OMS Requirement
HPS
Pistol User
Mksm
12
10
12
20
28
36
40

score or more for all practices at the first attempt. Firers are NOT permitted to re-shoot
practices or the whole ACMT in order to qualify as a Marksman. Marksmen are entitled
to wear the badge for one year before they must re-qualify.
8-24
Pistol ACMT Time Chart

08105. One extra second has been allowed for target movement.
Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
Remarks
25 m
2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN
05 14
20 m
2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN
05 11
17 23
1. Reset watch and repeat
3-15 m
2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN
05 09
1. Tgts up and hold

2. Exposures controlled by whistle or
commands
10 m
2 x Figure 11/21
UP DOWN
05 13
8-25
Firing in CBRN Conditions Pistol Assessment

A. RCOS Notes
08106. Aim. To practise and assess soldiers in target engagement in CBRN
conditions from the standing and kneeling positions at ranges up to 25 metres.
the RAU that the practices contained in this lesson are permitted. Practices may be
conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified.
practices.
08109. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Stopwatch
2 x Figure 11 per firer

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Rapid
Range/Positioning
15 m Standing
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8-26
1. 2 x Figure 11.
1. Firer in the nominated position, wearing respirator and gloves.
3. Fire 6 rounds at the left target.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
20 m Kneeling
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11.
1. Firer in the standing alert position, wearing respirator and gloves.
3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to adopt the
nominated position and fire two rounds at the right target.
4. Return to the standing alert position between exposures.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
25 m Kneeling
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2 x Figure 11.
3 x 5 second exposures with intervals of 4 seconds.
Firer in the nominated position, wearing respirator and gloves.
Fire one round at each target in each exposure.
Return to the alert position between exposures.
Record the scores.
Scoring
1 point per hit.
Standards
HPS 18
Pass 11
8-27
Pistol CBRN Time Chart

8-28
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
15 m
1 x Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 18
20 m
2 x Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
13
17
25
29
37
25 m
2 x Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
11
15
21
25
31
Remarks
Chapter 9
(Reserved)
9-1
9-2
CHAPTER 10
TRANSITION TO LIVE FIRING TACTICAL TRAINING
Scope
Contents
SCOPE 10-1
1001. Chapter 10 sets out Stage 4 in
COMPLETION OF TLFTT SHOOTS
10-1
the System for Training the Battle Shot
SECTION 1 RIFLE/LSW
10-2
Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training
SECTION 2 LMG
10-50
(TLFTT). The shoots in this Stage are
SECTION 3 SHARPSHOOTER
10-75
central to the successful transition from
SECTION 4 CQM RIFLE/PISTOL
10-96
basic shooting standards achieved in Live
SECTION 5 CQM LMG
10-109
Firing Marksmanship Training (LFMT)
SECTION 6 F&M TEST
10-122
Stages 1 to 3 to the more testing operational
shooting skills required by all Arms and Services
1002. For DCC Roled firers in particular, TLFTT prepares and trains firers for the
LFTT exercises in which they will participate.
Completion of TLFTT Shoots
1003. The following shoots contained in this chapter are available to be fired by All
Arms and Services as directed by the chain of command or PJHQ. The Commanders
Guide at Table 1 within Chapter 1 directs the training to be completed.
10-1
Section 1.
Rifle/LSW
Application of TLFTT Shoots
1004. Firing At The LNV. Firing
at the LNV is to be conducted in
accordance with the Commanders
Guide within Chapter 1. The results of
firing at the LNV - Assessments are to
be recorded on unit computer systems.
1005. Firing with NVD and Thermal
Imaging Sights. NVD/TI Shoots are
to be fired in accordance with the
Commanders Guide within Chapter
1. The results of firing with NVD/TI Assessments are to be recorded on
unit computer systems.
Contents
FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS-INSTRUCTIONAL 10-3
FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS - USING FP COVER 10-7
FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS -ASSESSMENT
10-9
MOVING TARGETS AT LONGER RANGES
10-12
FIRING AT THE LNV
10-14
FIRING WITH NVD/TI ZEROING 10-19
FIRING WITH NVD/TI ASSESSMENT
10-21
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA AT 25 METRES
10-25
10-27
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA ASSESSMENT
10-29
AUTOMATIC FIRE
10-32
AUTOMATIC FIRE - ASSESSMENT
10-36
IBSR DEFENSIVE PHASE
10-39
FLANK CONTACTS MOVING VEHICLE
10-41
RIFLE LONG RANGE SUPPRESSION
10-46
1006. Firing At Moving Targets. Firing at Moving Targets shoots are to be fired
in accordance with the Commanders Guide within Chapter 1. The results of Firing at
Moving Targets - Assessments are to be recorded on unit computer systems
Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots
1007. Increasingly, sights are issued that include a CQB Sight. This is true of both
LDS and NVD. The planning of the various TLFTT activities should include additional
time and ammunition to allow the firer to practice with the CQB Sight as well as the
main optic.
1008. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details of Operational
Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pages of this
chapter. Each practice is contained in separate pages for easy use.
1009. Dress. The dress for the firers is to include belt order webbing, combat
helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress may be altered to
reflect the operational role.
10-2
Firing at Moving Targets Instructional Shoot On DCCT

A. RCO Notes
1010. Aim. To practise the methods of engaging crossing targets using DCCT.
1011. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using DCCT. Where DCCT is not
available the shoot may be conducted on a MMTTR.
1012. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 1 hour 10 minutes to complete all
practices on DCCT. Approximately 1 hour 30 minutes will be required for each detail
if the lesson is to be fired live.
1013. Stores.
Complete DCCT equipment or
Normal range stores (MMTTR)
1 screen per firer each with 2 x Figure 20 targets (outwards facing)
a. Firers are to fire the DCCT bore sighting shoot prior to firing the
practices listed below.
b. Prior to this lesson, firers are to be revised in Firing at Crossing Targets
(see Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm)
System (Rifle, LSW and Carbine) and Associated Equipment.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
10-3
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20 on a screen.
2. 10 x exposures (5 x slow, followed by 5 x fast).
4. Discuss the shoot, record the POA.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
2. 10 exposures (5 x slow and 5 x fast) in random order.
4. Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-4
2. 10 exposures at the slow speed.
nominated position, and fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
4. Between exposures order Adopt the standing alert position.
Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 7.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 20 on a screen.
10 exposures (5 x slow and 5 x fast) in random order.
Fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
Discuss the shoot, record the scores.
Practice 8.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
2. 10 exposures at the slow speed.
nominated position, and fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
10-5
Scoring
Practices 3, 4, 7 and 8 1 point per hit on the target.
HPS 80
Pass 52
10-6
Firing at Moving Targets Using Firing Point Cover

A. RCO Notes
1018. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging moving targets from alternate pieces of
cover on the MMTTR firing point.
1019. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted on an MMTTR fixed firing point only.
practices.
1021. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x screen per firer with 2 x Figure 20 targets (outwards facing) Spotting discs
a. If firers are unfamiliar with the MMTTR, the range layout and procedure
is to be explained. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
b.
Timed exposures will be controlled by the RCOs arm signals or paddle.
c. Each firer will start from the left hand piece of cover in each respective
lane and move tactically to alternate pieces of cover as the shoot progresses.
d.
Firers are to be allowed time to prepare for battle.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
10-7
Practice - Snap
Range/Positioning
As per the MMTTR range furniture
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
2. 6 double exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order.
3. An initial exposure of the targets will initiate the contact.
4. Targets are only exposed once firers are in position and the RCO
has signalled to the target operator for the next double- exposure.
1. Firer is loaded and made ready in the standing alert position; 5m to
the rear of the left piece of cover.
2. Order Watch Out.
3. On appearance of the targets, the firer is to double forward and take
cover.
4. The firer will then receive 2 exposures of the Fig 20 target where he
is to fire 2 Rounds at the target for each exposure.
5. After the second exposure the firer is to apply his safety catch and
move to the next piece of cover.
6. On completion of the last exposure the firer is to apply his safety
catch and await further orders.
Scoring
1 point per hit on the target.
HPS 24
Pass 15
End of Range Procedure
10-8
Firing at Moving Targets Assessment

A. RCO Notes
1026. Aim. To practise and assess the firer using the methods of engaging crossing
targets on the MMTTR.
1027. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted on an MMTTR. If no MMTTR is
available, the shoot may be conducted using DCCT.
practices.
1029. Stores.
Normal range stores
1030. Miscellaneous. If firers are unfamiliar with the MMTTR, the range layout
and procedure is to be explained. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice - Sighters
Range/Positioning
50 m Standing Unsupported and Kneeling Unsupported
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
2. 8 x exposures in the following order: 2 x slow, 2 x fast, 2 x slow,
2 x fast.
1. Firer in the standing unsupported position.
2. Fire 1 round at each of the first 4 exposures then adopt the kneeling
unsupported position and fire 1 round at each of the remaining
exposures.
3. Each shot hole is to be indicated by a spotting disc.
4. Discuss the shoot.
10-9
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
2. 8 x exposures (4 x slow and 4 x fast) in random order.
3. Fire 2 Rounds at each exposure.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-10
2. 8 x exposures at the slow speed.
nominated position and fire 2 Rounds at each exposure.

16 Rounds

16 Rounds
Scoring
1034. 1 point per hit on the target.
Standards
HPS 64
Pass 42
10-11
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges

A. RCO Notes
1036. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using DCCT ONLY.
practices on DCCT.
1038. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment.
(see Ref B).

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target.
Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
WALKING
5 left and 5 right runs of a fig 20 target.
1. At each exposure fire 1 round.
2. Discuss results.

Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
Instructions
As above.
10-12

Ammunition
10 Rounds
WALKING
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As above.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
RUNNING
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As above.
Practice 5. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating fresh wind.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
WALKING
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As above.
Practice 6. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating wind.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
RUNNING
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As above.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
WALKING
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As above.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
RUNNING
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As above.

10-13
Firing at the Limit of Night Visibility (LNV) Instructional Shoot

and Assessment
A. RCO Notes
1043. Aim. To practise and assess the methods of engaging targets at the limit of
night visibility (LNV).
1044. Conduct. The lesson can be conducted on an ETR, CGR or GR (Service
personnel employed on Armed Guarding duties can fire this LF lesson in the DCCT, if
a live range is unavailable.
practices. It may be necessary during Phase 1 training to allocate 1 x 40 minute period
by day for rehearsals.
1047. Stores.
Normal range stores (including):
Red Lamps as required by local range regulations
1 x torch fitted with red filter per coach
1 x whistle
1 x Figure 11 stick-in target (draped) per firer (SARTS Figure 11 if using an
ETR with SARTS)
a. Before being trained to shoot at night, the firer must be taught the night
vision lessons from DCC Training, Volume 1, Fieldcraft, Battle Lessons and
Exercises (not required for users completing the LNV shoot for deployment
on armed guarding). The LNV is to be established using the sight to be used
for the firing practice (see Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)),
however the maximum range at which the shoots are to take place is 100
metres.
b. Where necessary, the instructional phase of this lesson should be
taught or revised on the range while waiting for the correct light level. Range
discipline and night range procedures should then be explained and walked
through before firing begins.
c. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggested
method is to start the exposure with a short blast and end the exposure with
a long blast.
d.
10-14
LSW is to be fired bipod supported on practices using the prone position.

Preliminaries
1051. Establishing LNV. Using the most applicable method to suit the range
establish LNV. (See Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
Night Shooting
1052. Iron Sight. Explain and demonstrate by day:
a.
Select the large aperture.
b.
Observe the target with both eyes open.
c. Correctly position the butt in the shoulder and the cheek on the cheek
piece with the rifle angled down below the target.
d. Whilst initially observing the target with both eyes and looking over the
top of the rear sight, start to raise the weapon until the TRILUX source is
observed in the bottom of the field of view.
e. Continue to raise the weapon until the TRILUX source appears just
below the POA and the rear aperture is presented in front of the right eye.
f.
As the TRILUX source is about to coincide with the POA, close the left
eye.
g.
As soon as the TRILUX source is on the POA, squeeze the trigger.
1053. SUSAT/LDS. Explain and demonstrate by day:

a.
Ensure the range drum is set at the 300 metre range position (SUSAT).
b. Look through the sight and adjust the brightness until the tip of the
pointer/crosshair is adequately illuminated.
c.
Hold, aim and fire as for daylight shooting.
1054. Confirm by practice.

Practice Details
10-15
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 stick-in (draped).
Instructions

2. Fire five rounds.
3. Identify the MPI.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-16
1. Figure 11 stick- in (draped).

2. 5 x 5 second exposures with irregular intervals between 5 and 10
seconds.
2. Order Watch, Listen and Shoot.
5. Targets up and hold (ETR only targets fall when hit).
LNV Kneeling Unsupported

5 Rounds
seconds.
LNV Prone
5 Rounds
2. Order Watch, Listen Out.
3. At the start of the exposure the firer is to adopt the prone position and
fire five rounds rapid at the exposure.
Practice 5. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 6. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

5 Rounds
LNV Prone
5 Rounds
prone position and fire five rounds rapid at the exposure.
Scoring
1057. Assessment Practices 4, 5 and 6..
HPS 15
Pass 10
10-17
Time Chart
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
No time limit
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 11
19 25
30 36
45 51
58 1:04
Up and hold.
(ETR only targets fall when hit)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
As for Practice 2
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 21
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 10
15 20
26 31
37 42
48 53
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
10-18
Remarks
Up and hold.
Firing with NVD/TI Zeroing (Daylight Shoot)

A. RCO Notes
1059. Aim. To zero the NVD/TI sight to the firers personal weapon.
1060. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on an ETR or Converted Gallery
Range (CGR )(with or without SARTS) or a Gallery Range.
practices.
1062. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Figure 11 on a 1.220 m screen per firer with
a 75 mm x 100 mm white/thermal patch positioned with the bottom centre of
the patch on the centre of the figure
1 x Figure 12d per firer
25 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Primary User)
a. This shoot should take place in daylight immediately before the night
practices in NVD/TI Rifle/LSW Assessment.
b.
All NVD/TI sights must be bore sighted prior to firing.
c.
LSWs are to fire from the bipod supported position.
d. Conducting officers, NCO coaches and firers (when applicable)

are to be fully conversant with the details in Infantry Training, Volume VI,
(Intelligence,Surveillance, Target Acquisition and Reconnaissance (ISTAR)
Equipment) Platoon and Section STA Equipment.

Preliminaries
10-19
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. The firer is to apply the safety catch, stand up, then re-adopt his
3. Measure the size of the group.
Practice 2. Check group

Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a 5 round check group to con-firm zero.

2. If the correct zero is not achieved, repeat Practice 1 using the
group plus a further 15 Rounds.

1067. The 5 round group size that should be achieved is 150 mm.
10-20
Firing With NVD/TI Rifle/LSW Assessment

A. RCO Notes
1068. Aim. To practise and assess firers in engaging an enemy at night with the
NVD/TI sights fitted to their personal weapon.
1069. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on an ETR (with or without SARTS),
CGR or a Gallery Range.
practices.
1071. Stores.
Normal range stores including:
Red lamps as required by local range regulations
1 x torch per coach fitted with red filter
1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100, 200 and 300 metres(Marked for thermal
recognition)
CGR Left Coffin Figure 11
40 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball ammunition per firer (Primary User)
a.
This shoot should be conducted immediately after the zeroing practices.
b.
LSWs are to fire from the bipod supported position.
c. Due to tunnel vision at night, range conducting officers should ensure

that targets are identified to firers before firing at each range.
d.
A time chart is provided after the practice details.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
10-21
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-22
1. 1 x Figure 11.
3. Fire 10 Rounds rapid.

5 Rounds
1. 1 x Figure 11.
200 m Fire Trench

10 Rounds
1. 1 x Figure 11.
3. Fire 10 Rounds rapid at the exposure.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. 1 x Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
Standards
HPS 40
Pass 24
10-23
Time Chart
ranges this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
10-24
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 11
18 24
28 34
39 45
50 56
Fall when hit.
Remarks
100 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
43 50
55 1:02
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and hold.
300 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
43 50
55 1:02
1:08 1:15
1:20 1:27
1:31 1:38
1:43 1:50
1:55 2:02
Fall when hit.
Firing with HMNVS and LA Introductory Shoot at 25 Metres

A. RCO Notes
1078. Aim. To confirm that the firer can aim, hold and fire the rifle using HMNVS
and LA from the sitting, kneeling, standing position.
1079. Firing Requirement. The Introductory Shoot is only fired during initial
training.
practices.
1082. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x witness screen with 4 x 25 mm square (black) aiming marks per firer
30 x 5.56 mm ball Rounds per firer
Bore sighting Chart
a. Firers personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight, zeroed prior to this
practice.
b. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an
assistant, onto the CZP using the Bore sight Chart before Practice 1.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
10-25
Practice 1. Grouping (Fired twice first with red dot, then with IR laser)
Range/Positioning
25 m Sitting, Kneeling and Standing
Ammunition
2 x 15 Round magazines
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a five round group from sitting, kneeling and standing positions.
3. Repeat the practice using IR laser.

Sitting
75 mm
Kneeling
80 mm
Standing
140 mm
10-26
Firing With HMNVS and LA Grouping and Laser Aimer

Alignment at 100 Metres
A. RCO Notes
1088. Aim. To superimpose the firers Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on to the Correct
Zero Position (CZP) for the HMNVS, LA and host weapon.
1089. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on either a CGR (with or without
practices.
1091. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x 1.220 m screen with Fig 12 per firer (1 x 1.220 m screen per firer on an
the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the Fig 12/Fig 12d SARTS
target at 100 metres
a. Firers personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight zeroed prior to this
practice.
assistant, onto the CZP using the Bore sighting Chart before Practice 1.
c.
The HMNVS and LA CZP is the same as the host weapon.
d. In Practice 1, the weapon is correctly zeroed is the distance from the

CZP to the MPI is 50mm or less (PE).
e.
All practices should be fired at night.
Conduct of the Lesson

Preliminaries
10-27
Practice Details
Practice 1. Check groups
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
1 x 20 Round magazine
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen
Instructions
1. Switch on red dot laser.

2. Fire one group of five Rounds.
3. Identify the MPI and adjust red dot laser for zero if necessary.
4. Fire another five round group if necessary.
5. Switch on HMNVS, place in operating position and focus at
100 metres.
6. Switch on IR laser.
7. Fire one group of five.
8. Identify the MPI and adjust LA for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Register POA

Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling and Standing Alert Positions
Ammunition
1 x 10 Round magazine
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 1
Instructions
Fire a five round group in each firing position with each laser to
determine POA.

1096. The group sizes that should be achieved in Practices 1 and 2 (100 metres)
are:
Prone 200 mm
Kneeling 225 mm
Standing 450 mm
10-28
Firing with HMNVS and LA Assessment

A. RCO Notes
1097. Aim. To assess the firer in engaging targets using HMNVS and LA from the
kneeling and standing positions.
1098. Conduct. The assessment is to be conducted on a CGR (with or without
SARTS), an ETR (with or without SARTS) or a GR.
practices once.
10100. Stores.
Red lamps as required by Range Stores
Normal range stores
1 x Fig 11 per firer
a.
All practices must be fired at night using the IR Laser.
b. Firers personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight zeroed prior to this

practice.
c. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an
d.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
10-29

Range/Positioning
100 m Standing and Kneeling Positions
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
2. 2 x 20 second exposures with an interval to allow firers to adopt the
patrol position.
1. Firer in the Standing Alert position with the HMNVS and LA On and
focused at 100 metres.
3. On the appearance of the target the firer is to fire one round from
the standing position then adopt the kneeling position and fire a further
four rounds at the exposure.
4. Firers must adopt the Standing Alert position between exposures.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Alert
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
1. Firer in the nominated position with the HMNVS and LA On and
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-30
Scoring
10105. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice.
Practices 1 to 4
One point per hit
Standard
HPS 25
Pass 17
Time Chart
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 26
Timings

2. Up and hold.
Remarks
100 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 12
18 25
29 36
41 48
51 58
Fall when hit.
100 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
1:01 1:10
Fall when hit.
50 m
Figure 12
Up Down
05 12
17 24
30 37
40 47
54 1:01
Targets fall when hit unless stick in

targets are used.
10-31
Automatic Fire Instructional Shoot on DCCT

A. RCO Notes
10107. Aim. To practise that the firer can hold, aim and fire his weapon correctly
when firing bursts.
10108. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using DCCT. If DCCT is not available
the shoot may be carried out on a range or LFTTA using stick-in targets.
practices.
10110. Stores.
Complete DCCT equipment or
1 x Whistle
1 x Stopwatch
12 x wooden stakes
1 x sledge hammer
1 x roll mine tape
Chalk (as required)
1 x Double Figure 11 (stick-in) per firer
b. Prior to this lesson, firers are to be revised in the Use of Bursts (see
Ref B).
c. It must be emphasised to firers that only one burst is to be fired per
exposure in Practices 3, 6 and 7.
d. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggested
a long blast.
e. If the shoot is to be conducted on an ETR the targets are to be positioned
50 metres forward of the main firing point. This will ensure that the electric
target mechanisms are not damaged.
f.
If an ETR is not available an area of flat open ground of approximately
100 m x 100 m within a LFTTA is required. A suggested layout of the range
is after the Automatic Fire Assessment time chart. In these circumstances,
RCOs are to hold range qualifications SA(A)(90) or SA(C)(90) in accordance
with Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21).
10-32

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. No time limit.
2. Fire 15 Rounds in bursts of 23 Rounds.
3. Discuss the group, record the POA.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Double Figure 11.

No time limit.
Fire 15 Rounds in bursts of 23 Rounds.
Discuss the group, record the POA.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

nominated position and fire one burst of 2-3 Rounds at the exposure.
4. After each exposure order Apply safety catches, stand up.
10-33
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Double Figure 11.

No time limit.
Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Double Figure 11.

No time limit.
Practice 6.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

nominated position and fire one burst of 2-3 Rounds at each exposure.
Practice 7.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-34

3. The appearance of the target is the signal for the firer to fire one
burst of 23 Rounds from the standing unsupported position, then
adopt the kneeling unsupported position and fire a further burst of 23
Rounds.
Scoring
10115. Practices 3, 6 and 7
1 point per hit.

HPS 60
Pass 33
10-35
Rifle/Carbine/Automatic Fire Assessment 25 Metres

A. RCO Notes
10116. Aim. To confirm that the firer can hold, aim and fire his rifle/carbine correctly
when firing bursts.
10117. Conduct. This shoot may be conducted on an ETR (if approved by Range
Control) or on a LFTTA.
practices.
10119. Stores.
1 x Whistle
1 x Stopwatch
12 x Wooden Stakes
1 x Sledge Hammer
1 x Roll Mine Tape
Chalk (as required)
1 x Double Figure 11 (stick-in) per firer
50 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball Ammunition per firer
1 x Bayonet per firer (if applicable).
a. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blast. A suggested
a long blast.
b. It must be emphasised to the firer that only one burst is to be fired per
exposure in Practices 3 and 4.
c. If the shoot is to be conducted on an ETR the targets are to be
positioned 25m forward of the main firing point providing this is permitted by
range standing orders. This will ensure that the electronic target mechanisms
are not damaged.
d.
e. If the bayonet is to be used as part of LFTT then this shoot is to be fired

with the bayonet attached to the rifle.

Preliminaries
10121. Safety. Normal safety precautions. The RCO is to check the security and
serviceability of bayonets where applicable.
10-36
safety rules applicable (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).
Practice Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Double Figure 11 (stick in)

2. No time limit.
2. Fire 10 Rounds in bursts of 2-3 Rounds.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
25m Kneeling
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. No time limit.
2. Fire 10 Rounds in bursts of 2-3 Rounds.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

3. The start of the exposure is the signal for the firer to fire a burst of 2-3
Rounds at each exposure.
4. Between exposures firers are to adopt the standing alert position.
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
25m Kneeling
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure

10-37

3. The start of the exposure is the signal for the firer to adopt the
kneeling position and fire a burst of 2-3 Rounds at each exposure.
Instructions
Scoring
10124. One point per hit in Practices 3 and 4.
Standards
HPS 30
Pass 21
Time Chart
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
25m
Double Figure 11 (Stick in)
No time limit.
1. Up and Hold
Remarks
25m
No time limit.
1. Up and Hold
25m
UP DOWN
05
10
1. Up and Hold
four times.
25m
UP DOWN
05
10
1. Up and Hold
four times.
Tgt *
Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt Tgt
25 m
- - - - - - - - ** **
Notes:
* Targets are to be spaced at least 5 metres apart.
** White mine tape should be used to mark the main firing points at 25 m and 50 m.
10-38
Individual Battle Shooting Range (IBSR) Defensive Phase

A. RCO Notes
10125. Aim. To practise the firer in engaging targets at differing ranges from alternate
pieces of cover on the IBSR.
10126. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted on the IBSR fixed firing point only.
practices.
10128. Stores.
Normal range stores
a. If firers are unfamiliar with the IBSR, the range layout and procedure is
to be explained. (See Reference A.
b.
Timed exposures will be controlled by the RCOs arm signals or paddle.
c. Each firer will start from the left hand piece of cover in each respective
lane and move tactically to alternate pieces of cover as the shoot progresses.
d.
Firers are to be allowed time to prepare for battle.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
10-39
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
As per the IBSR range furniture
Ammunition
16 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11 or 12
2. 1 x 1 second flash exposure followed by 2 x 4 second exposures at
irregular intervals from each piece of cover.
3. Fig 11 and Fig 12 targets are to be randomly exposed as per the
RCOs instructions.
4. There will be a total of 8 double exposures and the RCO is to
ensure that the exposures are split equally between Fig 11 and Fig 12
targets.
4. Targets are only exposed once firers are in position and the RCO
has signalled for the targets to be raised.
1. Firer is loaded and made ready in the standing alert position; 5 m to
the rear of the left piece of cover.
2. Order Watch Out.
3. On appearance of the flash exposure the firer is to double forward
and take cover.
4. The firer will then receive 2 exposures of a Fig 11 or Fig 12 for 4
seconds each at each piece of cover.
5. The firer is to fire one round at each exposure.
7. After the second exposure the firer is to apply his safety catch and
8. On completion of the last exposure the firer is to apply his safety
catch and await further orders.
Scoring
HPS 16
Pass 10
Time Chart
10134. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain ranges,
this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
Snap
100 m
Figure 12
UP DOWN
05 06
17 22
28 33
1. Fall when hit.

2. Reset watch and await
RCOs signal.
10-40
Rifle/LSW (Bipod Legs Folded) Vehicle Mounted Shoots

A. RCO Notes
10135. Aim. The aim of this is shoot is to teach firers how to fire the Rifle/LSW (bipod
folded). This shoot covers firing at static targets from a moving vehicle when engaged
from either flank.
10136. Conduct. This lesson can be conducted on a LFTTA applying the rules
contained in References A (Pamphlet 21). Either electric, stick in or pull up targets
are required to conduct the shoot. RCOs are to apply either the WDA for flat ground
or rough ground. RCOs must also comply with Range Standing Orders. This shoot is
to be conducted from:
a.
Smooth Track. Tarmac road building up to a maximum speed of 40 kph.
b. Rough Track. Rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or divots
building up to a speed of 25 kph.
c. Rough Ground. Track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and divots
practices.
10139. Stores.
Normal range stores
Stick in Single Fig 11
Stick in Double Fig 11
Stick in Triple Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Single Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Double Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Triple Fig 11
Paste pot & patches
Whistle
Mine Tape
60 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball ammunition
Vehicle
Goggles
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
per firer
As required
1 per firer
10-41
a. Only one firer and one safety supervisor is permitted per vehicle. If
the LSW is to be used the bipod legs must be folded away the weapon is
to be used in the same manner as the rifle. Firing can only take place over
the side of the vehicle providing the target being engaged is within the arcs
allocated for the range. Under no circumstances is firing to be conducted
over the front or the rear or the vehicle (see diagram below for a detailed
explanation).
SUGGESTED LAYOUT OF THE RANGE
B. CONDUCT OF THE LESSON

Preliminaries
safety rules (See Reference A Pamphlet No. 21).
10-42
Weapon Safety Rules

a. Practice are generic and may be conducted on all permissible vehicle
platforms. However, it is the responsibility of the Range Conducting Officers to
ensure additional safety considerations, such as the safe firing angle and prefiring checks, are considered before the start of the activity. The information
contained in the respective UOR Platform Crew Training Course Folder and
training publication is to be adhered to.
b. Rollover and drop down drills and a non firing rehearsal are to be
practiced by all firers no more than 24 hours prior to live firing.
c. Where necessary, external fittings such as antennas and stowage bins
are to be removed prior to live firing.
d. The limits of engagement must be clearly identifiable on the ground. If
no natural features are available, coloured pegs can be used. Firing from a
moving vehicle must only take place providing personnel in the vehicle are
not within the WDA and the fire is kept within the arc.
e.
The LSW is to be zeroed prior to conducting the live firing lesson.
f.
The live firing lesson may be conducted on three different surfaces:

(1)
Smooth track (tarmac road) building up to a maximum of 40 kph.
(2) Rough track (rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or
divots) building up to a maximum of 25 kph.
(3) Rough ground (track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and
g. The appropriate WDA template is to be applied. The SA safety angle
must be increased by adding the appropriate C of F shown in Ref A. The RCO
is to check the condition of the ground on the day of firing.
h. Firing from a moving vehicle platform is only to be conducted when
firers have successfully completed the static vehicle practices. Additionally,
firers are to complete practices on a smooth track before progressing to a
rough track and then on to rough ground.
i.
Safety supervisors are to be positioned in such a way that they can
physically and swiftly intervene. Depending on the vehicle type, this may be
on the vehicle, on the ground, or in a vehicle following close by. Whatever
the circumstances, communications must be maintained between the RCO,
supervisor, vehicle crew, and firer at all times.
10-43
Practice Details
10143. All Practices are to be fired from the standing position with the bipod folded,
practice details are as follows:
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 3 x Single Figure 11.

2. Slow moving (see note)
1. Firers in the standing position (See miscellaneous paragraph).
2. Vehicle is to move along the track at the required speed.
3. Firer to fire 5 Rounds rapid at each target.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
200m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 3 x Double Figure 11.

Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
300m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 3 x Triple Figure 11.

Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
100m
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-44
1. 3 x Figure 11.
3. Firer to fire 1 burst of 2-3 Rounds at each target.
Note: To be conducted from a slow moving vehicle travelling at 10 kph then a fast
moving vehicle travelling at 25 kph.
Scoring
10144. One point per hit on target.
Standards
firing distance and at both speeds. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance
will constitute a fail of the live firing lesson, however, only the practices at the firing
distances where the OMS was not achieved need to be fired again. Firers who fail
Ser
Vehicle
Total
Range
Speed
Rounds
100m
2
3
10 kph
OMS Requirement
Score
HPS
15
No of
Engagements
3
15
200m
15
15
300m
15
15
100m
100m
15
15
200m
15
15
300m
15
15
100m
6
7
8
25 kph
10146. The vehicle is permitted to face any direction and firing may take place from
any side of the vehicle, however, all targets being engaged are to be contained within
the arc of fire for that range.
10147. If the range does not have a track or road for the vehicle to drive along then
you are to mark the route for the vehicle using pegs and mine tape or a suitable
method. This will ensure that drivers move along the same route and will assist with
control to ensure that fire is contained within the arc of fire for that range. RCOs are to
liaise with range control with regards to the vehicle route on the range.
10-45
Rifle Long Range Suppression Preparation and Assessment

A. RCO Notes
10148. Aim. To practice and assess the firer in engaging targets at ranges from
400 600m using snap shooting from the prone position. This LF lesson is to be fired
annually by all DCC Fire Team members whose personal weapon is the Rifle.
10149. Conduct. This lesson may be conducted on an ETR, CGR (if converted to
SARTS), GR or on DCCT.
10150. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 75 minutes to complete the
practices.
10151. Time Chart. A time chart for practices 2, 4 and 6 is included after the practice
details.
10152. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x double figure 11 target at 400, 500 and 600 metres per firer
48 Rounds 5.56mm Ball ammunition per firer

Preliminaries
10155. Revision. Aiming off for wind at long range.
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

3. Fire further Rounds (up to 5) to confirm the POA.
10-46
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
400 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions


Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 4. Snap
Range/Positioning
500 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions


Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

10-47
Practice 6. Snap
Range/Positioning
600 m Prone
Ammunition
6 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Standards
Ser
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
400 m
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
6
500 m
600 m
10-48
Score
Rifle Long Range Suppression Preparation and Assessment

Time Chart
Note. One extra second has been included for target movement. On certain gallery
ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is to be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
400 m
Double Figure 11
500 m
Double Figure 11
600 m
Double Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 1
20 27
35 42
50 57
1.03
1.10
1.17 1.24
UP DOWN
05 12
20 27
35 42
50 57
1.03
1.10
1.17 1.24
UP DOWN
05 12
20 27
35 42
50 57
1.03
1.10
1.17 1.24
Remarks
Fall when hit.
Fall when hit.
Fall when hit.
10-49
Section 2.
Light Machine Gun
10158. Firing At The LNV. Firing at the
LNV is to be conducted prior to TLFTT/
LFTT if the training during these stages
of training the battle shot involve night
shooting and as pre-operational training
for all combat infantrymen serving in a
regular and Reserve battalion. The results
of Firing at the LNV - Assessments are to
be recorded on unit computer systems.
Contents
ENGAGING MOVING TARGETS
MOVING TARGETS AT LONGER RANGES
FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY
FIRING WITH NVD/TI ZEROING
FIRING WITH NVD/TI ASSESSMENT
VEHICLE MOUNTED SHOOTS
STATIC VEHICLE SHOOT
VEHICLE MOUNTED SHOOTS
MOVING VEHICLE SHOOT
10-51
10-53
10-56
10-59
10-61
10-64
10-70
10159. Firing with NVD/TI. NVD/TI Shoots are to be fired prior to TLFTT/LFTT (if
NVD is to be used) and as pre-operational training for all combat infantrymen serving
in a regular and reserve battalion. The results of Firing with NVD/TI - Assessments are
to be recorded on unit computer systems.
Within 12 months prior to any LFTT exercise where the firer would be firing at moving
targets. The results of Firing at Moving Targets - Assessments are to be recorded on
the unit computer systems:
10161. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details of Operational
Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pages of this
10162. Dress. The dress is to include belt order webbing, Combat helmets and Body
Armour, to be worn for all LF lessons. The dress for the firers is to include belt order
webbing, combat helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress
may be altered to reflect the operational role.
10-50
LMG - Engaging Moving Targets

Preparation and Assessment
A. RCO Notes
10163. Aim. To assess the gunner in engaging moving targets on the MMTTR with
the LMG.
10164. Conduct. The practice is to be conducted on an MMTTR if Range Orders
allow. If no MMTTR is available, the shoot may be conducted using DCCT.
practices.
10166. Stores.
Normal range stores.
2 x figure 20 targets (outwards facing) per lane.
Spotting discs (for MMTTR without SARTS)
100 Rounds 5.56mm ball link per firer.
10167. Miscellaneous. If firers are unfamiliar with the MMTTR, the range layout and
procedure is to be explained. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No.21)).

Preliminaries
10170. Revision. Revise the methods and techniques of engaging crossing targets.
Practice Details
10-51

Range/Positioning
50 m Prone
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
2. 10 x exposures in the following order:
5 x slow.
5 x fast.
2. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 Rounds at each of the exposures.
3. The MPI of each burst is to be indicated using the SARTS tablet or
with a spotting disc.
4. Discuss the practice.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
50 m Prone
Ammunition
50 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 Rounds at each exposure.
Scoring
10172. (Practice 2 only) 1 point per successful engagement.
Standards
HPS 10
Pass 6 (60%)
10-52
Moving Targets at Longer Ranges

A. RCO Notes
10174. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted using DCCT ONLY.
practices on DCCT.
10176. Stores. Complete DCCT equipment.
(see Infantry Training, Volume II, Skill at Arms, The 5.56mm Light Machine
Gun (LMG).

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50.
Target/ Exposure
WALKING
Instructions
As above.
10-53

Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50.
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
Instructions
As above.

Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rds or a belt of 50
Target/ Exposure
WALKING
Instructions
As above.

Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
Instructions
As above.
Practice 5. Identify and apply points of aim for a moving target. Incorporating fresh wind.
Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
WALKING
Instructions
As above.
Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
Instructions
As above.
10-54
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
WALKING
Instructions
As above.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
RUNNING
Instructions
As above.
10-55
Firing at the Limit of Night Visibility LMG Instructional Shoot

and Assessment
A. RCO Notes
10181. Aim. To practise and assess the firers in target engagement at the LNV.
10182. Conduct. The lesson is normally fired on an ETR (with SARTS), but may be
fired on a GR or CGR where Range Orders allow.
practices.
10185. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Fig 11 per firer at LNV
90 x 5.56 mm Rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) per firer.
a. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggested
a long blast.
b. The LNV is to be established using the sight to be used for the firing
practice (see Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No 21)).

Preliminaries
obstructions).
10189. Use of Tracer. Check range orders for limitations on use of tracer.
Practice Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions
1. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 Rounds.

10-56
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
1. Firer in the nominated position
Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
3. Fire one burst of 3-5 Rounds at each exposure.
10-57
Scoring
10191. The sighting practice is not scored.
Practices 2 and 4
1 point per hit.
Practices 3 and 5
5 points per effective engagement.

10192. Instructional Practices 4 and 5.
HPS 40
Pass 28
Time Chart
10-58
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
LNV Figure 11
No time limit
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
4
5
LNV Figure 11
LNV Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 1:06
UP DOWN
05 12
16 23
28 35
41 48
As for Practice 2
UP DOWN
05 11
14 20
25 31
36 42
Fall when hit.
Up and hold.
Fall when hit.
Firing with NVD/TI LMG Zeroing (Daylight Shoot)

A. RCO Notes
10194. Aim. To superimpose the firers Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on the Correct
Zero Position (CZP) using NVD and TI sights.
practices.
10197. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x 1.220 m screens with Fig 11 per firer each with a 75 mm x 100 mm white/
thermal patch positioned with the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of
the figure SARTS converted range
1 x Fig 12d per firer
25 x 5.56 mm Rounds (ball link or 4B/1T) per firer
a. This shoot should take place in daylight immediately before the night
practices in LMG Assessment. Check Range Orders for details of live firing
timings.
b. Firers are to achieve a burst group size of 675 mm with 20 Rounds in
Practice 1 before sights are adjusted.
c. In Practice 2 the sight is correctly zeroed if the distance from the CZP
to the MPI is within 50 mm.
d. Only the Gunner is to make adjustments to the sight. Once the zero has
been confirmed the other fire team members are then to fire and record any
requirement to aim off. This aim off distance must be recorded and confirmed
by firing.

Preliminaries
obstructions).
10-59
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d
1. Fire 20 Rounds in bursts of 3-5 at the same aiming mark. Stand up
after every second burst.

Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Figure 12d
1. Fire a five round burst to determine MPI.
2. If the correct zero is not achieved, repeat Practice 1 using the group
plus a further 15 Rounds.

10202. A five round burst group size of 450 mm in Practice 2.
10-60
Firing With NVD/TI LMG Assessment

A. RCO Notes
10203. Aim. To practice the firers in target engagement with NVD and TI sights at
night.
practices.
10207. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Fig 11 per firers at 100 m (right coffin on CGR)
1 x Double Fig 11 per firer at 200 m (left coffin on CGR) SARTS Fig 11 Target
65 x 5.56 mm Rounds (ball link 4B/1T) per firer
a. Due to tunnel vision at night, the RCO should ensure that targets are
identified to firers before firing at each range.
b. The RCO must be able to control practices. The use of a personal NVD
is recommended.

Preliminaries
obstructions).
Practice Details
10-61
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11
Instructions

Practice 2. Timed
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 11.
3. Fire 20 rounds in burst of 3-5 Rounds.
Practice 3. Timed
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
35 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

minutes.
Scoring
10212. One point per hit in Practices 2 and 3.
Standard
HPS 55
Pass 27
10-62
TIME CHART
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
100 m
Figure 11
100 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 51
Up and hold.
200 m
Double Figure 11
Up Down
05 09
25 29
51 55
1:10 1:14
1:19 1:23
1:42 1:46
1:56 2:00
Up and hold.
No time limit
Remarks
Up and hold.
10-63
LMG Vehicle Mounted Shoots Static Vehicle Shoot

A. RCO Notes
10214. Aim. The aim of this is shoot is to teach firers how to fire the LMG at static
targets from a static vehicle.
contained in Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21) (See Miscellaneous paragraph). Either
electric, stick in or pull up targets are required to conduct the shoot. RCOs may use
a fixed target line or a fixed firing point this will depend on the ground available and
Range Standing Orders.
practices.
10218. Stores.
Normal range stores
Single Fig 11 on a screen
Double Fig 11 on a screen
Triple Fig 11 on a screen
Stick in Fig 11
Electric Targets Single, Double & Triple Fig 11s
Pull up Single, Double & Triple Fig 11s
Paste pot & patches
Whistle
Mine Tape
100 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball/4B1T
Vehicle
Goggles
As required
As required
As required.
As required
As required
As required
As required
As Required
Per firer
As required
1 per firer
10219. Vehicles. This practice can be conducted from all permissible vehicle
platforms. Firing is not permitted over the front or the rear of the vehicle. RCOs are
to ensure that they read and understand the rules contained in Reference A prior to
conducting this shoot.
a. Only one firer and one safety supervisor is permitted per vehicle. Below
is a diagram of a suggest layout of the range.
b. RCOs are to liaise with Range Control over the most suitable range on
which to achieve the aim of the lesson.
10-64

Preliminaries
Practice Details
10223. All Practices are to be fired from the standing position with the bipod of the
gun on the roof of the vehicle, practice details are as follows:
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m (Static)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 on a screen.
Instructions

2. Firer to fire 10 Rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds.
4. MPI of all the bursts to be identified and recorded.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
100m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
100m (Static)
Ammunition
30 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 11.
2. 2 x 30 second exposure (one exposure of each target).
10-65
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
200m (Static)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Double Figure 11 on a screen.
Instructions

Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
200m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

3. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure.
Practice 6.
Range/Positioning
200m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. 1 x 60 second exposure (Both targets to be shown simultaneously).
3. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds at each exposure.
Practice 7.
Range/Positioning
300m (Static)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Triple Figure 11 on a screen.
Instructions

10-66
Practice 8.
Range/Positioning
300m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

3. Fire 1 burst of 3-5 rounds at each exposure.
Practice 9.
Range/Positioning
300m (Static)
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

2. 1 x 60 second exposure (Both targets to be shown simultaneously).
3. Fire 10 rounds in bursts of 3-5 rounds at each exposure.
Scoring
10224. Practices 1, 4 and 7 are not scored.
10225. Practices 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 and 9 1 Point per hit on the figure targets
Standards
firing distance in practices 2, 3, 5, 6, 8 and 9. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing
distance will constitute a fail of the live firing lesson, however, only the practices at the
firing distances where the OMS was not achieved needs to be fired again. Firers who
fail are to undergo further practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before
re-testing.
Ser
Range
Total
Rounds
100m
2
3
OMS Requirement
No of
Engagements
Score
HPS
40
28
40
200m
40
28
40
300m
40
28
40

10-67
Time Chart
10227. One extra second has been included for target movement if using electric
targets. If using stick in targets then a whistle is to be used to control the exposures.
A test of the target mechanism should be conducted to ensure that one second is
sufficient time to allow for the movement of the target.
Practice
Range/ Target
Timings
100m
Figure 11 on
screen
100m Figure 11
Up Down
05 51
100m Figure 11
Up Down
Tgt 1
05
Tgt 2
41
200m Double
Figure 11 on
screen
200m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 12
20 27
30 37
40 47
200m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
Tgt 1&2 05
300 Triple Figure

11 on screen
300m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
05 12
21 27
30 37
40 47
300m Double
Figure 11
Up Down
Tgt 1&2 05
10-68
Remarks
No time limit
1. Up and hold.
2. MPI of the 10 Rounds to be
identified (up to 3 burst)
Up and hold.
36
1:02
No time limit
Up and hold.
1. Up and hold.
Up and hold.
1:06
No time limit.
Up and hold.
1. Up and hold.
Up and hold.
1:06
Up and hold.
Suggested Layout of the Range

10228. Below are two examples of the range layout, the first example is for a LFTTA
where the target line is fixed. The second example is for a fixed firing position with
targets that range from 100 m - 300 m. RCOs are to liaise with Range Control to
ensure that Range Standing Orders permitted this type of exercise.
10229. The illustration below is a suggested layout for the range, depending on the
size of the range you may be able to have more than one vehicle on the point.
10-69
LMG Vehicle Mounted Shoots Flank Contacts in a Moving

Vehicle Shoot
A. RCO Notes
10230. Aim. The aim of this is shoot is to teach firers how to fire the LMG. This shoot
covers firing at static targets from a moving vehicle when engaged from either flank.
contained in Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21). Either electric, stick in or pull up targets
are required to conduct the shoot. RCOs are to apply either the template for flat
ground or rough ground. RCOs must also comply with Range Standing Orders. The
shoot is to be conducted twice, from;
a.
Smooth Track. Tarmac road building up to a maximum speed of 40 kph.
b. Rough Track. Rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or divots
c. Rough Ground. Track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and divots
practices.
10234. Stores.
Normal range stores
Stick in Single Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Single Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Double Fig 11
Electric Targets/Pull up Triple Fig 11
Paste pot & patches
Whistle
Mine Tape
90 x 5.56 mm Rounds Ball/4 B1t Belted
Red and white poles
Vehicle
Goggles
10-70
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As required
As Required
Per firer
As required
As required
1 per firer
10235. Miscellaneous. Only one firer and one safety supervisor is permitted per
vehicle.
a. Red and white poles need to be positioned at the extremities of the
triangulation limits, this is essential to ensure that all fire remains within the
arcs of fire allocated for the range.
b. Below is a diagram of the suggested layout of the range, the layout will
vary depending on the range complex, however, the ranges to and the target
exposures in the table that follows are to be adhered to.
Suggested Layout of the Range

Preliminaries
10-71
Weapon Safety Rules

a. Practice are generic and may be conducted on all permissible vehicle
platforms. However, it is the responsibility of the Range Conducting Officers to
ensure additional safety considerations, such as the safe firing angle and prefiring checks, are considered before the start of the activity. The information
contained in the respective UOR Platform Crew Training Course Folder and
training publication is to be adhered to.
b. Rollover and drop down drills and a non firing rehearsal are to be
practiced by all firers no more than 24 hours prior to live firing.
c. Where necessary, external fittings such as antennas and stowage bins
are to be removed prior to live firing.
d. The limits of engagement must be clearly identifiable on the ground. If
no natural features are available, coloured pegs can be used. Firing from a
moving vehicle must only take place providing personnel in the vehicle are
not within the WDA and the fire is kept within the arc.
e.
The LMG is to be zeroed prior to conducting the live firing lesson.
f.
The live firing lesson may be conducted on three different surfaces:

(1)
Smooth track (tarmac road) building up to a maximum of 40 kph.
(2) Rough track (rough surface but without chamfers, pot holes or
(3) Rough ground (track or ground with chamfers, pot holes and
g. The appropriate WDA template is to be applied. The SA safety angle
must be increased by adding the appropriate C of F shown in Ref A. The RCO
is to check the condition of the ground on the day of firing.
h. Firing from a moving vehicle platform is only to be conducted when
firers have successfully completed the static vehicle practices. Additionally,
firers are to complete practices on a smooth track before progressing to a
rough track and then on to rough ground.
i.
Safety supervisors are to be positioned in such a way that they can
physically and swiftly intervene. Depending on the vehicle type, this may be
on the vehicle, on the ground, or in a vehicle following close by. Whatever
the circumstances, communications must be maintained between the RCO,
supervisor, vehicle crew, and firer at all times.
10-72
Practice Details
10238. All Practices are to be fired from the standing position with the bipod down
resting on the cab of the vehicle, practice details are as follows:
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 3 x Single Figure 11.

3. Firer to fire 1 burst of 3-5 rounds at each target.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
200m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
300m
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Note: The shoot is to be conducted from a slow moving vehicle travelling at 10 kph,
after the firer has been debriefed it is then to be conducted from a fast moving vehicle
travelling at 25 kph.
Scoring
10239. One point per hit on target.
10-73
Standards
firing distance and at both speeds. Failure to achieve the OMS at any firing distance
will constitute a fail of the live firing lesson, however, only the practices at the firing
distances where the OMS was not achieved needs to be fired again. Firers who fail
Range
Total
Rounds
100m
15
OMS Requirement
No of
Engagements
3
200m
15
300m
15
100m
15
200m
300m
Ser
1
2
5
6
Vehicle
Speed
10 kph
25 kph
Score
HPS
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
10241. A number of methods are available for the collation of scores, if using
electronic targets then the score can be retrieved from the target box, another method
is to glue paper figure 11 targets to the rear of the target.
10242. The vehicle is permitted to face any direction and firing may take place from
any side of the vehicle, however, all targets being engaged are to be contained within
the arc of fire for that range.
10243. If the range does not have a track or road for the vehicle to drive along then
you are to mark the route for the vehicle using pegs and mine tape or a suitable
method. This will ensure that drivers move along the same route and will assist with
control to ensure that fire is contained within the arc of fire for that range. RCOs are to
liaise with range control with regards vehicle on the range.
10-74
Section 3
Sharpshooter Rifle L129A1
10244. Firing At The LNV. Firing at the
LNV is to be conducted prior to TLFTT/
LFTT if the training during these stages
of training the battle shot involve night
shooting and as pre-operational training
for all combat infantrymen serving
in a regular and Reserve battalion.
The results of Firing at the LNV Assessments are to be recorded on unit
computer systems.
Contents
ADVANCED APPLICATION OF FIRE
700 800 METRES
FIRING AT MOVING TARGETS ASSESSMENT
FIRING AT THE LIMIT OF NIGHT VISIBILITY
FIRING WITH MUNS ASSESSMENT
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA
INTRODUCTORY SHOOT AT 25 METRES
FIRING WITH HMNVS AND LA ASSESSMENT
10-76
10-79
10-82
10-86
10-89
10-91
10-93
10245. Firing with NVD/TI. NVD/TI Shoots are to be fired prior to TLFTT/LFTT (if
NVD is to be used) and as pre-operational training for all combat infantrymen serving
in a regular and reserve battalion. The results of Firing with NVD/TI - Assessments are
Within 12 months prior to any LFTT exercise where the firer would be firing at moving
targets. The results of Firing at Moving Targets - Assessments are to be recorded on
the unit computer systems.
10247. Operational Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots. The details of Opera
tional Shooting Skills and TLFTT Shoots are contained in the remaining pages of this
10248. Dress. The dress is to include belt order webbing, Combat helmets and Body
Armour, to be worn for all LF lessons. The dress for the firers is to include belt order
webbing, combat helmets and body armour for all LF lessons. Once completed dress
may be altered to reflect the operational role.
10-75
Advanced Application of Fire

700 800 Metres
A. RCO Notes
prone position.
10250. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a LFTTA or CGR which allows
firing up to 800 metres.
practices.
10253. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Triple Figure 11 per firer or
Portable SARTS Figure 11 with triple Figure 11 image on monitor per firer (if
available).

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-76

Figure 12d.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
700 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
800 m Prone
Ammunition
15 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Scoring
Standard
Prac
Range
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
HPS
700 m
15
12
15
800 m
15
12
15
10-77
Time Chart
gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is
to be allowed.
10-78
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
700 m Triple
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05
16
26
37
47
58
1:08
1:19
1:29
1:40
800 m Triple
Figure 11
As for Practice 2.
Remarks
Up and Hold
Up and Hold
Firing at Moving Targets Assessment

A. RCO Notes
10260. Aim. To practise and assess the firer using the methods of engaging crossing
targets on the MMTT.
10261. Conduct. The shoot is to be conducted on an MMTTR.
practices.
10263. Stores.
Normal range stores
10264. Miscellaneous. If firers are unfamiliar with the MMTTR, the range layout and
procedure is to be explained. (See Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21)).

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice - Sighters
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Figure 20.
2. 8 x exposures in the following order:
2 x slow,
2 x fast,
2 x slow,
2 x fast.
1. Firer in the standing unsupported position.
2. Fire 1 round at each of the first 4 exposures then adopt the
kneeling unsupported position and fire 1 round at each of the
remaining exposures.
3. Each shot hole is to be indicated by a spotting disc.
4. Discuss the shoot.
10-79
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2 x Figure 20.
6 x exposures (3 x slow and 3 x fast) in random order.
Record the scores.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Figure 20.
2. 6 x exposures at the slow speed.
nominated position and fire 2 rounds at each exposure.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2 x Figure 20.
Record the scores.
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-80
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2 x Figure 20.
Record the scores.
Scoring
Standard
HPS 48
Pass 38
10-81
Firing at the Limit of Night Visibility (LNV) Instructional Shoot

and Assessment
A. RCO Notes
10269. Aim. To practise and assess the methods of engaging targets at the limit of
night visibility (LNV).
10270. Conduct. The lesson can be conducted on an ETR, CGR or GR.
practices. It may be necessary during Phase 1 training to allocate 1 x 40 minute period by day for rehearsals.
10273. Stores.
Normal range stores (including):
Red Lamps as required by local range regulations
1 x torch fitted with red filter per coach
1 x whistle
1 x Figure 11 stick-in target (draped) per firer (SARTS Figure 11 if using an
ETR with SARTS)
a. Before being trained to shoot at night, the firer must be taught the night
vision lessons from Infantry Training, Volume 1, Pamphlet No. 2, Fieldcraft,
Battle Lessons and Exercises. The LNV is to be established using the sight
to be used for the firing practice (see Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet
No. 21)), however the maximum range at which the shoots are to take place
is 100 metres.
b. Where necessary, the instructional phase of this lesson should be
taught or revised on the range while waiting for the correct light level. Range
discipline and night range procedures should then be explained and walked
through before firing begins.
c. Timed exposures are to be controlled by whistle blasts. A suggested
a long blast.
10-82

Preliminaries
10277. Establishing LNV. Using the most applicable method to suit the range
establish LNV. (See Chapter 4 of Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
Night Shooting
10278. Red Dot CQB Sight. Explain and demonstrate by day:
a.
Observe the target with both eyes open.
b. Correctly position the butt in the shoulder and the cheek on the cheek
piece with the rifle angled down below the target.
c. Whilst initially observing the target with both eyes and looking over
the top of the rear sight, start to raise the weapon until the light source is
observed in the bottom of the field of view.
d. Continue to raise the weapon until the light source appears just below
the POA and the sight aperture is presented in front of the right eye.
e.
As soon as the light source is on the POA, operate the trigger.
10279. ACOG. Explain and demonstrate by day:

a. Look through the sight and adjust the brightness until the tip of the
chevron is adequately illuminated.
b.
Hold, aim and fire as for daylight shooting.
10280. Confirmation. Confirm by practice.

Practice Details
10-83
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 11 stick-in (draped).
Instructions

2. Fire five rounds.
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

seconds.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

seconds.
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
LNV Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-84

3. At the start of the exposure the firer is to adopt the prone position
and fire five rounds rapid at the exposure.
Standards
10282. Instructional Practices 2, 3 and 4.
HPS 15
Pass 11
10283. Assessment Practices 5 and 6. To achieve the required standard the firer
must achieve the OMS (see table below). Firers who fail are to undergo further
practice, with coaching for the areas of weakness, before re-testing.
Ser
Range
Total
Rounds
LNV
10
OMS Requirement
Score
7
HPS
10
Time Chart
gallery ranges, this will be insufficient, and additional time for target movement is
to be allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 21
Up and hold.
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 10
15 20
26 31
37 42
48 53
Up and hold.
(ETR only targets fall
when hit)
LNV Figure 11
stick-in (draped)
UP DOWN
05 18
Up and hold.
No time limit
UP DOWN
05 11
19 25
30 36
45 51
58 1:04
As for Practice 2
Remarks
Up and hold.
Up and hold.
when hit)
Up and hold.
when hit)
10-85
Firing With MUNS Night Sight Assessment

A. RCO Notes
10285. Aim. To practise and assess firers in engaging an enemy at night with the
MUNS night sight fitted to the rifle.
10286. Conduct. The lesson may be conducted on an ETR (with or without SARTS),
CGR or a Gallery Range.
practices.
10288. Stores.
Red lamps as required by local range regulations
1 x torch per coach fitted with red filter
1 x Figure 11 per firer at 100, 200 and 300 metres
CGR Left Coffin Figure 11
40 Rounds 7.62 mm Ball ammunition per firer.
a. Due to tunnel vision at night, range conducting officers should ensure
that targets are identified to firers before firing at each range.
b.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Snap
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-86
1. 1 x Figure 11.
Practice 2. Rapid
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
3. Fire 10 rounds rapid.
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
200 m Sitting
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1 x Figure 11.
1 x 20 second exposure.
Fire 10 rounds rapid at the exposure.
Record the scores.
Range/Positioning
300 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 1 x Figure 11.
10-87
Scoring
Standards
HPS 40
Pass 28
Time Chart
allowed.
10-88
Practice
Range/Target
Timings
Remarks
100 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 11
18 24
28 34
39 45
50 56
Fall when hit.
100 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and hold.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
43 50
55 1:02
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 26
Up and hold.
300 m
Figure 11
UP DOWN
05 12
19 26
30 37
43 50
55 1:02
1:08 1:15
1:20 1:27
1:31 1:38
1:43 1:50
1:55 2:02
Fall when hit.
Firing With HMNVS and LA Introductory Shoot at 25 Metres

A. RCO Notes
10295. Aim. To confirm that the firer can aim, hold and fire the rifle using HMNVS
and LA from the sitting, kneeling, standing and patrol position.
10296. Firing Requirement. The Introductory Shoot is only fired during initial
training.
practices.
10299. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x witness screen with 4 x 25 mm square (black) aiming marks per firer
Bore sighting Chart
10300. Miscellaneous. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of
an assistant, onto the CZP using the Bore sight Chart before Practice 1.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
Practice 1. Grouping (Fired twice first with red dot, the with IR laser)
Range/Positioning
25 m Sitting, Kneeling and Standing Positions
Ammunition
2 x 15 round magazines
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fire a five round group from prone, kneeling and standing positions.
3. Repeat the practice using IR laser.
10-89

10304. The group sizes that should be achieved are:
Sitting
75 mm
Kneeling
80 mm
Standing
140 mm
10-90
Firing with HMNVS and LA Grouping and Laser Aimer

Alignment at 100 Metres
A. RCO Notes
10305. Aim. To superimpose the firers Mean Point of Impact (MPI) on to the Correct
Zero Position (CZP) for the HMNVS, LA and host weapon.
10306. Conduct. The lesson is to be conducted on either a CGR (with or without
practices.
10308. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x 1.220 m screen with Fig 12 per firer (1 x 1.220 m screen per firer on an
the bottom centre of the patch on the centre of the Fig 11 target at 100 metres
a. Firers personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight zeroed prior to this
practice.
c.
The HMNVS and LA CZP is the same as the host weapon.
d. In Practice 1, the weapon is correctly zeroed if the distance from the

CZP to the MPI is 30mm or less (PV).
e.
All practices should be fired at night.

Preliminaries
10-91
Practice Details
Practice 1. Check groups
Range/Positioning
100 m Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Figure 12 on a 1.220 m screen
Instructions
1. Switch on red dot laser.

2. Fire one group of five Rounds.
3. Identify the MPI and adjust red dot laser for zero if necessary.
5. Switch on HMNVS, place in operating position and focus at 100
metres.
6. Switch on IR laser.
7. Fire one group of five.
8. Identify the MPI and adjust LA for zero if necessary.
Practice 2. Register POA

Range/Positioning
100 m Kneeling and Standing Alert Positions
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
As for Practice 1
Instructions
Fire a five round group in each firing position with each laser to
determine POA.

10313. The group sizes that should be achieved in Practices 1 and 2 are:
Prone - 200mm
Kneeling - 225mm
Standing - 450mm
10-92
Firing with HMNVS and LA Assessment

A. RCO Notes
10314. Aim. To practice and assess the firer in engaging targets using NVS and LA
from the sitting, kneeling and standing positions.
10315. Conduct. The assessment is to be conducted on a CGR (with or without
SARTS), an ETR (with or without SARTS) or a GR.
practices once.
10317. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Fig 11 per firer at 200m
a.
All practices must be fired at night using the IR Laser.
b. Firers personal weapons are to be optic/iron sight zeroed prior to this

practice.
c. Firers are to adjust both IR and red dot lasers, with the aid of an
d.

Preliminaries
Practice Details
10-93

Range/Positioning
100 m Standing and Kneeling Positions
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
2. 2 x 20 second exposures with an interval to allow firers to adopt the
standing alert position.
1. Firer in the Standing Alert position with the HMNVS and LA On and
3. On the appearance of the target the firer is to fire one round from
the standing position then adopt the kneeling position and fire a further
four rounds at the exposure.
4. Firers must adopt the Standing Alert position between exposures.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 2. Snap
Range/Positioning
100 m Standing Alert
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 12.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Snap
Range/Positioning
200 m Sitting
Ammunition
5 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Rapid
Range/Positioning
200 m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1. Figure 11.
3. Fire two rounds at each exposure.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-94
Scoring
10322. Scores are to be recorded and announced on conclusion of each practice.
Practices 1 to 4 One point per hi
Standard
HPS 30
Pass 18
Time Chart
allowed.
Practice
Range/Target
100 m
Figure 12
Up Down
05 26
Timings

once.
2. Up and hold.
Remarks
100 m
Figure 12
Up Down
05 12
18 25
29 36
41 48
51 58
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 14
19 28
32 41
45 54
1:01 1:10
Fall when hit.
200 m
Figure 11
Up Down
05 18
24 37
42 55
1:02 1:15
1:19 1:32
1. Fall when hit.

2. Score one point for
each exposure hit.
10-95
Section 4
Close Quarter Marksmanship - Rifle/Pistol
10324. Close Quarter Marksmanship.
CQM shoots are mandatory for firers
employed in the DCC Role. The results are
Contents
CQM - THE TRANSITION
CQM - FIRING WHILST PIVOTING
OR TURNING
CQM - FIRING WHILST CLOSING
CQM - MOVING TARGET
10-98
10-103
10-105
10-107
10325. Dress. The dress for the firers

is to include belt order webbing, combat
Pistols with an appropriate holster
Rifle with Picatinny Rail System and Down Grips
ACOG Lightweight Day Sight
Magazines
Cleaning Kits
Combat Helmets
Body Armour
Coaching Aide Memoire (AF B 71158)
First Aid Kit and Stretcher
Stopwatches
10327. Coaching. Chapter 2 contains full details of coaching requirements. Some
essential points are to ensure that:
coaches, the Master Coach system should be used.
c. All POAs should be recorded on the firers personal shooting record
card.
d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during practices to avoid
e. Shot cadence or tempo can be judged in the following manner, for half
10-96
f.
CQM LFMT 5 Pistol can be carried out as a single action. double action
or press drill practice to cover all the nuances of the weapon.
g. From CQM LFMT 6 onwards the firer should be encouraged to wear
their primary weapon and carry out a dry transition. This will not only practice
the firer in a realistic situation but reinforce the fact that the pistol is a
secondary weapon system and only used in an emergency.
h. The accuracy of the rifle and pistol differs and the scoring areas on the
target reflect this(See fig 10-1a).
10-97
Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM (Rifle and Pistol)

The Transition
A. RCO Notes
10329. Aim. To teach the firer how to quickly employ his secondary weapon system
in the event of a stoppage with his primary weapon in close quarters.
practices.
10332. Stores
Normal range stores
1 x Fig 11/21 CQM target per firer
1 x Fig 28 per firer (Practice 1)
16 Rounds 5.56mm Ball and 16 Rounds 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer
Preliminaries

10334. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary. An anti back
splash curtain is required for CQM practices closer than 10m on a 25m Barrack Range.
a. Explain and demonstrate as necessary the range safety rules. (See
Reference A (Pamphlet No. 21))
b. Firers must have been formally taught, practiced and deemed
competent in the technique of engaging from the left side of the body.
The RCO is to confirm this before firing from the left side of the body
is permitted.
c. Firing from the left side must only be conducted using the CQB red
dot sight. Under no circumstances should left sided firing be attempted
using any other sight.
d. Firers are to be reminded to take great care when firing from the
left side of the body and to keep the head away from the movement of
the cocking handle in order to prevent serious injury.
e. When firing from the left hand side of the body the firers must
keep their hands in the conventional position and the weapon should
be tilted to the right to reduce the risk of the firer being struck by ejected
cases.
10-98
10335. Firing Practice. Explain to firers that shot accountability is an essential part
of CQM and that when carrying both a rifle and a pistol, the pistol will be immediately
employed in the event of a stoppage at 15 metres and under.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Shot Accountability
Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 28
4 x 4 second Exposures
1. Firer is to be in the CQB stance on the command stating a shape,
colour or position eg blue square fire 2 Rounds.
2. Firer is to make up shots for any that fall outside of the area or dot.
4. Repeat four times
5. Record scores
Practice 2. Shot Accountability

Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 28
1. Firer is to be in the CQB stance on the command stating two
shapes,colours or positions eg blue square and top dot fire 2 Rounds
at each.
2. Firer is to make up shots for any that fall outside of the area or dot.
4. Repeat practice.
5. Record scores
Practice 3. Left Shoulder Firing

Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11/21
2. Fire two shots at the body and two at the head in each engagement.
3. Discuss the fall of shot.
4. Repeat the practice
10-99
Practice 1. Static Transition from Rifle to Pistol

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
15 m Standing
2 x 5.56mm Rounds
4 x 9mm Rounds
1. Fig 11/21.
1. Firer in the Standing CQB Position.
2. Once the target is exposed and on attempting to fire the second
round, the firer identifies that he has a stoppage.
3. Transit to the pistol and engage with two Rounds.
4. Carry out the empty magazine stoppage drill between exposures.
6. Record scores.
Practice 2. Static Transition from Rifle to Pistol during a Failure to Stop

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10 m Standing
6 x 5.56mm Rounds
4 x 9mm Rounds
1. Fig 11/21.
2. On the appearance of the target, the firer will carry out a fail to stop
engagement until identifying that he has a stoppage.
3. Transit to the pistol and engage with two rounds to the head.
4. Carry out a magazine empty stoppage drill between exposures.
6. Record scores.
Practice 3. Static Transition from Rifle to Pistol during a Failure to Stop

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-100
5 m Standing
6 x 5.56mm Rounds
4 x 9mm Rounds
1. Fig 11/21.
As per Practice 2.
Practice 4. Static Transition from Rifle in the Standing to Pistol in the Kneeling
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
3 metres Standing and Kneeling

2 x 5.56mm Rounds
4 x 9mm Rounds
1. Fig 11/21.
2. On the appearance of the target, the firer engages with two Rounds
and on attempting the fire the second identifies a stoppage.
3. Dropping to the Kneeling position while transiting to the pistol and
engage with two Rounds at the lower aiming mark only.
4. Carry out a magazine empty stoppage
drill between exposures.
6. Record scores.
Scoring
10337. For the rifle Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within
the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. For the pistol Two
points per hit within the inner and outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else
on the target.
Practice 1&2 HPS 16 Pass - 11
Practice 3 familiarisation only
Practice 4-7 HPS - 64 Pass 45
10-101
Fig 10-1a Figure 21 CQM Target
Fig 10-1c Figure 22 CQM Target
10-102
Fig 10-1b Figure 11 CQM Target
Fig 10-1d Figure 28 CQM Target
Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM (Rifle and/or Pistol)

Firing Whilst Turning or Pivoting
A. RCO Notes
10338. Aim. To train firers to rapidly acquire and engage threats located at a wide
angle from the direction of orientation.
practices
10341. Stores.
Normal range stores
32 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball or 9 mm Ball ammunition per firer

Preliminaries
10343. Range Safety Rules. Explain and demonstrate as necessary. Firers must
have sufficient space between each other to avoid interference should two firers pivot
in opposite directions to each other.
10344. Firing Practice. Explain to firers that during urban operations threats may
appear at very close distances from unexpected directions, or the firer may have to
pivot to engage an enemy from differing directions.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Static 90 degree pivots to the LEFT
Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
2. 5 x 4 second exposures
1. Ensuring that safety catches are applied and muzzles are pointed in
a safe direction, face to the RIGHT.
2. If pistols are used, then each exposure must begin with weapons
de- cocked and holstered.
3. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the LEFT and
engage with two Rounds.
4. Repeat four times.
10-103
Practice 2. Static 90 degree pivots to the RIGHT

Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
a safe direction, face to the LEFT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the RIGHT and
engage with two Rounds.
3. Repeat four times.
Practice 3. Static 180 degree pivots to the LEFT and RIGHT

Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
12 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
a safe direction the firer starts facing away from the target.
2. On the command LEFT or RIGHT Threat, pivot in the given
direction and engage with two Rounds.
3. When pivoting to the left, the firers will engage the target on the left;
from the right, the target on the right.
4. Repeat five times, alternating left and right.
5. Discuss results and record scores.
Scoring
10346. TLFTT3109. For the rifle Two points per hit within the inner scoring area.
One point within the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. For
the pistol Two points per hit within the inner and outer scoring area. One point per hit
anywhere else on the target.
HPS 64
Pass 44
10-104
Close Quarter Marksmanship CQM (Rifle and/or Pistol)

Firing Whilst Closing
A. RCO Notes
10347. Aim. To practice the firer in using Rifle and/or Pistol engaging the enemy
whilst closing with him.
practices.
10350. Stores.
Normal Range stores
54 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball or 9mm Ball ammunition per firer

Preliminaries
10353. Firing Practice. Whilst moving, threats may appear at very close distances
and the firer may not be able to cease movement to engage for a number of tactical
reasons. In order to keep or regain the initiative, the firer must be able to fire effectively
whilst closing with the enemy.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Shooting whilst closing
Range/Positioning
15 to 3m Standing Firing whilst closing
Ammunition
18 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point.
2. On command or appearance of the target, fire six shots whilst
closing.
3. Repeat the practice twice. Record the scores.
10-105
Practice 2. Pivoting to the Left and closing

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 25m point facing
RIGHT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the Left, fire six
shots whilst closing.
3. Repeat the practice. Record the scores.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 3. Pivoting to the Right and closing

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
LEFT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the Right, fire six
shots whilst closing.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Practice 4. Pivoting 180 degrees to the Left and Right and closing
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
12 Rounds
1. 2 x Fig 21/11.
REARWARDS.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot 180 degrees to the
Left/Right as ordered, fire six shots whilst closing.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Scoring
10355. Two points per hit in the CQM scoring area and one point per hit anywhere
else on the target
HPS
108
Pass 75
10-106
Moving Target
Close Quarter Marksmanship
Identifying Lead With Personal Weapons
A. RCO Notes
10356. Aim. To identify lead when engaging moving targets at close quarters.
10357. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a suitable training area using
Marker Round Training System (MRTS) using correctly protected demonstration
troops as enemy. Alternatively the lesson can be conducted on the DCCT.
practices.
10359. Stores. Normal range stores.
2 x Figure 20 Target.
MRTS conversion kits per weapon
112 Rounds 5.56 mm or 9 mm MRTS ammunition per firer.

Preliminaries
10360. Safety. Demonstration troops must equipped with the PPE required for force
on force training. It is recommended that demonstration troops wear coveralls to avoid
damage to their PCS.
10361. Firing Practice. Explain that establishing lead at close quarters will allow a
soldier to increase his chance of bringing effective fire onto his target with his initial
shots. Soldiers should combine their CQM elevation POA (from static engagements)
with lead.
Practice Details
10-107
Practice 1. Identify and apply lead

Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m. Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
48 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
AT EACH RANGE.
SLOW
3 x left and 3 x right runs of the enemy.
Followed by
FAST
3 x left and 3 x right runs of the enemy.
1. At each exposure fire 1 round.
2. During the shoot discuss (or firers identify) the fall of shot in relation
to the POA and the centre of the target.
3. Record lead at each range.
Practice 2. Confirmation and application of lead

Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m. Standing CQB Position
Ammunition
64 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
SLOW / FAST
4 x left and 4 x right runs of the enemy. At each range 50% fast 50%
slow in random order.
1. At each exposure fire 2 Rounds.
2. Record lead after each range
Scoring
10363. The shoot is not scored as the aim is to identify POA and lead.
10-108
Section 5
Close Quarter Marksmanship- LMG
10364. Close Quarter Marksmanship.
CQM shoots are mandatory for firers
employed in the DCC Role. The results
are to be recorded on unit computer
systems.
Contents
CQM - IDENTIFY POA
CQM - ACCELERATED FIRE
CQM - FAILURE TO STOP
CQM - MULIPLE TARGETS
CQM - FIRING WHILST TURNING/PIVOTING
CQM - FIRING WHILST CLOSING
10-111
10-112
10-114
10-116
10-118
10-120
10365. Dress. The dress for the firers

is to include belt order webbing, combat
10366. Sights. Use of the CQB sight (where issued) should be introduced wherever
possible. The shot accountability practices provide an opportunity for firers to practice
using the CQB sight.
ACOG Lightweight Day Sight
Cleaning Kits
Combat Helmets
Body Armour
Coaching Aide Memoire (AF B 71158)
First Aid Kit and Stretcher
Stopwatches
10368. Coaching. Chapter 2 contains full details of coaching requirements. Some
essential points are to ensure that:
coaches, the Master Coach system should be used.
c. All POAs should be recorded on the firers personal shooting record
card.
d. Coaches are to be in possession of binoculars during practices to avoid
e. Shot cadence or tempo can be judged in the following manner, for half
10-109
10-110
Close Quarter Marksmanship LMG

CQM LF 1 Identifying Points of Aim (POA)
A. RCO Notes
10370. Aim. To identify the firers point of aim and point of impact at 3m to 15m.
10371. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a DCCT. Planning Officers are
to check Range Orders permit the firing of CQM practices for all other ranges. These
practices may also be fired on a LFTTA providing the RCO is suitably qualified.
practices.
10373. Stores.
Normal range stores.
2 x Figure 21 Targets with 2 x 25mm square aiming marks per target.
48 Rounds 5.56 mm ball linked ammunition per firer.

Preliminaries
10375. Firing Practice. Explain that establishing points of aim at close quarters will
allow a firer to increase his chance of bringing effective fire on to his target with his
first burst of fire
Practice Details
10376. Practice details are as follows: The shoot will establish the points of aim
required in order to centralize the burst on to the selected point of impact.
Practice 1. Identify and apply POA
Range/Positioning
3, 5, 10 and 15m. Standing CQB Position.
Ammunition
2 x belts of 24.
Target/ Exposure
2 x Figure 21 targets with 2 x 25mm aiming marks.
Instructions
1. From each range fire 2 bursts of 2-3 rds at a 25mm white patch.
2. Discuss the fall of shot in relation to the point of aim.
3. Repeat the practice to confirm the established POA.
4. Record the POA.

10-111

CQM LF 2 Accelerated Fire Training
A. RCO Notes
practices.
10381. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 x Fig 21 Targets per firer.
144 Rounds 5.56 mm Ball linked ammunition per firer.

Preliminaries
10383. Firing Practice. Explain that learning to increase shot cadence will allow a
firer to quickly engage his target with minimal time for retaliation.
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
15m Standing.
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-112
1. Fig 21.
5 second exposures until 18 rds completed.
1. During each exposure at the left hand target fire 2 bursts of 2 to 3
rds with a 2 second shot cadence. Up to 18 Rounds.
right target only.

Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 21.
5 second exposures until 18 rds completed
Instructions
As for Practice 1.

Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a 1.5 second shot cadence.

Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 18
Target/ Exposure
1. Fig 21.
Instructions
As for Practice 1 but with a 1 second shot cadence.
Scoring
HPS 144
Pass 86
10-113

CQM LF 3 Failure to Stop
A. RCO Notes
practices.
10389. Stores.
Normal range stores
1 x Fig 21 target per firer

Preliminaries
and subsequently the head with well aimed rapid shots in order to defeat an enemy
with types of body armour.
Practice Details
Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-114
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed.
3. During each exposure fire a burst of 2-3 rds to the body and one
burst to the head.
4. Discuss the fall of shot, record scores and patch up. 2 second shot
cadence.

Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
As for Practice 1.
2 second shot cadence.

Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
As for Practice 1.
1.5 second shot cadence.

Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
1x belt of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
HPS 128
Pass 77
10-115

CQM LF 4 - Multiple Targets 15 - 3 Metres
A. RCO Notes
10394. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging multiple targets at close range.
practices.
10397. Stores.
Normal range stores
2 x Fig 21 targets per firer

Preliminaries
range, a firer must quickly and accurately switch from an initial target to a secondary
threat.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Pairs
Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-116
1. Fig 21.
1. On command or appearance of the targets, firers are to engage
both targets in the order given in the safety brief with a burst of 2-3
Rounds.
2. After completion of the first belt dress forward and discuss the
results. Clean targets.
3. Repeat the practice and record the scores of the repeat practice
only. 2 second shot cadence.
Practice 2. Pairs
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
As for Practice 1.
1.5 second shot cadence.
Practice 3. Pairs
Range/Positioning
5m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
2. 4 second exposures until Rounds completed
As for Practice 1.
Practice 4. Pairs
Range/Positioning
3m Standing
Ammunition
2 x belts of 16
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
As for Practice 1.
Scoring
HPS 128.
Pass 77
10-117

CQM Firing Whilst Turning or Pivoting
A. RCO Notes
10402. Aim. To train firers to rapidly acquire and engage threats located at a wide
angle from the direction of orientation.
practices.
10405. Stores.
Normal range stores

Preliminaries
10407. Explain and demonstrate as necessary. Firers must have sufficient space
between each other to avoid interference should two firers pivot in opposite directions
to each other. Remid the firers that the safety catch must not be placed to F until they
have aligned onto the target.
10408. Firing Practice. Explain to firers that during urban operations threats may
appear at very close distances from unexpected directions, or the firer may have to
pivot to engage an enemy from differing directions.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Static 90 degree pivots to the LEFT
Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
1 x belt of 12 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-118
1. Fig 21
2. 5 second exposures until Rounds complete.
a safe direction, face to the RIGHT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the LEFT and
engage with a burst of 2-3 Rounds.
Practice 2. Static 90 degree pivots to the RIGHT

Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
1 x belt of 12 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21
a safe direction, face to the LEFT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the RIGHT and
engage with a burst of 2-3 Rounds.
Practice 3. Static 180 degree pivots to the LEFT and RIGHT

Range/Positioning
10 metres
Ammunition
1 x belt of 20 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21
a safe direction the firer starts facing away from the target.
2. On the command LEFT or RIGHT Threat, pivot in the given
direction and engage with a burst of 2-3 Rounds.
3. When pivoting to the left, the firers will engage the target on the left;
from the right, the target on the right.
3. Discuss and record scores.
Scoring
10410. For the rifle Two points per hit within the inner scoring area. One point within
the outer scoring area. No points anywhere else on the target. For the pistol Two
points per hit within the inner and outer scoring area. One point per hit anywhere else
on the target.
HPS 88
Pass 53
10-119

CQM Firing Whilst Closing
A. RCO Notes
10411. Aim. To practice the firer in engaging the enemy whilst closing.
10412. Conduct. The lesson should be conducted on a FDA Range. Planning
Officers are to check Range Orders and/or confirm with the RAU that CQM practices
are permitted. CQM practices may be conducted on LFTTA providing the RCO is
suitably qualified.
practices.
10414. Stores.
Normal Range stores

Preliminaries
10416. Firing Practice. During the Close Quarter Battle a firer may not be able to
cease movement to engage for a number of tactical reasons. In order to keep or regain
the initiative, the firer must be able to fire effectively whilst closing with the enemy.
Practice Details
Practice 1. Shooting whilst closing
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
3 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10-120
1. Fig 21.
1. Firer starts in the Standing CQB position at the 15m point.
2. On command or appearance of the target, fire 3 bursts of 2-3 rds
whilst closing.
3. Repeat the practice twice. Record the scores.
Practice 2. Pivoting to the Left and closing

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
2 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
RIGHT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the Left; fire 3
bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing.
Practice 3. Pivoting to the Right and closing

Range/Positioning
Ammunition
2 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
LEFT.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot to the right; fire 3
bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing.
Practice 4. Pivoting 180 degrees to the Left and Right and closing
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
2 x belt of 9 rds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Fig 21.
REARWARDS.
2. On command or appearance of the target, pivot 180 degrees to the
Left/Right as ordered, fire 3 bursts of 2-3 rds whilst closing.
Scoring
10418. Two points per hit in the CQM scoring area and one point per hit anywhere
else on the target
HPS 162
Pass 81
10-121
Section 6
10419. Introduction. The Fire and Movement Test is only to be conducted by firers
employed in the Basic Close Combat Role in accordance with the Commanders
Guide Table 1 within Chapter 1. It is intended to conduct this shoot on completion of
the ACMT in lieu of any form of LFTT, but will enable a 4-man team to operate together
whilst advancing towards the enemy.
10420. Constraint. It is not permissible to move from the Fire and Movement Test
to LFTT without complying to the Progression of Training table specified in Chapter 1
of this publication.
10421. Dress. Should include belt order webbing. Combat helmets and Issued Body
Armour are to be worn.
10-122
Fire and Movement Test (BCC Role)

10422. Ranges. The Fire and Movement Test is ideally suited to being fired on an
ETR. It may also be fired where Range Orders permit on a CGR using the FETs or GR
using targets positioned in front of the mantlet.
10423. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is after the practice details.
10424. Timing. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete the whole
test. This includes a 300m march.
10425. Organisation. The test is designed to test as many firers as possible in the
organisation in which they fight. A maximum of two fire teams can fire simultaneously.
Fire teams should be organised as follows:
a.
Nominated Fire Team Comd (Rifle).
b.
2 x Riflemen.
c.
1 x LSW Firer.
10426. Aim. The aim of the test is to identify the fire teams ability to put down
effective fire whilst under physical stress..
10427. Rules.
a. Firers must have passed the ACMT and conducted a dry rehearsal
of the F&M test before the test is fired In particular the actions to take in
the event of a stoppage during the test must be practiced. This is especially
important for less experienced firers.
b. The time for the 300m move is 90 seconds, carrying the equipment
described below. All the fire team members must complete the move together.
On arrival at the 300m firing point they are allowed 30 seconds to prepare
themselves for the start of the shooting practice. No extra time will be given
for stoppages during the shoot. Any firer that fails to be in position to start the
shoot in the required time frame will not be permitted to continue with the test.
The firer is to be re-tested at the earliest opportunity.
c. Dress and equipment for this test is to be combat dress, belt order
webbing (including filled magazines), combat body armour (as issued),
combat helmets, (issued, serviceable hearing protection is to be worn on the
range). Equipment is to be packed in accordance with unit SOPs and should
weigh 11.4 kg (25 lb) for males and females. The weight is in addition to the
helmets, body armour and personal weapons.
d.
Cross lane shooting is not permitted.
10-123
e.
Coaching is not permitted.
f.
Exposure times are to be taken from the time the target is up and steady.
g. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with the safety
catch applied.
h. Once the firers target has been hit or lowered, the firer is to apply their
safety catch in preparation of the move forward
10428. Ammunition/Magazines. Firers are allocated 21 Rounds. Magazines are to
be filled 1 x 5, 1 x 16.
10429. Scoring. One point per hit.
10430. Standards. During each tactical bound each firer must hit all Fig 12 exposures
(HPS 7) or the firer will be deemed to have failed the test. Any firer that fails the OMS
is to be re-tested at the earliest opportunity as part of a composite Fire Team.
10431. Explanatory Notes.
a. The minimum words of command should be given by the conducting
officer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised by the fire team
commander and that all firers understand the practices they are to fire.
b. It is the firers responsibility to ensure that they have sufficient Rounds
loaded in their weapon.
c. Safety Supervisors are to be positioned behind the rear men of the Fire
Teams throughout the Fire and Movement phase.
d. It is recommended to have two dedicated console monitors to check if
the targets have been hit during each bound, in addition to an OIC console.
10432. Range Rigging. The range is to be rigged as follows:
ETR 100m Figure 12
CGR Figure 12 placed in FETs
GR Figure 12 Target line forward of the mantlet.
6 x 8m markers are to be positioned as per Fig 10-2b.
10-124

Practice/Position - Approach March
Range
ETR from 600 m to 300m

CGR/GR from 400m to 100m
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1. Firers are to adopt the prone position at the 600m (ETR) or 400m
(CGR/GR) firing point and be aligned to their respective lane number.
2. Once in position, order Load, Watch Out, Watch Out.
3. Following a one second flash exposure of the Fig 12 targets, the
firers are to move to the 300m Fixed Firing Point (ETR) or the 100m
Firing Point (CGR) within 90 seconds. At the Firing Point the Fire Team
is to cover off the targets as follows:
a. Fire Team 1.
(1) Rifleman Tgt1
(2) Comd Tgt 2
(3) LSW Tgt 3
(4) Rifleman Tgt 4
b. Fire Team 2.
(1) Rifleman Tgt 9
(2) Comd Tgt 10
(3) LSW Tgt 11
(4) Rifleman Tgt 12
4. On arrival at the 300m Fixed Firing Point (ETR) or 100m Firing Point
(CGR) and after the 90 seconds has expired, the FIre Team is awarded
an additional 30 seconds to prepare to continue with the shoot, this will
include RCO initial words of command and a move to the 75m Firing
Point on a GR (120 seconds in total).
5. Once the team is in position at the Firing Point and during the 30
seconds preparation time, RCO is to order Adopt the kneeling or
squatting position, ready?.
6. When the word of command Ready is issued and if a firer is not in
a position to continue with Practice 1, the firer is to be disqualified and
will not complete the remainder of the shoot.
10-125
Practice 1.
Range
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
ETR/CGR 100m to 52m

GR 75m to 27m
ETR 100m to 52m
GR 75m to 27m
Figure 12 Targets fall when hit throughout.
1 x 7 second exposure, ALL lanes followed by 5 seconds down.
1 x 7 second exposure, lanes 1, 2, 9, 10 followed by 5 seconds down.
1. On completion of the 30 seconds preparation time Order Watch
and Shoot. All firers are to observe to their front. No further words of
command should be issued by the RCO but paragraphs 2 to 10 explains
the procedure that should be followed.
2. 10 seconds after the command Watch and Shoot there will be a
7 second exposure of Figure 12 targets in ALL lanes. All Firers are to
engage their own target with a maximum of 3 Rounds. Targets fall when
hit.
3. As soon as ALL targets have been hit down by that Fire Team or at
the end of the exposure, the nominated Fire Team Commanders (in
lanes 2 and 10), may order Move and together with the firer in lane
1 and 9, move 8m forward to bound 1, adopt the kneeling or squatting
position and release safety catches ready for the next exposure.
(Remaining firers to stay firm at the FP and observe arcs)
4. 5 seconds after the first exposure, targets in lanes 1, 2, 9 and 10 only
will be exposed for up 7 seconds. Those Firers only are to engage their
target with up to 3 Rounds from bound 1.
5. As soon as firers at bound 1 open fire at their targets, the remaining
firers in lanes 3, 4, 11, and 12 are to move forward level with their battle
partner under the cover of fire to bound 1. ALL firers within the Fire Team
should now be level at bound 1.
6. On completion of the exposure and after a 5 seconds gap, targets
in the other lanes (3, 4, 11 and 12) will be exposed for up to 7 seconds.
Those firers only are to engage their target with up to 3 Rounds. No
forward movement is allowed at this point. Once all the Fire Teams
targets are hit down or at the end of the exposure the first pairs only
(lane 1, 2, 9, 10) can move to bound 2 and prepare for their next
exposure. The second pair remains at bound 1 and observes their arc.
7. 5 seconds after the exposure, targets in lanes 1, 2, 9 and 10 only will
be exposed for up 7 seconds. Those Firers only are to engage their target
with up to 3 Rounds from bound 2.
10-126
8. As soon as firers at bound 2 open fire at their targets, the remaining

firers in lanes 3, 4, 11, and 12 are to move forward level with their battle
partner under the cover of fire to bound 2. ALL firers within the Fire Team
should now be level at bound 2.
9. On completion of the exposure and after a 5 seconds gap, targets
in the other lanes (3, 4, 11 and 12) will be exposed for up to 7 seconds,
Those firers only are to engage their target with up to 3 Rounds. No
Instructions Contd
forward movement is allowed at this point. Once all the Fire Teams targets
are hit down or at the end of the exposure the first pairs only (lane 1, 2,
9, 10) can move to bound 3 and prepare for their next exposure. The
second pair remains at bound 2 and observes their arc.
10. This procedure shown from para 7 through to 9 is continued at
bounds 3, 4, 5 and 6. All firers will be level at bound 6 on completion of
the last exposure.

Time Chart
Practice
Range
Lanes
Approach
March
600m/400m
1, 2, 3, 4, 9,
10, 11 and 12
The Move
600m to
300m FFP
or
400m to
100m FP
ETR/CGR
100m
Timings
Up
Down
10 12
N/A
No targets
exposed. After
120 seconds,
reset stopwatch.
1, 2, 3, 4, 9,
10, 11 and 12
10 18
92m or 67m
1, 2, 9 and 10
First Pairs
Bound Marker 1
23 31
GR
75m
1 (Cont)
Remarks
1 second flash exposure at
600m
120 second delay: 90
seconds for the move,
30 seconds to be into
position and receive initial
instructions. Stopwatch
reset.
Watch and Shoot is
ordered, then a 10 second
pause followed by the first 7
second exposure as shown.
Targets fall when hit. When
all targets are down, 1,
2, 9 and 10 only move from
FFP to bound 1. Remaining
firers stay firm at 300m FFP.
7 second exposure. Targets
fall when hit. When targets
are engaged rear pairs can
move up level to bound 1
and go firm.
10-127
Practice
Range
Lanes
92m or 67m
3, 4, 11 and
First Pairs
12
Bound Marker 1
10-128
Timings
Up
Down
36 44
84m or 59m
1, 2, 9, 10
First Pairs
Bound Marker 2
49 57
84m or59m
3, 4, 11, 12
Bound Marker 2
1:02 1:10
76m or 51m
1, 2, 9, 10
Bound Marker 3
1:15 1:23
76m or 51m
3, 4, 11, 12
Bound Marker 3
1:28 1:36
68m or 43m 1, 2, 9, 10
Bound Marker 4
1:41 1:49
68m or 43m 3, 4, 11, 12

Bound Marker 4
1:54 2:02
60m or 35m 1, 2, 9, 10
Bound Marker 5
2:07 2:15
60m or 35m 3, 4, 11, 12

Bound Marker 5
2:20 2:28
52m or 27m 1, 2, 9, 10
Bound Marker 6
2:33 2:41
52m or 27m 3, 4, 11, 12

Bound Marker 6
2:46 2:54
Remarks
Second pairs engage
targets in their own lanes.
When all targets go down,
first pairs only to move to
bound 2. Remaining firers
to go firm at bound 1.
7 second exposure. Targets
fall when hit. When targets
are engaged rear pairs can
move up level to bound 2.
The above procedure is
continued up to bound 6.
All firers to be level at bound 6

after the last exposure.
75
Fig 10-2a Layout of the GR for the Fire and Movement Test
Fig 10-2b Layout of the ETR/CGR for the Fire and Movement Test
10-129
10-130
CHAPTER 11
LIVE FIRING TACTICAL TRAINING
(PERSONAL WEAPONS)
Scope
1101. Chapter 11 covers the final
stage of Training the Battle Shot Live
Firing Tactical Training (LFTT). This is the
culmination of Army Operational Shooting
training.
Contents
SCOPE 11-1
IFFC 11-1
THE FIRE TEAM ATTACK CONCEPT
11-1
THE CHAIN OF COMMAND
11-2
SAFETY 11-3
THE FIRE TEAM ATTACK
11-4
1102. LFTT is to be designed and

conducted to ensure soldiers can meet the Operational Marksmanship Standards for
their personal and alternate personal weapons in realistic, testing and demanding
tactical conditions that match Operational Shooting Requirements.
1103. For regular Infantry battalions, LFTT is mandatory. While formation objectives
may well permit LFTT to battle group level, by day and by night, certain minimum
training objectives are to be achieved during Infantry Field Firing Camps (IFFC).
IFFC
1104. Training Progression. As a minimum requirement DCC Roled units are to
undertake a progressive LFTT programme that ensures mastery of individual basic
skills and collective battle drills from fire team to company level by day and platoon
level by night. At all levels, training is to vary in emphasis between offensive and
defensive operations in line with training and operational priorities. Wherever possible
LFTT is to integrate grenade throwing and firing of platoon and battalion support
weapons; but this will form part of the direction given by Formation Commanders,
depending upon their annual priorities.
1105. Minimum Training Objectives. COs are to achieve the minimum training
objectives outlined within the Guidance to Commanders tables contained within
Chapter 1 during an IFFC, although the detailed syllabus to achieve these objectives,
and its execution, remain the responsibility of COs.
The Fire Team Attack Concept
1106. The fire team attack is part of the Progression of Training Table and as such,
it is mandatory for each DCC Roled fire team to conduct this training annually.
1107. The use of Small Arms Range Target System (SARTS) will greatly enhance
the capture of accurate fire effect and used effectively will improve after action reviews.
11-1
1108. To enable the Chain of Command to assess each fire team within a sub unit,
the fire team attack as described in Section 1 of this chapter is to be conducted. With
good range planning and use of resources, the 18 fire teams within a DCC Roled
Company will be able to be exercised over the same ground during a two day training
package. However, it may not be possible to assess the standards between companies
if the same ground is not used due to the differences between each LFTTA.
1109. Evaluation. Evaluation of tactical fire effect will be important. Under direction
from Formation Commanders, an assessment of operational capability is to be made.
1110. MFP2. COs are to report the achievements of IFFCs as part of unit MFP2
returns. Any resource or administrative difficulties limiting the achievement of IFFCs
are also to be recorded in a PXR and referred to the relevant formation HQ and range
organisation.
The Chain of Command
1111. Role of Formation Commanders. Formation Commanders have a key
responsibility in directing and facilitating IFFCs in the following ways:
a. Establishing training and operational priorities for COs to ensure the
right doctrinal emphasis and the right balance of offensive and defensive
LFTT exercises.
b. Ensuring COs have the resources to achieve the minimum mandatory
objectives during IFFCs.
c. Resourcing COs to undertake battalion-level LFTT when and where
achievable and in line with overall priorities.
d. Directing COs to undertake IFFCs as part of overseas training exercises
(OTX), when battalions are allocated such an exercise and otherwise would
be unable to complete field firing within their annual training year.
e. Monitoring LFTT to ensure MFP2 returns are completed and meet the
mandatory requirements of Army Operational Shooting.
1112. Reserve Infantry Battalions and BCC Roled Units. It is recognised for
Reserve Infantry battalions that the opportunities for LFTT will be limited. Therefore
whilst it cannot be a mandatory requirement for Reserve Infantry battalions to carry
out an IFFC, where possible a four day IFFC(Reserve) should be conducted on all
Annual Camps/Concentrations where facilities exist and ammunition is available.
Furthermore, LFTT is not mandatory for Other Arms and Services. Such units are to
undertake LFTT as directed and re-sourced within the Chain of Command; and LFTT
records are to be completed as part of unit MFP returns. The LFTT should reflect the
units operational role.
11-2
Safety
1113. Under no circumstances is a soldier to progress to LFTT unless the soldier
has achieved the required standards on the mandatory LFMT and TLFTT shoots (see
Progression of Training Table in Chapter 1) in the previous 12 months, WHTs have
been completed within the previous six months and the zero of his personal weapon
has been checked.
1114. All LFTT is to be planned and executed in strict accordance with Reference A
(Pamphlet No. 21). Reference A gives sufficient scope to achieve the required results.
In particular, safety and supervision regulations are not to be compromised in the
pursuit of realism.
11-3
The Fire Team Attack

1115. Ranges. The fire team attack is to be conducted on an LFTTA by day, in
accordance with Table 1.
1116. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 70 minutes to complete the
whole shoot, including briefs and debriefs. Fire teams should not start the march
until the previous detail has finished and the range staff have returned to the battle
preparation area. An Exercise Time Chart is provided as a guide for the RCO.
1117. Organisation. The shoot is designed to test as many soldiers as possible
in the organisation in which they will fight. Fire teams are to be organised as follows:
a.
Fire Team Comd (Rifle).
b.
SDM (LSW).
c.
Gunner (LMG).
d.
Rifleman (Rifle and UGL).
1118. Aim. The aim of the shoot is to identify the Fire Teams ability to put down
effective fire, this includes suppressive fire, and assault an enemy position. The
Fire Team will complete this whilst under physical stress, having first completed an
approach march.
1119.
Rules.
a. The Fire Team must have zeroed weapons, passed the ACMT,
completed the relevant operational shooting skills and completed the
Progression of Training Table (laid out in Chapter 1) before conducting the
Fire Team Attack. Where UGL Practice rounds and grenades are employed
the nominated users must be qualified in line with the regulations.
b. The Fire Team will complete a 1.2km approach march before the Live
Firing phase of the FTA. The finish point of the approach march should be
the Battle Preparation Area, where they will be given an additional 2 mins
preparation time before starting the Advance.
c. The time for the 1.2 km approach march should be determined by the
Commanding Officer and may be varied to cater for abnormal local terrain
and weather conditions. As a guide, 10 minutes should be allocated. All the
fire team members must complete the approach march together.
11-4
d. Dress and equipment for this assessment is to be combat dress, belt

order webbing (including filled magazines), combat body armour, combat
helmets. Issued serviceable hearing protection is to be worn on the range.
Equipment is to be packed in accordance with SOPs and should weigh a
minimum of 11.4 kg (25 Ib).
1120.
Ammunition/Magazines. Ammunition allocation is:

a.
Fire Team Comd (Rifle)
120 x 5.56mm ball/tracer
b.
SDM (LSW)
c.
Gunner (LMG)
d.
Rifleman (Rifle and UGL) 120 x 5.56mm ball/tracer and 2 x 40mm

Prac UGL rounds.
e. In addition the following ammunition is to be allocated to the Fire Team

- 1 x Prac Grenade, 1 x Smoke screen grenade (to be issued as the FT
Commander dictates).
1121. Scoring. As an interim measure before the Small Arms Range Target
System (SARTS) is delivered, which will properly measure suppressive fire, RCOs
should record the hits on target only and compare this with the Fire Teams expended
ammunition count. An example of how to do this is shown in the explanatory notes.
1122. Standards. The FTA is a test. The test standard is 25% hits on targets from
all rounds fired.
1123. It is permissible for the fire team commander to accompany the range staff
when counting the hits on targets.
1124.
Explanatory Notes.
a. A safety brief is to be delivered to all exercising troops prior to
the approach march commencing in accordance with Pamphlet No. 21
(Reference A).
b. The Fire Team Comd is to be briefed by the RCO that his mission is
to complete the approach march in the specified time, arrive in the battle
preparation area, where he is allocated two minutes for team administration
and then advance and destroy all enemy within his area.
c. Weapons will be loaded (less UGL) prior to the approach march, but
only made ready in the battle preparation area, which must be contained
within the LFTT movement box.
d. The minimum words of command should be given by the conducting
officer. It is important that control of the fire team is exercised by the fire team
commander.
11-5
e. It is the firers responsibility to ensure that they have sufficient rounds

loaded on their weapon.
f.
A generic layout of the FTA is shown at Fig 11.1. Each different Field
Firing Area location will dictate the final layout and different assault options
but distances should be adhered to. The RCO should plan the FTA so that
as many tactical skills as possible are assessed such as suppressing the
enemy, Pairs F&M, PoF and the use of the Grenadier. The use of effects
weapons to represent covering fire support from flanking fire teams should
also be considered.
g. A key part of the debrief will include marksmanship and raising
awareness of suppressive fire is. The following points should be covered:
(1)
Hits on target.
(2)
An understanding of suppressive fire.
(3)
How to gain or re-gain suppressive fire.
(4)
Ammunition expenditure and conservation. (5) Fire Control.
h. Once SARTS is in service the new targets will provide the means to
measure suppressive fire through an automated after action review. This FTA
is designed, in part, to build awareness of the use of suppressive fire.
i.
The following example shows the calculation to be used to obtain the
Fire Teams percentage of hits on target against rounds fired and thus provide
a percent score.
(1)
Rounds issued to the Fire Team = 730
(2)
Rounds handed back in unexpended = 150
(3)
Total Hits on target recorded = 200
Firstly identify how many rounds were fired. Then take the total hits on
target and divide it by the total rounds fired. Then multiply this figure by
100 to give you the % score.
11-6
(4)
730 - 150 = 580 rounds fired
(5)
200 / 580 = 0.34
(6)
0.34 x 100 = 34% assessment score
Suggested Exercise Time Chart Guide

Serial
Location
1.2 km from Battle

Preparation Area
Arrive Battle
Preparation Area
(Within Movement Box)
Approx
Running Time
0 10 mins
Instruction/Activity
NSPs, Safety and range briefings, load
weapons, order Fire Team to move to
Battle Preparation Area
10 mins
Make weapons ready less LMG
Battle Preparation
Area
10 12 mins
Fire Team Preparation then order

Fire Team Comd to advance
Fire Team arrive at

Contact Line
17 mins
Contact Line
17 20 mins
Fire Team to take cover and suppress the

enemy. Targets up and hold
Contact Line
20 21 mins
Fire Team to fire and manoeuvre forward

to Fire Support Position
Fire Support
Position
21 24 mins
Fire Team break down and begin flanking

assault. Targets continue to be exposed
intermittently.
Raise targets at main enemy position
Optional effects weapon to simulate D

FT providing covering fire whilst C FT
are moving toward PoF.
8
Point of Fire arrive in

position and grenadier
advances
30 mins
Targets dropped on main objective to

allow grenadier to advance. Switch fire
target exposed for PoF to engage.
En position
35 mins
Position taken All targets down. Fire

Team re-org on main En Posn.
11-7
Fig 11-1. Layout of Fire Team Attack

11-8
CHAPTER 12
AMMUNITION SCALES (PERSONAL WEAPONS)
Scope
1201. This chapter sets out the
ammunition scales required in all Live
Firing (LF) lessons for Personal Weapons
contained in Volume 1 of the OSP. The
distribution is based on the scale for each
individual by weapons for Live Firing
Marksmanship Training (LFMT) up to and
including Collective Performance (CP)
level 2, the Annual Combat Marksmanship
Test (ACMT) and the LF Shoots for
Operational Shooting Skills.
Contents
SCOPE 12-1
LAYOUT 12-1
RIFLE AMMUNITION TABLES
12-1
LSW AMMUNITION TABLES
12-3
LSW (SDM) AMMUNITION TABLES
12-3
L129A1 SHARPSHOOTER
12-4
LMG AMMUNITION TABLES
12-5
PISTOL AMMUNITION TABLES
12-7
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING SKILLS
12-8
GUIDE TO LFTT
12-10
1202. The scales of ammunition also include those shoots that have been designed
to be fired using DCCT but which can also be fired live in the absence of simulators.
Layout
1203. Each weapon has a series of tables indicating quantities of ammunition
allocated for the various stages of LFMT for Training the Battle Shot.
1204. Ammunition for Transition to Live Firing Tactical Training (TLFTT) (Fire and
Movement Test and IBSR Shoots) and Live Firing Tactical Training (LFTT) is to be
provided from Theatre and command pools.
Rifle Ammunition Tables
1205. Regular and Reserve Units Initial Training. Listed in the following tables
are the quantities of ammunition a trainee requires to complete one attempt at each of
the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training.
12-1
Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Ctn Qty
40
50
12
24
80
64
64
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 Grouping and Zeroing
LFMT Stage 2 Application of Fire
11
45
12
50/60
10
14
32
11
15
32/45
12
16
20
13
17
20
14
18
10
BCC/DCC
BCC/DCC
LFMT Stage 3 Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT)

15
ACMT
69/79
16
CBRN
40
Grand Total
588/685
BCC/DCC
BCC/DCC
1206. Regular and Reserve Units Annual Training. Listed in the following
table are the quantities of ammunition a firer requires to complete one attempt at each
of the LFMT lessons fired annually:
Ser
LF Lesson
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2

1
ACMT Prep
85/91
BCC/DCC
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT

2
ACMT
79
CBRN
40
Grand Total
12-2
204/210
BCC/DCC
LSW Ammunition Tables

Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
Remarks

34
12

3
33
54
ACMT
93
CBRN
Grand Total
73
40
119
220
Ser
LF Lesson
ACMT Prep
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2

80
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT

2
ACMT
73
CBRN
40
40
153
Grand Total
LSW (SDM) Ammunition Tables

12-3
Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
34
12
20
35
35
62
41
ACMT
Remarks

9
CBRN
Grand Total
85
40
106
258
Ser
LF Lesson
ACMT Prep
75
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2

-
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT

2
ACMT
85
CBRN
40
115
85
Grand Total
Sharpshooter L129A1 Ammunition Tables

1211. Distributed Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities of
ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to
be fired by all trainee Sharpshooters when completing the distributed training within
units:
12-4
Ser
LF Lesson
Remarks

1
56
39
21
27
50
33
ACMT
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT

8
61
CBRN
40
Grand Total
327
Including ACMT.
Ser
LF Lesson
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2

1
ACMT Prep
63
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT
ACMT
61
CBRN
40
Grand Total
164
LMG Ammunition Tables

1213. Combat Infantrymen, Regular and Reserve Units Initial Training.
Listed in the following table are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one
attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are to be fired during initial training:
12-5
Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm Ball Belted Qty
5.56 mm 4B1T Belted Qty
Remarks

1
30
60
60
60
See Note 1.
65
See Note 1.
95
See Note 1.
ACMT
145
See Note 1.
160
See Note 1.
150
525
See Note 2.
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT

8
CBRN
Grand Total
Notes:
1.
5.56 mm 4B1T may be substituted with 5.56 mm Ball Belted during Tracer
bans.
2.
Dependant on sighting system used.
1214. Regular and Reserve Units Annual Training. Listed in the following table
are the quantities of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the
LFMT lessons that are to be fired annually by all whose personal weapon is the LMG:
Ser
LF Lesson
ACMT Prep
125
5.56 mm 4B1T Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2

LFMT Stage 3 ACMT
2
ACMT
145
See Note 1.
CBRN
160
See Note 1.
125
305
Grand Total
12-6
Pistol Ammunition Tables

1215. Pistol User Initial Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities
of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are
to be fired during initial training by all Arms and Services personnel whose personal
weapon is the pistol:
Ser
LF Lesson
9 mm Ball Ctn Qty
Remarks

1
30
24
48
32
32
39
ACMT
32
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT

8
CBRN
Grand Total
18
255
Including ACMT
1216. Pistol User Annual Training. Listed in the following table are the quantities
of ammunition required to complete one attempt at each of the LFMT lessons that are
to be fired during annual training by all Arms and Services personnel whose personal
weapon is the pistol:
Ser
LF Lesson
9 mm Ball Ctn Qty
Remarks
LFMT Stage 1 and 2

1
ACMT Prep
38
ACMT
32
CBRN
18
LFMT Stage 3 ACMT

3
Grand Total
88
12-7
Operational Shooting Skills

5.56 mm
Ball Ctn
Qty
9 mm
Ball
Ctn
Qty
Ser
LF Lesson
Firing at Moving Targets Using

FP Cover
24
Firing at Moving Targets

Assessment
72
Firing at the LNV Rifle/LSW

Instruction and Assessment
30
Firing With NVD/TI Rifle/LSW

Zeroing (Daylight Shoot)
25
Firing With NVD/TI Rifle/LSW

Assessment
40
Firing with HMNVS and LA

Introductory Shoot (25 metres)
30

Grouping and Alignment
50

Assessment
25
Automatic Fire Instruction
120
10
Automatic Fire Assessment
50
11
IBSR Def Phase
16
12
Rifle/LWS (Bipod Legs folded)

Vehicle Mounted Shoots Flank
Contacts in a Moving Vehicle
60
13
Rifle Long Range Suppression
48
14
CQM (Rifle And Pistol) The

Transition
16
16
15
CQM (Rifle And/Or Pistol)

Firing Whilst Turning Or Pivoting
32
32
16
CQM (Rifle And/Or Pistol) Firing

Whilst Closing
54
54
12-8
5.56 mm
4B1T/Ball
Belted
Qty
Remarks
If DCCT not
available
Ser
LF Lesson
5.56 mm
Ball Ctn
Qty
9 mm
Ball
Ctn
Qty
112
112
5.56 mm
4B1T/Ball
Belted
Qty
Remarks
17
CQM Moving Target - Identifying

Lead With Personal Weapons
MRTS
18
LMG Moving Targets Preparation

and Assessment
19
LMG Moving Targets at Longer

ranges
100
20
Firing At The Limit Of Night

Visibility LMG Instructional
Shoot And Assessment
90
21
Firing With NVD/TI LMG

Zeroing (Daylight Shoot)
25
22
Firing With NVD/TI LMG

Assessment
65
23
LMG Vehicle Mounted Shoots

Static Vehicle Shoot
100
24
LMG Vehicle Mounted Shoots

Flank Contacts in a Moving
Vehicle Shoot
90
25
LMG CQM LFMT 1
26
LMG CQM LFMT 2
27
LMG CQM LFMT 3
28
LMG CQM LFMT 4
29
LMG CQM Firing Whilst

Turning Or Pivoting
30
LMG CQM Firing Whilst

Closing
31
Annual Firing In CBRN Conditions

- Pistol Assessment
CLF Directive
to be fired
annually
32
L129A1- Annual Firing In CBRN

Conditions - Instructional Shoot
Assessment
CLF Directive
to be fired
annually
33
L129A1-Advanced Application Of
Fire 700 800 Metres
If DCCT not
available
If DCCT not
available
12-9
Ser
LF Lesson
34
L129A1 - Firing At Moving Targets

Assessment
35
Firing At The Limit Of Night

Visibility Instructional Shoot
And Assessment
36
Firing With MUNS Night Sight

Assessment
37

Introductory Shoot (25 metres)
38

Grouping and Alignment
39

Assessment
5.56 mm
Ball Ctn
Qty
9 mm
Ball
Ctn
Qty
5.56 mm
4B1T/Ball
Belted
Qty
Remarks
A Guide to the Ammunition Requirements for LFTT

Ball Ctn
(per Rifle)
Ball/4B1T
(per LSW)
Ball/4B1T Belted
(per LMG)
Offensive
IBSR and Individual CQB
40
60
50
Pairs Fire and Manoeuvre
60
60
100
Team Fire and Manoeuvre
60
180
200
Section Attack (Day)
120
180
200
Platoon Attack (Day)
120
330
600
Company Attack (Day)
120
330
400
Defensive
Section in Defence (Day and Night)
20
120
200
Platoon in Defence (Day and Night)
30
120
200
Company in Defence (Day )
20
120
200
TOTALS
600
1500
2150
12-10
CHAPTER 13
OPERATIONAL SHOOTING COMPETITIONS
General
1301. The aim of this chapter is
to provide guidance for the planning
and subsequent management of an
Operational
Shooting
Competition
(OSC).
1302. The chapter is structured in
a such a way as to provide the user
with the overarching information and
key considerations required to plan an
OSC as well as the more intimate detail
of subsequent management. In order
to give planners maximum autonomy,
the guidance avoids, where possible,
mandating procedure and instead offers
examples of proven good practice that
may be replicated in their entirety or
simply referenced as a guide. A number
of enclosures are included (electronic
version only), offering examples of the
key documents required in the planning
process. Enclosures associated with this
chapter are:
Contents
GENERAL 13-1
POLICY & MANAGEMENT 13-2
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 13-2
GENERAL RULES 13-4
COMPETITORS AND TEAMS 13-5
DRESS AND EQUIPMENT 13-6
MOBILE COMMUNICATION 13-7
EXCESS HITS 13-7
PROTESTS AND RE-SHOOTS 13-8
MARKING AND SCORING 13-8
CLOSE QUARTER BATTLE STYLE SCORING 13-9
CHALLENGES 13-10
DISQUALIFICATION 13-11
FORFEITURE AND DEDUCTION OF POINTS
13-11
ILLEGAL MODIFICATION OF WEAPON
13-11
WEAPON BREAKAGES
13-11
TYPES OF TARGET & VALUE OF HITS
13-12
TIMING 13-13
GUIDANCE FOR RANGE STAFF
13-16
STATISTICAL STAFF
13-17
SAFETY 13-17
FIRING POINT PROCEDURE
13-17
SQUADDING CARDS
13-18
AMMUNITION 13-18
a.
Administration Instruction
b.
Scoring Matrix
c.
Squadding Matrix
d.
Squadding Cards
e.
Guide to OSC Range Booking
f.
Butt Registers
g.
Marshalling Duties.
13-1
Policy & Management

1303. Chapter 1 gives clear direction on the policy and management of operational
shooting. In the interests of consistency it is essential that direction from this OSP is
given primacy over all others and is adhered to at all times.
Planning Considerations
1304. The enclosures to this publication, whilst generic in their nature, can be
manipulated to suit the specific requirements of an OSC.
1305. Entry Fees and Forms. Whenever possible, OSCs should be publicly
funded and therefore entry fees will be set to cover the cost of the prize list only.
1306. Types of Assessments. The emphasis should be on team events. Wherever
assessment conditions permit, team and individual assessments should be fired
concurrently. This adds necessary interest to the meeting and also saves time and
ammunition. The shoots in Chapter 14 of this publication are considered the most
appropriate for an OSC, but units should not be restricted to such shoots. The
organising unit is at liberty to include additional shoots from endorsed publications
and/or another formalised OSC as they see fit. Where the aim of the competition is to
qualify for another specific competition it would be prudent to align the assessments
with that of the senior competition.
1307. Assessment Selection and Conditions. It is suggested that LF assessments
from Chapter 14 to this publication are used because:
a. They provide a challenge to the participants to develop marksmanship
skills beyond those required for the Annual Combat Marksmanship Tests.
b. Providing assessment conditions are as published in Chapter 14,
individuals and units can compare their performance against the results
achieved at the Defence Operational Shooting Competition (DefOSC).
1308. Programme and Timetable. To enable training and planning to commence
in good time, the outline programme for the OSC should be published well in advance
and included as an annex to the administration instruction.
1309. The programme will depend on the following factors:
a.
Time available.
b.
Range space.
c.
Number of competitors.
d.
Ammunition available.
1310. The programme and time table for issue to staff and competitors must contain:
13-2
a.
The programme.
b.
The time table for each assessment.
c.
An outline of assessment conditions and prizes.
d.
Any special rules not contained in this publication.
e.
Administrative arrangements.
1311. Timings. The preparation of timetables requires knowledge of the time taken
to fire the various assessments. Care must be taken to allow sufficient time for each
detail, otherwise competitors may be rushed or the programme will run late. Timings
for each shoot are in Chapter 14.
1312. Composition of Teams. Teams should be organised at various levels, e.g.
Company, Platoon and Section. It is recommended that the assessments should be
based on Section teams with inter-Sub Unit championships decided on the aggregate
of scores made by a number of Section teams. The rank structure of the team will
depend on the rank structure of the unit. The aim must be to devise a rank structure
which will exercise a cross section of the unit and should always include a number of
Officers, NCOs and new competitors.
1313. Squadding. Well planned squadding arrangements are the key to an efficient
operational shooting competition. An example of a squadding matrix is included as an
enclosure to this publication. The following is a guide to the steps required to squad
a unit meeting:
a. Plan the design of the squadding cards (if used). Specimen cards are
included as an enclosure to this publication.
b. Use a colour code particularly for the different practices of a specific
assessment.
c. If the cards are to be printed commercially order them well in advance
and ensure that there is sufficient income to cover the cost.
d.
Enter squadding details on the cards e.g. detail and target numbers.
e. Prepare a list of teams and individuals entered for the meeting and allot
a serial number to each team and individual. These serial numbers will save a
great deal of time and prevent errors being made in the identification of cards.
f.
Prepare a squadding plan for each assessment.
g. Squad the assessment by entering the team/individual serial numbers

in the appropriate spaces.
h.
Make up squadding cards into team packs.
i.
Issue squadding cards and/or range programme to Team Captains the
day before the meeting.
13-3
j.
During the squadding process location of ranges and distance between
them must be considered.
k. If transport to and from ranges is necessary, teams should be squadded
together for assessments in order to reduce the transport burden.
1314. Team Captain Briefing. A mandatory conference and briefing for Team
Captains should be held on the day prior to the start of the meeting. Details will be
published on registration.
1315. Prizes and Ties. The individual and team prizes available to competitors
should be promulgated prior to the competition. An example prize list with details of
the tie procedure is included as an annex to the enclosed administrative instruction.
1316. The decision to award individual and aggregate prizes is entirely at the
discretion of the organisers i.e. a series of scores from separate assessments may be
combined to award a Champion at Arms or Champion Team prize.
1317. Team Selection and Training. Much of the value of an OSC lies in
the selection and training of individuals and teams. Details of the meeting should
be published as far ahead as possible, and the programme should allow time for
individuals and teams to train.
General Rules
1318. These rules are intended as a guide and as such units are at liberty to make
alterations as they see fit providing that safety and the general spirit of competition
shooting is not compromised.
1319. Any infringements of the rules may disqualify a team or individual or cause
penalties to be inflicted. This is entirely the decision of the organising unit, with
consistency and fairness being of the utmost importance.
1320. The SPO is empowered to alter the programme, including the cancellation
of assessments, should the weather conditions or other unforeseen circumstances
warrant it.
1321. Weapons General. Service weapons must be as issued. They are not to be
modified in anyway and must not include privately purchased accessories i.e. down
grips, hand protectors etc.
1322. Rifles. The Service Rifle may be equipped with either Optic or Iron sights.
Competitors with Iron sights should not compete against those with Optics and vice
versa. In circumstances where both types of sights are used at an OSC, a separate
prize list should be published.
13-4
1323. Ammunition. Only ammunition issued for the assessment will be used. Unfired rounds in any phase/practice will be forfeited and not used for any subsequent
phase/practice, unless otherwise stated in the assessment conditions. Competition
planners should not allow teams to bring and fire their own ammunition.
Competitors and Teams
1324. Eligibility. Eligibility criteria will be detailed in the administrative instruction
and is to be fair and unambiguous. All competitors must have passed Weapon Handling
Tests (WHT) and Annual Combat Marksmanship Test (ACMT) on all weapons they are
to fire during the competition. In addition, and where applicable they must have also
passed the appropriate operational fitness tests for their role. It is the responsibility of
the organising unit to promulgate the eligibility criteria within a suitable time frame in
order to allow competitors to meet the standards.
1325. Team Composition. Each team member must be assigned to a unit on a unit
PID, temporary or attached personnel are not eligible. The composition of each team
is the decision of the organising unit and will be included in a Calling Notice and/or
Administrative Instruction.
1326. Team Captains. Whilst not mandatory, it is advisable to insist on the
appointment of a Team Captain for each participating team. The Team Captain
provides a focal point for planners and can deal with administrative and managerial
issues.
1327. Coaching. Whilst the decision on whether or not to allow coaching and to
what degree lies with the organising unit, the following detail is a guide:
a. Coaching is the giving or receiving from any other person any assistance
or advice, including any indication as to how the time is passing, from the
start of a practice until the score is known. In individual assessments casual
conversation between competitors on the firing point may be considered as
coaching and may lead to penalties being imposed on both parties.
b. Unless allowed in assessment conditions, coaching is NOT permitted in
any individual assessment, including during the firing of sighting shots.
c. Coaching is permitted in team assessments by members of the team,
the team captain, or team coach if one is permitted. The team captain or
coach is allowed to move about the firing point in the execution of their duties,
but must not screen competitors from wind or light.
13-5
Dress and Equipment

1328. General. Unless otherwise stated in the conditions of an assessment and
in the interests of consistency, the dress and equipment of competitors will be as
set out in the OSC admin instruction and/or Calling Notice with the additional points
below. It is to be as issued and worn in the authorised manner throughout the whole
competition. The spo may penalise competitors who are not dressed or equipped
according to these rules. The penalty is to be applied when the practice or assessment
is completed with the RCO reporting the offence to the SPO who will decide on the
level of penalty to be applied.
1329. Hearing Protection. These items are mandatory for all firing and must meet
service issue standards.
1330. Boots. Regulation boots as issued.
1331. Head Dress. Competitors must wear the issued combat helmet unless
assessment conditions specify otherwise.
1332. Gloves. The wearing of issued gloves is permitted.
1333. Padding. Improvised padding should not be worn under the combat jacket.
Exterior or strap-on pads are permitted if issued.
1334. Uniform. Issued combat jacket and trousers with combat helmet unless
assessment conditions specify otherwise. Waterproof clothing as issued may be worn
in all assessments by the competitor, captain and the coach.
1335. Belt Order Webbing. In accordance with the OSC admin instruction and/or
Calling Notice to this publication, with the following additions:
a. When assessment conditions require the wearing of a respirator, it must
always be returned to the belt mounted issued haversack when not in use.
b.
For Pistol competitors As per Rifle plus pistol case/holster as issued.
1336. Optics. The following rules will apply:

a. Spectacles. Prescription spectacles and contact lenses may be worn in
any assessment.
b. Binoculars. The use of issued binoculars is permitted where assessment
conditions allow.
c.
13-6
Telescopes. Telescopes should only be allowed in Sniper Assessments.
Mobile Communication
1337. Personal communication devices, including mobile telephones and/or walkie
talkie type radios, are not to be used for unauthorised communication between
the Firing Points and Butts. Once a firer enters the marshalling process he/she is
forbidden from using any form of mobile communications until such time as he/she is
marshalled from the firing point.
Excess Hits
1338. Marking. When, in any practice or series of practices, the total number of hits
on a competitors target or targets exceeds the number of shots fired and when there
are no means of identifying these shots, the procedure will be as follows:
a. If it can be proved that the excess hits in any phase or practice were
made by the competitor or team firing more than the number of shots allowed,
the score will be disallowed and the penalty may be disqualification.
b. When the number of excess hits does not exceed one half of the
number of shots allowed, the score will be adjusted by cancelling first a hit of
the LOWEST value, then a hit of the HIGHEST value and so on alternately
until the hits left are equal to the shots permitted to be fired in that practice.
c. When the number of excess hits exceeds one half of the number of
shots allowed, the score will be cancelled and the competitor will re-shoot.
New scores will be given for spoilt targets only, all other practices will stand.
d. When different targets are used at different times, during a practice, the
score made on the target without excess hits will stand, and the above rules
will only apply to a target with excess hits.
e. If firing point staff observe a competitor firing on another competitors
target he is to be informed immediately that he is cross firing. No allowance
will be made for shots cross fired, and no additional penalty will be applied.
f.
SARTS Only. In cases of excess rounds during points per hit
competitions. The competitors target with excess rounds on will be examined
by the RCO. If the excess rounds are over 50% of the total fired the competitor
must re shoot. If under 50% the firer is given the benefit of doubt. All hit shots
to a maximum of the HPS are counted. Missed shots should not be counted.
If different scoring areas are being used the rule for excess hits for manual
scoring should be applied.
13-7
Protests and Re-Shoots

1339. At the end of a practice or phase, all firers will be given the opportunity to
protest against any perceived irregularity.
1340. If an irregularity of procedure occurs, such as the incorrect timing of an
exposure or a target or frame breaking, a firer in an individual assessment or team
captain in a team assessment may protest to the RCO before the score is known or
the targets seen. After a protest has been upheld, no information will be given to an
individual or a team as to the score made in the first shoot.
1341. No re-shoot will take place unless the occurrence upon which the protest is
based is vouched for by a member of the Range Team. Re-shoots must take place at
the earliest opportunity.
1342. If a re-shoot is granted as a result of a protest in a continuous fire and
movement assessment or practice then the individual or team must re-shoot the
whole practice or assessment. Where it is possible to separate the score into phases
(when ammunition is NOT carried forward) only the score made in that phase or by
that group in which the irregularity occurs will count in the re-shoot. The final score will
be the new score, the remainder of the original score plus all penalty points awarded
in both shoots.
1343. Team captains are responsible for the conduct of their firers. At the discretion
of the Senior Planning Officer, habitual protestors and firers failing to observe normal
military protocols and conduct will be disqualified from assessments or the competition.
Marking and Scoring
1344. Manual. The decision to use butt registers and/or squadding cards at the
OSC lies with the organising unit. Team captains and individuals are, at all times,
responsible for checking the number of hits on their squadding cards before leaving
the range.
a. When the practice has been completed the RCO will ask for any
protests. If there are no protests (or on completion of any re-shoots allowed)
the RCO will signal to the butts to check the targets.
b. Scores will be taken and the total number of hits and their value
recorded and communicated to the Firing Point. The Range Staff will repeat
these details so that competitors can hear, and record them on the team
register or individual squadding card.
c. Spotting discs will be placed in as many shot holes as possible on the
scoring area and targets raised at the same time.
d. Once the competitors have seen targets and/or received scores, the
RCO will ask for any challenges.
13-8
e. Once challenges have been dealt with, or if there are no challenges, the
RCO will order the butts to patch out.
1345. Spotting Discs. Only the regulation orange spotting discs will be used.
Colour blind competitors may request for their spotting discs to be reversed so that
the white side is shown. No spotting discs will be put in the shot holes until the score
has been taken. No shot holes will be pasted over or partially patched out until the
order to patch out is given.
1346. SARTS. For deliberate and timed practices the scoring procedure is as
follows:
a.
At the end of the practice or shoot, the RCO will ask for any protests.
b. Once protests have been dealt with or if there are no protests the
RCO will order the console operator to read out the scores. The console
operator will read out the number of hits by ranges or the total number of hits
in each lane. Once this has been done, the RCO will ask for any questions.
A competitor may ask for his score to be read out again. Scores recorded on
the console may not be challenged. Once the assessment is complete a butt
register will be printed out and signed by the firers.
c. If a competitor believes their lane is malfunctioning, it is to be brought
to the attention of the RCO. The RCO may, at his/her discretion, interrogate
SARTS to see if shots have been captured accurately. The RCO may
compare previous and later shoots on the lane in question. If the lane is
working correctly the score will stand. If any doubt exists, a re-shoot is to
be awarded and the lane will not be used until it has been investigated by a
qualified engineer.
d. The use of tough books may impact on time and therefore the decision
to use them is at the discretion of the Planning Officer, who should consider
the total number of firers and associated practices before making the decision.
Close Quarter Battle Style Scoring
1347. The RCO and his staff will go to the targets and record the number of hits.
This process will be witnessed by the firer. Range staff will order that no one touches
the target until they have evaluated the score, it has been agreed by the Team Captain
or individual competitor and has been recorded.
1348. As an alternative, competitors may be required to score for each other. In this
case, competitors will work in twos or threes. If working in threes, one competitor will
check the target, whilst another competitor records the number of hits. The firer will be
asked to agree or disagree. In case of doubt or disagreement the RCO will be called
to give a decision which will be final.
13-9
1349. In assessments where the target appears and disappears by mechanical

means a hit will NOT count, if the length of the hole exceeds twice the diameter of the
bullet. For the purpose of this rule twice the diameter of the 7.62 mm round will be 15
mm, in the case of the 9 mm round 18 mm and in the case of the 5.56 mm round 12
mm.
Challenges
1350. Challenges. A competitor or team has the right to challenge, once only, the
value of a hit or the score. A competitor or team may not challenge the score of
another competitor or team. Once challenged, the Butts IC is to check the target and
score. If the score was incorrect, the correct score will be recorded. If the original
score is proven to be correct, the challenge fee detailed below will be incurred. As
a guide the challenge fee might be; individual assessments - 5 points and team
assessments - 20 points.
Challenge Procedure.
a. The RCO will contact the Butt IC and the target will be lowered. The
spotting disc or discs removed and the target examined by the Butt IC. The
correct value (altered or not) will be signalled and the result confirmed by
telephone.
b.
If the original score is confirmed then the challenge fee is forfeited.
1351. Non-Scoring Area. A hit on the non-scoring area, i.e. outside the border of
the target will be signalled with a spotting disc, but without score.
Penalties
1352. General. Any competitor who is reported to the SPO for dangerous or
discreditable conduct on the ranges or in camp may be ordered, if the occurrence is
proved to the satisfaction of the SPO, to forfeit all entrance fees and prizes and/or to
be disqualified from the current and/or any future competition.
Procedure
1353. Warning. A member of the Range Team should warn a competitor who
appears to be about to break a rule, or is breaking a rule. This may occur at any stage
during an assessment. Depending on the infringement a penalty may be applied by
the RCO. In this instance, a competitor cannot protest about being disturbed by a
member of the Range Team.
1354. Dangerous Practice. For any dangerous practice, the firer will be immediately
stopped (except at discretion of the RCO during a fire and movement practice) and
ordered to unload. During a fire and movement practice the firer will NOT normally
be stopped until the detail stops at the next firing point. The penalty is disqualification
for that phase, practice or assessment, or in very bad cases from the whole meeting.
13-10
Disqualification
1355. All recommendations for disqualification will be referred by the RCOs to the
SPO who will confirm or reject the disqualification or impose a lesser penalty.
1356. Negligent Discharge. A negligent discharge is defined as any round fired
accidentally, unless it is fired at or in the direction of the target after the order Watch
and shoot has been given and before the order Unload has been given. If the
circumstances are such that the negligent discharge was due to any dangerous
practice, for example careless handling, the competitor will be reported to the SPO. In
the event of a negligent discharge, the competitor will invariably be disqualified from
the assessment, and a report forwarded to his unit. In all cases the Armourers report
is final. In the event of a negligent discharge, the weapon involved is to be removed
from the firer and handed to the Armourer by a member of the range staff.
Forfeiture and Deduction of Points
1357. The RCO and SPO are empowered to award a forfeiture of up to one fifth
of the HPS which could be made by an Individual or team in the practice or phase
(if this is possible) concerned, instead of disqualification, when they consider that
disqualification would be too harsh a penalty.
Illegal Modification of Weapon
1358. The RCO and/or the SPO has the authority to have a weapon inspected by
the Armourer at any time after a competitor has fired:
a. If any illegal modification is found, the score made in that assessment
will be disallowed. Further, the Armourer is to prepare a neglect, misuse and
damage report on AFN 9268 and forward it to the firers Commanding Officer.
The weapon is not to be used again until rectified.
b. If, on inspection, there is no illegal modification the firer may re-zero the
weapon and, where necessary, shoot any practices lost.
c. In the event of illegal weapon modifications being found by the Armourer
in the normal course of his duties, an AFN 9268 is to be forwarded to the
firers Commanding Officer. The weapon is not to be used until the illegal
modification has been rectified.
Weapon Breakages
1359. The OSC administrative instruction/calling notice should detail the criteria for
weapon breakage re-shoots. In the event of a breakage during an assessment, the
competitor is to inform a member of the Range Team who will summons to Armourer.
Subject to confirmation from the appointed OSC Armourer, the following breakages
during an assessment will warrant a reshoot:
a.
Extractor or Firing Pin damage.

13-11
Types of Target and Value of Hits

1360. General. The targetry and scoring areas covered in this section conform to
the LF shoots in Chapter 14. During competition planning, planners may consider
increasing scoring areas to suit the standard of competitor, however SARTS is
restricted to the scoring areas listed in this publication and cannot be modified.
1361. Figure 11. The target has 4 inscribed circles, 80 mm, 160 mm, 240 mm (blue)
and 300 mm. Diameter of circle and their scoring values are:
a. In Pistol and Rifle CQM assessments, a shot that touches or is within
the 80 mm circle scores 5, touching or within the 160 mm circle scores 4,
touching or within the 300 mm circle scores 3 and anywhere else on the
target scores 2. The blue circle (240 mm) is not used.
b. In all other Rifle assessments, the 240 mm (blue circle) is used. A
shot that touches, or is within the 240 mm circle scores 5 and a shot hitting
anywhere else on the target scores 4.
1362. Figure 12. This target has two inscribed circles, 300 mm and 240 mm. A shot
that touches, or is within the 240 mm circle scores 5 and a shot hitting anywhere else
on the target scores 4.
1363. Figure 12c. This target has two inscribed circles, 200 mm and 150 mm (older
versions may only have one 200mm circle). A shot that touches, or is within the 200
mm circle scores 5 and a shot hitting anywhere else on the target scores 4.
1364. Figure 14. This target has one inscribed circle which is 100 mm. A shot that
touches, or is within the 100 mm circle scores 5 and a shot hitting anywhere else on
the head scores 4.
1365. Figure 14 Window Target. It consists of a Fig 14 pasted on top of an inverted
Fig 12 cut off at the shoulder. It may be mounted on a Fig 11 or Fig 12 veneer. Scoring
areas are the 100 mm inscribed circle, the remainder of the head and anywhere else
on the window. A shot touching or inside the 100 mm circle scores 5, a shot on the
remainder of the head scores 4, and a shot anywhere else on the window scores 3.
1366. Figure 20 (Running Man). This target has one scoring rectangle which is
300 mm x 150 mm; a shot which touches or is inside this area scores 5. Remainder of
the body and the head above the bottom of the jacket scores 4. Legs below the bottom
of the jacket scores 3.
1367. Triple Fig 11. A standard Triple Fig 11 target. Scoring on the centre Fig 11 is
5 points for a hit within the 240 mm circle and 4 elsewhere on the target. Hits on the
flanking targets score 2 points.
13-12
1368. SARTS Suppression Triple Fig 11. The target consists of one Fig 11. A shot
that touches or is inside the 240 mm circle scores 5. A shot anywhere else on the Fig
11 scores 4 and anywhere else within a 1.22 metre circle from the centre of the target
scores 2.
1369. Fig 21 CQM Target. A standard Fig 21 CQM target using the scoring areas
to the body and head. Scoring is 5 inside the inner body area, 4 inside the outer body
area and on the remainder of the target, including the head 3 unless stated otherwise
in assessment conditions.
1370. Fig 22 CQM Target. A standard Fig 22 CQM target using the scoring areas
to the body and head. Scoring at 25, 20, 15 and 10m is 5 inside the inner body area,
4 inside the outer body area and 3 on the remainder of the target.
1371. Fig 26 CQM Target. A blank Fig 11 target with 8 x 185 mm black circles.
Scoring 5 if within or touching the nominated circle.
1372. Fig 27 CQM Target. A blank fig 11 target with 15 x 130 mm black circles.
Scoring 5 if within or touching the nominated circle.
1373. Fig 28 CQM Target. Scoring 5 inside the nominated coloured/numbered
circle.
Timing
1374. Where automated systems are not used, a stop-watch is to be used for the
timing of exposures or the duration of firing.
1375. Whenever possible, target exposures for rapid, snap and fire with movement
practices are to be timed by the IC Butts. When timing is carried out at the firing point,
and there is no mechanical means available a whistle is to be sounded as the signal
to indicate the time limit (except when stated otherwise in the assessment conditions).
1376. Timed Exposures. In a timed exposure the raising and lowering of targets is
to be carried out as quickly as possible. They are to be exposed straight up and down,
and are not to be twisted or turned . In all types of practices the exposure will be timed
from the moment the slowest target is up and stationary until the time the order is
given to lower the target. Targets exposed on a gallery range must be kept completely
below the mantlet until the order to expose is given. No verbal indication as to how the
time is passing is allowed.
13-13
Fig 11
Fig 14
Fig 20 Running Man
13-14
Fig 12
Fig 12c
Fig 14 Window Tgt
Triple Fig 11
Fig 22 CQM
Fig 21 CQM
Fig 26 CQM
Fig 27 CQM
Fig 28 CQM
13-15
1377. Electrical/Mechanical Target Control. On the electric target range or when

swivel target apparatus is used, the signal to fire will be the appearance of the target
or targets and the end will be the disappearance of the target or targets. The exposure
will be timed from the time the target or targets are full facing and will end when the
targets start to fall or turn side on. No indication of the passage of time or the end of
the time limit will be given.
1378. Exposure Timings. Time charts are provided in the relevant chapter. IC
Butts is to ensure competitors receive the full exposure times.
Guidance for Range Staff
1379. Principles. The whole tone of an OSC depends on the skill and efficiency of
the RCO, who is responsible for the detailed conduct of all firing on his range.
1380. The conditions of the assessment must be the same for all competitors. Under
no circumstances give a ruling which could have the effect of altering the conditions
in the middle of the assessment. If in doubt consult the SPO. Uniform conditions are
even more important when an assessment is being fired on more than one range.
1381. Competition shooting must be fun. Do all you can to keep it that way. If you
see a competitor is about to contravene a rule, it is your duty to warn him before the
practice begins.
1382. If there is still disagreement, the SPO should be consulted.
1383. Rules. RCOs cannot be expected to know every rule off by heart, but they
must have a working knowledge of the most important ones and know where to find
them. Before an assessment, the firing point staff must study the conditions for the
assessment, the firing point procedure and the general rules.
Statistical Staff (Stats)
1384. There is no mystery about the duties of the Stats Staff, but it is most important
that the work should be carefully planned beforehand.The use of flow charts will
facilitate the briefing of the Stats Staff and will help to eliminate errors.
1385. The checking of scores entered onto the squadding cards or butt registers
is a key aspect of ensuring that the correct Order of Merit is achieved successfully.
Consideration should be given to the use of simple Excel spreadsheets for inputting
data, sorting Order of Merit and publication of results. An example of a squadding
matrix is included as an enclosure to this publication.
1386. Recording. Quick and accurate display of scores is essential if interest is to
be maintained. The following information is required:
a.
13-16
On the range leading scores.
b. On the main score board every competitor name must appear on

the team score sheets. Put up provisional scores as soon as the cards have
been checked for accuracy and sorted. Maintain leader boards for team and
individual assessments.
c. Arithmetic errors found by Stats must be corrected on the cards and an
appropriate amendment made to the provisional score boards.
1387. Prize Giving. Take care when selecting assessments and aggregates eligible
for prizes, to avoid too many prizes going to the same individual or team. Hold formal
prize giving soon after the last shot has been fired and keep it as short as possible.
Staffing
1388. A Permanent Range Team (PRT) is required for an OSC, with standard range
appointments and additional staff nominated as Marshals, Runners, Stats IC etc. If
provision of markers for the gallery range proves difficult, then marking by competitors
should be organised. The simplest method being to put the last two details into the
butts and replace them at half time with the first two details. To reduce the requirement
for butt markers, consider making use of the electric target ranges.
1389. Marshalling. Efficient marshalling is critical to the success of the OSC.
A detailed example of the marshalling duties is included as an enclosure to this
publication.
Safety
1390. Operational Shooting Competitions are subject to normal range safety
procedures and it is imperative that the relevant rules and regulations are fully
enforced at all times.
Firing Point Procedure
1391. RCOs will require:
a.
Relevant sections of this publication and pamphlet 21.
b.
A copy of the competition programme.
c.
Binoculars.
d.
Stopwatch.
e.
Flag and armband (as required).
f.
Tags, message cards, last detail cards.
1392. Procedures for each assessment are as per the published conditions. Efficient
communications with the butts is essential and the procedures are to be rehearsed
thoroughly.
13-17
Squadding Cards
1393. When the decision has been made to employ squadding cards, careful
handling is essential to the smooth running of the OSC. The following points must be
kept in mind:
a. The Marshal is to ensure that the Rank, Name, Initials and Unit are
entered on each card.
b. The number of hits is to be entered in ink or ballpoint. Any alterations
are to be made clearly and initialled. Competitors and/or Team Captains are
to be given an opportunity to see their cards before the scores are cancelled
on the SARTS range or the targets patched out on the Gallery Range. No
alterations can be made to the number of hits recorded on the squadding
card once scores have been cancelled or targets patched out.
c. The RCO is to check and sign the card. Arithmetic should also be
checked by Stats or Marker.
d. Once the last detail for the period has been completed, attach a last
detail card to the bundle and ensure that all cards are dispatched to Stats.
Ammunition
1394. Detailed instructions regarding the handling of ammunition are issued
separately. RCOs are responsible for the following:
a. The ammunition point must be inside the firing point enclosure and
is to be closely supervised by the Marshal. In the absence of a Marshal
the ammunition point is to be located next to the RCOs table and is to be
supervised by the RCO or an assistant.
b. Checking the stock of ammunition to ensure it matches the voucher in
the possession of the ammunition point staff.
c. Ensuring that the ammunition point staff understand that they are not to
issue ammunition without express permission of the RCO.
d. Careful handling of ammunition to ensure that it reaches the competitor
in the best possible condition
e. Ensuring that un-fired rounds are collected from the competitors before
they are allowed to leave the firing point.
f.
Ensuring that all empty cases are collected and handed in by
competitors.
13-18
CHAPTER 14
ADVANCED OPERATIONAL MARKSMANSHIP
ASSESSMENTS
Scope
1401. This chapter includes a number
of advanced operational marksmanship
assessments designed to measure and
validate
operational
marksmanship
standards in a variety of conditions.
CONTENTS
SCOPE 14-1
LF ASSESSMENTS
14-1
DRESS AND EQUIPMENT
14-2
SARTS SCORING
14-2
1402. The assessments allow units to measure their Operational Marksmanship

Standards (OMS) on purpose built ranges where only limited resources are required.
They offer excellent training value and complement the LF Syllabus for rifle, pistol and
LSW with a focus on snap shooting from positions other than prone. Where time and
resources allow, the assessments should be conducted in order to gauge the units
marksmanship effectiveness and help to identify where additional practice is required.
1403. The shoots contained within this chapter form the basis for all Unit, Bde, Div
and Army Operational Shooting Competitions.
LF Assessments
1404. The following LF Assessments are included in this chapter:
a.
Rural Contact Assessment (p14-3)
b.
Defence Assessment (p14-7)
c.
Urban Contact Assessment (p14-11)
d.
Advance to Contact Assessment (p14-17)
e.
Advanced Fleeting Encounter Assessment (p14-22)
f.
Attack and Re-Organisation Assessment (p14-25)
g.
Fleeting Encounter Assessment (p14-30)
h.
Long Range Rural Contact Assessment (p14-33)
i.
Short Range Rural Contact Assessment (p14-37)
j.
Pistol CQM Assessment (p14-42)
k.
Fire-Team Falling Plates Assessment (p14-46)

14-1
l.
Fire-Team Combat Snap Shooting Assessment (p14-48)
m.
Fire-Team Close Combat Assessment (p14-52)
n.
Fire Team Attack Assessment (p14-56)
o.
Fire-Team Night Engagement Assessment (p14-61)
p.
Fire Team Advance to Contact Assessment (p14-64)
q.
Section Advance to Contact Assessment (p14-69)
r.
Section Attack Assessment (p14-74)
s.
The Machine Gun Assessment (p14-79)
t.
The Sniper Assessment (p14-83)
Dress and Equipment

1405. All assessments should be conducted in mission specific dress and
equipment.
SARTS Scoring
1406. Unless stipulated in assessment conditions. The following scoring areas will
be scored automatically by the Small Arms Range Targetry System (SARTS):
a. Suppression Fig 11 (Only a single fig will be seen by the firer). Within
240mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else on target 4 and
anywhere off target but within a 1.22m circle from the centre of the target 2.
b. Fig 11, within 240mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else on
target 4.
c. Fig 12, within 240mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else on
target 4.
d. Fig 12c, within 200mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else
on target 4.
e. Fig 14, within 100mm from the centre of the target 5, anywhere else on
target 4.
14-2
The Rural Contact Assessment

1407. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a four practice shoot
designed to replicate rural engagements likely to be encountered on operations.
1408. Ranges. The assessment must be fired on a gallery range.
1409. Time Chart. A time chart to assist range staff is included after the practice
details.
1410. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 30 minutes to complete.
1411. Organisation. The shoot can be fired by each detail completing all practices
before firing details change or by all details completing each practice before
commencing further practices.
1412. Rules. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for
their weapon system before the assessment is fired.
1413. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in four magazines of 10 rounds.
1414. Targetry. Each lane will require:
1 x Triple Fig 11.
1 x Fig 11.
1 x Fig 12.
SARTS Fig 11 left (also providing suppression fig solution) Fig 12 right.
1415. Scoring.
Suppression Fig 11, 5, 4, 2 points per hit.
Fig 11. 5 and 4 points per hit.
14-3
1416. Standards. To achieve the required standard the firer must achieve the OMS
at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement
will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual
practices may be fired again.
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
Practice 2
10
60%
30
50
Practice 3
10
60%
30
50
Practice 4
10
60%
30
50
120
200
Pass
OMS Requirement

a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure safety catches are applied before
any movement between firing positions.
b.
Scores will be given at the end of each practice.
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-4
Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.

Order Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch out.
On the appearance of the targets firers are to adopt the prone position
open fire with 10 rounds. Targets Up and Hold.
Post practice order. Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear
(once clear) ease springs, pick up brass and await scores.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
500m to 100m Run down.

500m and 300m Prone.
400m and 200m Sitting, Kneeling or Squatting.
100m Standing.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
500m Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.
400m Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
300m, 200m and 100m Fig 12.

1 exposure of 15 seconds followed by
Instructions
4 x 45 second exposures with 15 second intervals.

Order Load, ready adopt the standing alert position, watch out.
On the appearance of the targets firers are to adopt the prone position
and fire 2 rounds. The next 4x exposures of 45 seconds are the signal
to run to the next firing point and engage the target with 2 rounds from
the nominated position. Targets Up and Hold.
Post practice order.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear (once clear) ease
springs, pick up brass, return to 200m and await scores.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
200m Kneeling or Squatting for first exposure, prone for the second
exposure.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x 20 second exposure followed 8 seconds later by 1 x 15 second

exposure of a Fig 12.
Order Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch out.
On the appearance of the targets firers are to adopt the kneeling or
squatting position for the first exposure and then immediately adopt
the prone position for the second exposure, fire 5 rounds at each
exposure. Targets Up and Hold.
springs, pick up brass, move back to 300m and await scores.
14-5
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
10 x 3 second exposures over 4 minutes.
Order Load, ready, adopt the prone position, watch and shoot.
On the appearance of the targets firers are to engage each exposure
with 1 round. Targets Fall when Hit.
The Rural Contact Assessment

Time Chart
Practice
Range
Target Frame
500m
500m-400m
Triple Fig 11
(SARTS suppression
Fig 11) Up and Hold
Triple
Fig
11(SARTS
suppression Fig 11)
Up and Hold
14-6
300m-100m
Fig 12
Up and Hold
200m
300m
1 x Fig 11
1 x Fig 12
Up and Hold
Fig 12.
Fall when Hit
Timings
Up
Down
05
1.06
05
36
21
1.22
1.37
2.38
3.39
05
35
2.23
3.24
4.25
26
51
05
30
1.05
1.35
2.10
2.25
2.40
2.59
3.20
3.54
09
34
1.09
1.39
2.14
2.29
2.44
3.03
3.24
3.58
The Defence Assessment

designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered on operations.
1419. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on an ETR.
details.
1422. Organisation. The assessment is an individual defence shoot preceded by
a 100 metre run to simulate a rapid deployment during a stand to. Firers have 25
seconds to arrive at the stand to position.
1425. Targetry.
1 x Fig 14 at 100 metres
1426. Scoring. Four points per hit.
at each practice (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will
constitute failure of the Assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment individual
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1
10
60%
24
40
Practice 2
10
60%
24
40
Practice 3
10
60%
24
40
Practice 4
10
60%
24
40
96
160
Pass
OMS Requirement
14-7

b.
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m-300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
100m Fig 14.

200m Fig 12.
300m Fig 12.
1 x 25 second Exposure followed by 2 x 3 second exposures at 100m.
1 x 6 second exposure at 200m.
4 x 4 second exposures at 300m.
100m from firing point.
Instructions
Order Load, adopt the standing alert position, watch out. When
targets appear firers are to run to the firing point, adopt the prone
position, make ready and open fire with one round at each exposure at
100m. Fall when hit.
3 rounds at the single exposure at 200m. Up and hold.
1 round at each exposure at 300m. Fall when hit.
Make safe, dress in to the fire trench and await scores.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
100m-300m Fire Trench.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
100m Fig 14.

200m Fig 12.
300m Fig 12.
Instructions
14-8
1 x 4 second exposure at 300m, followed by 9 random exposures at

100m for 2 seconds, 200m for 3 seconds or 300m for 4 seconds.
Order Ready, adopt the standing supported position, watch and
shoot. When the targets appear the firer is to engage with 1 round per
exposure. Targets Fall when hit.
Make safe, dress out of the fire trench and await scores.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
100m-300m Kneeling Supported.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
100m Fig 14.
200m Fig 12.
300m Fig 12.
Target/ Exposure
5 x double exposures of 6 seconds for the first target and 3 seconds

for the second target.
15 seconds between each double exposure.
Instructions
Targets will appear in random order with a minimum of 4 exposures at

300m, 3 at 200m and 3 at 100m.
3m behind the firing point. Order Ready, adopt the standing alert
position, watch out. When the targets appear the firer is to move
onto the firing point, adopt the kneeling supported position and engage
with 1 round. The firer is to remain in the kneeling supported position
and fire 1 round at the next exposure.
After each second exposure the firer is to apply the safety catch and
return to the standing alert position 3m behind the firing point.
Targets Fall when Hit.
Make safe, await scores.
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
100m-200m Standing, Kneeling or Squatting.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
100m Fig 14.

200m Fig 12.
5 x 4 second exposures at 200m and 5 x 3 second exposures at 100m,
in random order.
Order Ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch out.
During each exposure firers are to fire 1 round from the standing,
kneeling or squatting position.
Firers must return to the standing alert position after each exposure
springs, pick up brass and await scores.
14-9
The Defence Assessment Time Chart

Practice
Range
100m
100m
100m
200m
300m
300m
300m
300m
300m
200m
300m
100m
300m
100m
200m
100m
300m
200m
200m
300m
Target Frame
Fig 14 Fall when Hit
Fig 12 Up and Hold
Fig 12 Fall when Hit
Fig 14 and Fig 12

Fall when Hit
Fig 14 and Fig 12

Fall when Hit
100m
200m
300m
100m
300m
200m
100m
300m
4
14-10
100m
200m
100m
200m
200m
100m
200m
100m
100m
200m
Fig 14 and Fig 12

Fall when Hit
Up
05
35
44
53
1.05
1.14
1.23
1.32
05
12
18
25
30
37
42
48
53
1.00
05
14
33
42
1.01
1.10
1.29
1.38
1.57
2.06
05
20
35
52
1.15
1.33
1.47
2.05
2.20
2.38
Timings
Down
31
39
48
60
1.10
1.19
1.28
1.37
10
16
23
28
35
40
46
51
58
1.04
12
18
40
46
1.08
1.14
1.36
1.42
2.04
2.10
09
25
39
57
1.20
1.37
1.52
2.09
2.24
2.43
The Urban Contact Assessment

1429. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous four phase
shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered in urban conditions on
operations.
1430. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on a 100 metre range.
details. Each phase has been separated to allow the RCO to control the speed
depending on the level of experience of the firers.
1433. Organisation. The assessment is an individual CQB shoot.
a.
The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in 4 phases.
b.
The assessment can be conducted with the rifle, LSW and pistol.
1434. Rules
a. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their
weapon system before the assessment is fired.
b.
All pistols must be holstered in accordance with current publications.
c. Only the number of shots permitted can be fired at each exposure.

Rounds can not be carried forward into the next practice.
1435. Ammunition.
40 rounds of 5.56mm Ball in two magazines of 20 rounds.
40 rounds of 9mm Ball in four magazines of 10 rounds.
1 x Fig 11 target at 100 and 75 metres (Target 1)
1 x Fig 14 window target at 50 metres (Target 2 upper)
1 x Fig 14 window target at 25 metres (Target 2 lower)
14-11
1437. Scoring.
Phase 1 scoring 5, 4, 3 or 2 points per hit.
Phase 2 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points per hit.
Phase 3 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points per hit.
Phase 4 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points in the head or 3, 2 or 1 points in the body.
at each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will
constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions
the entire shoot should be fired again.
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1 + 2
40
60%
120
200
Practice 3 + 4
40
60%
120
200
240
400
Pass

any movement between firing positions. The RCO is to issue all words of
commands for magazine changes.
b.
Scores will be recorded at the end of Phase 4.
Assessment Details
Phase 1a.
Range/Positioning
100m Standing Supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11.
1 x 8 second exposure, followed by 4 x 3 second exposures.
3 metres behind the firing point. Order Secondary weapon system
(pistol), load, ready, return pistol. Primary weapon system, load,
ready, adopt the standing alert position, phase 1 watch out.
When targets appear firers are to advance to the 100m firing point,
adopt the standing supported position and fire two rounds at each
exposure.
Post phase 1a order.
Phase 1b, watch out.
14-12
Phase 1b.
Range/Positioning
75m Kneeling Supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11.
When the targets appear the firer is to move to the 75m firing point and
adopt the kneeling supported position.
On the next two exposures of the target the firer is to engage with 5
rounds per exposure.
Post phase 1b order.
Primary weapon system make safe, ready, phase 2a watch out.
Phase 2a.
Range/Positioning
50m Kneeling or Squatting Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 14 window
(upper).
Instructions

When the target appears the firer is to move to the 50m firing point
and adopt the standing position. On the next 5 exposures the firer is to
engage the target with 1 round from the standing position immediately
followed by 1 round from either the kneeling or squatting position. The
firer is to return to the standing alert position after each exposure.
Post phase 2a order.
Phase 2b, watch out.
Phase 2b.
Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 14 window (lower).

When the target appears the firer is to move to the 25m firing point and
adopt the standing position. On the next five exposures the firer is to
engage the target with 2 rounds from the standing position. The firer is
to return to the standing alert position after each exposure.
Post phase 2b order.
Ensure your safety catch is applied and sling your rifle.
Draw pistols, adopt the standing alert position, phase 3a, watch
and shoot.
14-13
Phase 3a.
Range/Positioning
25m Standing and Kneeling
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 21.
2 x 5 second exposures.
On the appearance of the target the firer is to engage the target with
5 rounds from the standing position. The firer is then to adopt the
kneeling position and on the next exposure is to engage the target
with 5 rounds from the kneeling position. Firers should remain in the
kneeling position at the end of the Phase.
Post phase 3a order Make safe, Sig Sauer and GSP ready, Sig
Sauer de-cock return pistols, GSP return pistols, phase 3b watch
out.
Phase 3b.
Range/Positioning
20m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 21
1 x 1 second exposure followed by 5 x 3 second exposures.
When the target appears the firer is to move to the 20m firing point,
draw pistol and adopt the standing alert position. On the next and
subsequent exposure the firer is to engage the target with 2 rounds
from the standing position. Firers are to return to the standing alert
position after each exposure. Firers should remain in the standing
position at the end of the Phase.
Post phase 3b order Make Safe, ready, return pistols, phase 4a
watch out
Phase 4a.
Range/Positioning
15m Standing and Kneeling
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-14
Fig 22.
draw pistol (make ready browning) and adopt the standing alert
position. On the appearance of the target the firer is to engage with 5
rounds from the standing position. The firer should then immediately
adopt the kneeling position and engage the next exposure with a
further 5 rounds. Firers should remain in the kneeling position at the
end of the Phase.
Post phase 4a order Make Safe, ready, return pistols, phase 4b
watch out..
Phase 4b.
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 22.
draw pistol and adopt the standing alert position
On the next 5 x exposures the firer is to engage the target with 2
rounds from the standing position.
The firer is to return to the standing alert position between exposures.
Post phase 4b order Secondary weapon systems unload, for
inspection draw pistols, show clear (once clear) ease springs
return pistols. Primary weapon systems unload, for inspection
port arms, show clear (once clear) ease springs, and await
scoring instructions.
14-15
The Urban Contact Assessment

Time Chart
Practice
Range
1a
100m
Fig 11
1b
75m
Fig 11
2a
50m
Fig 14 Window
(upper)
2b
25m
Fig 14 Window
(lower)
3a
25m
Fig 21
3b
20m
Fig 21
4a
15m
Fig 22
4b
10m
Fig 22
14-16
Target Frame
Timings
Up
Down
05
18
27
35
47
05
25
42
05
25
45
1.02
1.33
1.45
05
20
30
44
57
1.09
05
18
05
20
30
44
57
1.09
05
20
34
05
22
32
46
57
1.07
14
22
31
39
51
06
32
49
06
31
51
108
1.39
1.51
06
24
34
48
1.01
1.13
11
24
06
24
34
48
1.01
1.13
06
25
39
06
26
36
50
1.01
1.11
Advance To Contact Assessment

1440. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous five phase
shoot designed to replicate situations likely to be encountered on operations.
1441. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on a Gallery range.
details.
1443. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 25 minutes to complete. This
includes the 500m approach march.
1444. Organisation. The assessment is an individual advance to contact shoot
preceded by a 500m run to simulate the rapid deployment of a QRF. Firers have 3
minutes to complete the run, plus a maximum of 1 minute to assemble at the line of
departure (500m firing point). The additional 1 minute is to be adjusted according to
the distance of the 500m point from the finish line.
a. Anyone not completing the run within 3 minutes will be deemed to have
failed the test.
b.
The test is a continuous fire and movement shoot fired in five phases.
1445. Rules.
b. Only one shot is to be fired at each Fall when Hit exposure in Phases
1, 2 and 3. Any unfired rounds may not be fired during subsequent phases.
1446. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in one magazine of 20 rounds and two
magazines of 10 rounds.
2 x Fig 12.
1448. Scoring. Four point per hit.
for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will
14-17
OMS Requirement
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
500m
3 mins
3 mins
Phase 2
10
60%
24
40
Phase 3
10
60%
24
40
Phase 4
10
60%
24
40
Phase 5
10
60%
24
40
120
200
Pass

b. It is the firers responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for
each practice.
Assessment Details
Phase 1. QRF Deployment
Range/Positioning
500m Run
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Firers are to have all equipment for the assessment including ammo.
On the command Go firers have 3 minutes to run 500m, plus up to 1
minute to arrive at the 500m firing point and adopt the prone position.
At the 500m firing point. Order Load, phase 2 watch out.
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-18
Fig 12.
1 x 40 second Exposure followed by 9 x 3 second Exposures.
On the appearance of the target firers have 40 seconds to advance to
the 400m firing point, adopt the prone position, make ready and fire 1
round at each exposure. Targets Fall When Hit.
Phase 3 watch out.
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
300m Fire Trench
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
1 x 40 second Exposure followed 2 seconds later by 1 1 x 4 second
exposure.
This is followed by four double exposures of the left and right Fig 12 in
that order.
Each exposure is for 4 seconds with 2 seconds between each
exposure.
On the appearance of the target firers have 40 seconds to advance to
the 300m firing point dress in to the fire trench and open fire.
There will be a further 9 x 4 second exposures.
Firers are to fire one round at each exposure.
Targets Fall When Hit.
Phase 4, watch out.
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
200m Standing, Kneeling or Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
exposures.
The appearance of the target for 1 second is the signal for firers to
advance to the 200m firing point and adopt the standing alert position.
There will be 10 x 4 second exposures.
At each exposure firers are to adopt the standing/kneeling/ squatting
position and engage the target, returning to the standing alert position
between exposures. Targets Fall When Hit.
Phase 5, watch out.
Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
100m Standing Unsupported.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 12
Target/ Exposure

exposures.
14-19
Instructions
The appearance of the target for 1 second is the signal for firers to
advance to the 100m firing point and adopt the kneeling or squatting
position.
There will be 5 x 5 second exposures, at each exposure firers are to
adopt the standing position and fire 2 rounds, returning to the kneeling/
squatting position between exposures.
Post phase order.
springs, pick up brass, return to the 500m firing point and await
scores.
Advance to Contact Assessment

Time Chart
Practice
Range
500m Run
400m
Target Frame
Down
05
47
1.00
1.08
2.00
2.15
2.40
3.50
4.30
4.57
46
51
1.04
1.12
2.04
2.19
2.44
3.54
4.34
5.01
Run
Move to firing point
(re-set watch)
Fig 12
Tgt 1 (R)
Tgt 2 (L)
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Fall When Hit
14-20
Timings
Up
Practice
Range
300m
Target Frame
200m
100m
04
47
54
1.01
1.08
1.15
1.22
1.29
1.36
1.43
45
52
59
1.06
1.13
1.20
1.27
1.34
1.41
1.48
25
55
1.09
1.20
1.40
2.04
2.22
2.36
2.59
3.18
3.40
26
1.00
1.14
1.25
1.45
2.09
2.27
2.41
3.04
3.23
3.45
05
40
51
1.16
1.30
1.50
07
46
57
1.22
1.36
1.56
Fall When Hit

Fig 12
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Down
Fig 12
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Tgt 1
Tgt 2
Timings
Up
Fall When Hit

Fig 12
Tgt 1
Tgt 1
Tgt 1
Tgt 1
Tgt 1
Up and Hold
14-21
The Advanced Fleeting Encounter Assessment

1451. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a three phase shoot
designed to assess the soldier in the engagement of moving targets from alternate
pieces of cover in situations likely to be encountered on operations.
1452. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on an MMTTR.
details.
1455. Organisation. The assessment is an individual moving target shoot fired
from different pieces of cover at varying ranges. It is fired in three phases.
a.
A maximum of two rounds may be fired at each exposure.
b.
Bayonets will be fitted during phases 2 and 3.
1457. Ammunition. 40 rounds per firer, in one magazine of 24 rounds and one
1458. Targetry and Scoring. There is no SARTS scoring solution for fig 20s on
this shoot. A single Fig 11 target is to be used scoring 5 within the 160mm circle, 4
within the 300mm circle and 3 anywhere else on the target.A SARTS solution maybe
available in the future.
(see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure
of the assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions the entire shoot
should be fired again.
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1
24
60%
72
120
Phase 2
60%
24
40
Phase 3
60%
24
40
60%
120
200
Total
OMS Requirement

b. The Range Staff are to inspect all bayonets prior to firing to ensure the
blade is not bent.
14-22
c. It is the firers responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for

each phase.
d.
Minimal words of command will be issued.
e.
Scores will be given at the end of Phase 3.
Assessment Details
Phase 1.
Range/Positioning
100m. As per the range furniture.
Ammunition
24 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11
6 double exposures (50% slow / 50% fast in random order).
An initial exposure of the target will initiate the contact.
Targets are only exposed once firers are in position and the RCO has
signalled to the target operator for the next double exposure..
3m to the rear of the left piece of cover.
Order Load, ready.
On the appearance of the target the firer is to double forward and take
cover. The firer will then receive 2 exposures of the Fig 20 and is to fire
2 rounds at the leading target for each exposure.
After each second exposure the firer is to apply the safety catch and
On completion of the last exposure the firer is to apply the safety catch
and await further orders.
Post practice order Move to the left side of the wall, fix bayonets,
phase 2, advance.
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
90m
80m
70m
60m
Standing
Ammunition
8 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11
4 exposures (two fast and two slow) in random order.
Targets should be exposed during the advance on signal from the
RCO.
There will be 4 exposures of the target during the advance. Firers are
to fire 2 rounds at the leading target during each exposure from the
standing position.
Firers will be ordered to advance after each exposure.
Post practice order Move to the 50m firing point, phase 3 watch
and shoot.
14-23
The Advanced Fleeting Encounter Assessment

Time Chart
Phase
Range
100m
Target Frame
Fig 11
First target. (non
firing)
Run
When in
place
Fast
Slow
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Slow
Fast
ON COMMAND
FROM RCO.
Once firers are in
position.
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
90m
80m
70m
60m
50m
Fig 11
ON COMMAND
FROM RCO,
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
Fig 11
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
14-24
Fast
When in
place
When in
place
Fast
Slow
Slow
Fast
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
The Attack and Re-Organisation Assessment

1461. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous three
phase shoot designed to replicate attack and re-organisation situations likely to be
encountered on operations.
1462. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on an ETR.
details.
1465. Organisation. The assessment is an individual attack and re-organisation
shoot preceded by a 100 metre run to simulate the physical conditions encountered
during the final phase of an attack. Firers have 25 seconds to arrive on the objective.
The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in three phases.
1466. Rules
b. Any number of shots (a minimum of one) may be fired at each exposure
during Phase 1. Only one shot is to be fired at each Fall when Hit exposure
in Phases 2 and 3. Any unfired rounds may not be fired during subsequent
phases.
1467. Ammunition. 50 rounds per firer in one magazine of 20 rounds and three
1469. Scoring. Four points per hit.
for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will
14-25
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1
30
60%
72
120
Phase 2
10
60%
24
40
Phase 3
10
60%
24
40
120
200
Total

each phase.
c.
Assessment Details
Phase 1a.
Range/Positioning
100m
200m
300m
Prone.
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
100m Fig 14.

200m Fig 12.
300m Fig 12.
Instructions
1 x 25 second exposure at 100m, followed by 1 x 10 second exposure

at 200m and 1 x 25 second exposure at 300m.
100m to the rear of the firing point.
Order Load, phase 1a watch out.
When targets appear firers are to run to the firing point, adopt the
prone position, make ready and engage the 100m target.
Any number of rounds, up to a maximum of 20 may be fired at each
exposure during this phase.
Targets Up and hold.
Post phase order.
Phase 1b watch out.
14-26
Phase 1b.
Range/Positioning
300m
200m
Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200m Fig 12.

300m Fig 12.
10 x 3 second exposures at 300m or 200m in random order over a
period of 7 minutes.
15 seconds after the last exposure of Phase 1a the first exposure from
Phase 1b will appear.
When the targets appear the firer is to engage with one round per
exposure. Targets Fall when Hit.
Post phase order.
Stand up, dress back 3m phase 2 watch out.
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
300m
200m
100m
Kneeling Supported.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
100m Fig 14.
200m Fig 12.
300m Fig 12.
Target/ Exposure
1 x 6 second exposure at 300m followed by three series of exposures

at 300m, 200m and 100m in that order.
Each exposure is for 2 seconds with 5 seconds between each
exposure.
Instructions
There will be irregular intervals between each series of exposures.

When the target appears the firer is to move on to the firing point and
adopt the kneeling supported position and engage each exposure with
one round. The firer is to remain in this position until the end of the
phase.
Post phase order Adopt the sitting position, phase 3 watch out.
14-27
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
300m
200m
Sitting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-28
300m Fig 12.

200m Fig 12.
5 double exposures of the 300m and then the 200m target.
The 300m target will be up for 3 seconds followed 2 seconds later by a
3 second exposure of the 200m target.
Firers are to fire one round at each exposure.
Post phase order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear
(once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, await scores.
The Attack and Reorganisation Assessment

Time Chart
Phase
Range
1a
100
200
300
300
200
200
300
200
300
300
200
200
300
300
300
200
100
300
200
100
300
200
100
300
200
300
200
300
200
300
200
300
200
1b
Target Frame
Fig 14 Fig 12
Up and Hold
Fig 12
Fall when Hit
Fig 14 and Fig 12

Fall when Hit
Fig 12
Fall when Hit
Timings
Up
Down
05
33
46
1.27
2.37
2.45
3.43
4.31
5.39
5.47
6.40
7.28
8.41
05
26
34
42
1.05
1.13
1.21
1.39
1.47
1.55
05
11
20
26
45
51
1.15
1.21
1.35
1.41
31
44
1.12
1.31
2.41
2.49
3.47
4.35
5.43
5.51
6.44
7.32
8.45
12
29
37
45
1.08
1.16
1.24
1.42
1.50
1.58
09
15
24
30
49
55
1.19
1.25
1.39
1.45
14-29
The Fleeting Encounter Assessment

1472. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is designed to assess the
soldier in the engagement of moving targets in situations likely to be encountered on
operations.
1473. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on an MMTTR.
details.
1476. Organisation. The assessment is an individual moving target shoot preceded
by four sighting shots. The assessment can be conducted with the rifle only.
1477. Rules.
b. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches
applied.
c.
A maximum of one round may be fired at each exposure.
1478. Ammunition. 14 rounds in one magazine of 4 rounds and one magazine of

10 rounds.
There is no SARTS scoring solution for fig 20s on this shoot. A single Fig 11
target is to be used scoring 5 within the 160mm circle, 4 within the 300mm
circle and 3 anywhere else on the target.A SARTS scoring solution maybe
available in the future.
1480. Scoring. 5, 4, 3 points per hit.
(see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure
of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the entire assessment
should be fired again.
14-30
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Sighting
Non Scoring
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50

a. It is the firers responsibility to ensure they have sufficient rounds for
each phase.
b.
Scores will be given at the end of the shoot.
Assessment Details
Practice - Sighting shots
Range/Positioning
100m Standing
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11
There will be 4 x runs for sighting shots. 2 x slow and 2 x fast
Order Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, watch and
shoot.
When targets appear firers are to open fire with one round per
exposure.
After 4 runs order Apply safety catches Show results on SARTS.
Once complete order Adopt the standing alert position, Watch and
shoot
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11
There will be 10 x runs, 5 x fast and 5 x slow in random order.
When the target appears firers are to open fire with one round per
exposure. After the last run order unload for inspection port arms
(once clear) ease springs, pick up the brass await scores
Give scores
14-31
The Fleeting Encounter Assessment

Time Chart
Practice
Range
100
Target Frame
Fig 11
L to R or R to L
100
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
Fig 11
L to R or R to L
Slow Speed 2
Fast Speed 3
14-32
Timings
Up
Over 1
minute
Over 2-3 mi
nutes
Down
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
Fast
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
The Long Range Rural Contact Assessment

designed to replicate long range engagements likely to be encountered on operations.
details.
their weapon system before the assessment is fired. Once made ready, all movement
must be conducted with safety catches applied.
1 x Triple Fig 11.
1 x Fig 11.
1 x Fig 12.
SARTS Fig 11 left, Fig 12 right.
1491. Scoring.
Triple Fig 11(SARTS suppression fig 11) 5, 4, 2 points per hit.
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
Practice 2
10
60%
30
50
Practice 3
10
60%
30
50
Practice 4
10
60%
30
50
120
200
Pass
OMS Requirement
14-33

b.
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
500m Prone
10
Rounds
Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.
Order Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, practice 1
watch out. On the appearance of the targets
firers are to adopt the prone position open fire with 10 rounds. Targets
Up and Hold.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
500 300m
Run down
500m Prone 400m Sitting, kneeling or squatting
300m prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression fig 11 at 500m and 400m.
Fig 12 at 300m.
1 x exposure of 15 seconds at 500m.
Target/ Exposure
10 seconds later 1 x 1 second exposure, an interval of 30 seconds (run

down). Then 2 x exposures of 6 seconds.
Followed by
down). Then 2 x exposures of 6 seconds.
14-34
Instructions

watch out When targets appear firers are to adopt the prone position
and fire 2 rounds.
The next exposure of 1 second is the signal to run to the 400m firing
point, adopt the sitting, kneeling or squatting position and engage the
next two exposures with 2 rounds per exposure.
The next exposure of 1 second is the signal to run to the 300m firing
point, adopt the prone position and engage the next two exposures
with 2 rounds per exposure.
Targets Up and Hold.
springs, pick up brass, and await scores.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1x 15 second exposure of Fig 11 followed 8 seconds later by a further

15 second exposure of a Fig 12.
watch out
On appearance of the target firers are to adopt the prone position. Fire
5 rounds at each exposure. Targets Up and Hold.
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
400m Sitting, Kneeling or Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Triple Fig 11 or SARTS virtual triple Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x 15 second exposure followed by 4 x 5 second exposures, with

irregular intervals between exposures.
watch out
On the appearance of the target firers are to adopt the sitting, kneeling
or squatting position (remaining in position) and fire two rounds at each
exposure.
14-35
The Long Range Rural Contact Assessment

Time Chart
Practice
Range
Target Frame
500m
500m and
400m
300m
Triple Fig 11(SARTS

suppression Fig 11)
Up and Hold
Triple Fig 11(SARTS
suppression Fig 11)
Up and Hold
14-36
300m
400m
Fig 12
Up and Hold
1 x Fig 11
1x Fig 12
Up and Hold
Triple Fig 11(SARTS
suppression Fig 11)
Up and Hold
Up
05
Timings
Down
1.06
05
31
1.02
1.13
1.30
21
32
1.09
1.20
1.31
2.02
2.13
05
29
2.09
2.20
21
45
05
28
45
55
1.06
21
34
51
1.01
1.12
The Short Range Rural Contact Assessment

1494. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a five practice shoot
designed to replicate short range engagements likely to be encountered on operations.
details.
14100. Ammunition. 50 rounds per firer.
1 x Figure 12.
1 x Fig 12c.
SARTS Fig 12 Right, Fig 12c Left.
14102. Scoring. 5 and 4 points per hit.
Ser
Practice
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Practice 1
10
60%
30
50
Practice 2
10
60%
30
50
Practice 3
10
60%
30
50
Practice 4
10
60%
30
50
Practice 5
10
60%
Pass
OMS Requirement
30
50
150
250
14-37

b.
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12
1 x 60 second exposure
3 metres behind the firing point Order Load, ready, adopt the
standing alert position, practice 1 watch out.
On the appearance of the target firers are to move onto the firing point,
adopt the prone position and engage with 10 rounds. Targets Up and
Hold.
Order.
Practice 2.
Range/Positioning
300 100m run down,

300m Prone, 200m Sitting, kneeling or squatting. 100m Standing.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 12
1 x exposure of 15 seconds at 300m.
Target/ Exposure

down). Then 2 x exposures of 6 seconds with a 10 second interval.
Followed by.
down). Then 2 x exposures of 6 seconds with a 10 second interval.
14-38
Instructions

watch out.
On the appearance of the target firers are to adopt the prone position
and engage the 15 second exposure with 2 rounds. The next exposure
of 1 second is the signal to run to the 200m firing point and adopt
the sitting, kneeling or squatting position and engage the next two
exposures with 2 rounds per exposure. The next exposure of 1
second is the signal to run to the 100m firing point, adopt the standing
alert position and engage the next two exposures with 2 rounds per
exposure. Targets Up and Hold.
Practice 3.
Range/Positioning
100m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12c
5 x double exposures of 3 seconds with 2 seconds between each
exposure.
There will be irregular intervals between double exposures.
watch and shoot.
On the appearance of the target firers are to engage the first exposure
from the standing position then immediately adopt the kneeling or
squatting position and engage the second exposure. Firers are to
return to the standing alert position after each double exposure.
14-39
Practice 4.
Range/Positioning
200m Sitting, kneeling or squatting.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
2 x 15 second exposures with an interval of 8 seconds.
watch out.
On the appearance of the target firers are to adopt the sitting, kneeling
or squatting position and engage each exposure with 5 rounds.
Practice 5.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-40
Fig 12.
Order Load, ready, adopt the prone position, practice 5 watch
and shoot.
Firers are to engage each exposure with one round.
The Short Range Rural Contact Assessment

Time Chart
Practice
Range
300m
300m
100m
100m
200m
300m
Target Frame
Figure 12
Up and Hold
Figure 12
Up and Hold
Figure 12c
Up and Hold
Figure 12
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
05
1.06
05
31
1.03
1.21
1.39
2.11
2.29
05
11
23
29
1.00
1.06
1.15
1.21
1.52
1.58
05
29
05
40
1.10
1.40
2.30
3.05
3.30
4.10
4.45
4. 56
21
32
1.10
1.28
1.40
2.18
2.36
09
15
27
33
1.04
1.10
1.19
1.25
1.56
2.02
21
45
09
44
1.14
1.44
2.34
3.09
3.34
4.14
4.49
5. 00
14-41
The Pistol CQM Assessment

14105. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a four phase shoot designed
to replicate situations likely to be encountered in CQM conditions on operations.
14106. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on a 25 metre range.
details.
14109. Organisation. The match is an individual CQM assessment.
a.
The assessment can be conducted with the L131A1 GSP.
14110. Rules.
a. Firers must have zeroed their weapon and passed the ACMT for their
b. Only the number of shots permitted can be fired at each exposure.
Rounds can not be carried forward into the next practice.
14111. Ammunition. 40 rounds of 9mm Ball in four magazines of 10 rounds.
2 x Fig 21 CQM targets at 25m and 20m
1 x Fig 28 or 27 CQM target at 15m
1 x Fig 22 CQM target at 10m
14113. Scoring.
Practice 1 & 2 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points per hit.
Practice 3 scoring 5 points for each correct shape or circle hit. A maximum of
2 shots on each shape or circle will score.
Practice 4 scoring 5, 4 or 3 points in the head or 3, 2 or 1 point in the body.
14-42
Ser
Phase
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1
10
60%
30
50
Phase 2
10
60%
30
50
Phase 3
10
60%
30
50
Phase 4
10
60%
30
50
120
200
Pass

a. The RCO is to issue all words of command, all movement is to be with
pistols holstered.
b.
Scores will be taken at the end of phase 4.
Assessment Details
Phase 1. Accelerated Fire
Range/Positioning
25m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 21.
Target No 1.
Instructions
2 x 6 second exposures with a 4 second interval.

Order Load, ready, adopt the standing alert position, target
number 1, watch and shoot.
During each exposure firers are to fire five shots to the body.
Make safe, ready, return pistols, advance to 20m.
Phase 2. Accelerated Fire

Range/Positioning
20m Standing.
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 21.
Target No 2.
Instructions

Order Draw pistols, adopt the standing alert position, target
During each exposure firers are to fire two shots to the body.
Make safe, ready, return pistols, advance to 15m
14-43
Phase 3. Shot accountability

Range/Positioning
15m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 28 or 27.
Target No 3.
Instructions
Targets exposed on orders from RCO.
Blue circle, number 5, 1 A (black dots) etc
During each exposure firers are to fire two shots at each shape,
number or circle as indicated by The RCO.
Make safe, ready, return pistols, advance to 10m.
Phase 4. CQM
Range/Positioning
10m Standing
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Fig 22.
Target No 4.
Instructions

During each exposure firers are to fire two shots to the body or the
head.
Unload, for inspection draw pistols, show clear, (once clear) ease
springs, return pistols.
Record scores.
14-44
The Pistol CQM Assessment

Time Chart
Practice
Range
25m
20m
15m
10m
Target Frame
Target No 1
Fig 21
Target No 2
Fig 21
Target No 3
Fig 28/27
Target No 4
Fig 21
Timings
Up
Down
05
12
16
23
05
09
15
19
31
35
46
50
55
59
On command
From RCO
08
11
22
25
31
34
35
38
46
49
14-45
The Fire Team Falling Plates Assessment

14116. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is designed to replicate
engagements after short periods of burst activity that are likely to be encountered on
operations.
14117. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on various types of ranges where the
use of falling plates is permitted.
14118. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 5 minutes to fire.
14120. Ammunition. 40 rounds per fire team.
14121. Targetry. 10 x 300mm square white targets per team. The targets must fall
when hit and be placed in a straight line approximately 300mm apart.
14122. Scoring. The fire team to knock down all the targets in the quickest time
will be declared the winner. If fire teams run out of ammunition before all the targets
are down the one with most targets down will be declared the winner. If the times for
getting all targets down are exactly the same the winners will be based upon the fire
team who return the most unfired rounds.
14123. Standards. To achieve the required Operational Marksmanship Standard the
fire team must knock down all the targets with their 40 rounds within 2 minutes.
14124. Explanatory Notes. The assessment is fired on a knockout principle, all
byes being in the first round. Fire Teams will compete against each other in all rounds.
Teams will draw for lanes.
14-46
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
200m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds per Firer
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
10 x 300m white plates.

2 Minutes
300m firing point.
Order Load, adopt the prone position, stand by go.
On the word of command go the fire teams are to run to the 200m
firing point adopt the prone position, make ready and engage targets
until they are all down, they have run out of ammunition or the
opposing fire team has knocked down all targets.
Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear, (once clear) ease
springs.
Range staff will declare the winners.
Pick up brass and return to the 300m firing point or marshalling
area
14-47
The Fire Team Combat Snap Shooting Assessment

14125. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a two practice shoot
designed to replicate engagements likely to be encountered on operations.
details.
14128. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes to fire both phases.
14131. Targetry. Direct liaison with Range Control must take place to establish firing
lanes and targets to be used. SARTS maybe used for phase 1 but a hand held fig
11/12 is recommended for phase 2. If FETs are used the butts cannot be manned at
the same time (Pam 21, page 4-33, para 04173c).
Phase 1, 15 x Fig 12.
Phase 2, 1 x Fig 12 and 1 x Fig 11 per team.
SARTS 2 x Fig 12s in each lane.
14132. Scoring. Phase 1. Butt cleared in 25 seconds or less 500 points. Deduct 10
points for each multiple of 5 seconds over 25 before butt was cleared. Maximum time
allowed is 75 seconds. Example butt cleared in 52 seconds, 27 seconds more than 25
seconds. 27 divided by full or part of multiples of 5 = 6. 6 x 10 points deducted =60.
500 60 = a score of 440. Add 5 points for each round handed back after phase 1.
Example 13 rounds returned = 65. Add Score from timed assessment (450) to score
from rounds handed back (65) = score of 515 for phase 1. The Clock can not be
stopped until all members of the fire team are on the firing point in the prone position.
14-48
a.
If butts are not cleared no points are awarded for returned ammunition.
Time for
All Targets Hit
Points
25 seconds or less
500
26 30 seconds
490
31 - 35 seconds
480
36 40 seconds
470
41 45 seconds
460
46 50 seconds
450
51 55 seconds
440
56 60 seconds
430
61 65 seconds
420
66 70 seconds
410
71 75 seconds
400
No of Rounds
Returned
No of Rounds
x5
Team Score
(b) + (d)
b. Column (a) is the scoring guide start point. Once the time for all targets
hit has been identified, move across the respective row until a final score has
been identified and column (e) has been completed.
c.
Phase 2. 5 or 4 points per hit.
14133. Standards. To achieve the required standard the team must achieve the OMS
phases may be fired again.
Ser
Practice
1
300m
2
200m
2
Pass
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
10
60%
405
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
675
10
60%
120
200
525
875

14-49
b. Phase 1. Three obstacles are to be used, placed at 23 metres (25

yards) intervals between the 400m and 300m firing points. The fire team go
under the first which is a pole approx 600mm high, then over the second, a
pole of approx 1000mm high and over the third, a wall of approx 1500mm
high. The obstacles need to be securely pegged down.
c. All targets are exposed one metre apart or as presented by SARTS (2
in each consecutive lane).
d.
Phase 2. All firers are to engage the same target.
e.
Scores will be given at the end of each phase.
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds per firer
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
A target appears every 5 seconds. Each target is with- drawn when
hit. A fresh target can only be exposed if 1 or more targets remain
exposed. Targets will appear from the left and be exposed in sequential
order.
400m firing point.
Order Load, adopt the prone position, watch out.
When the first target appears the fire team is to run to the 300m firing
point navigating obstacles as described in the notes. Adopt the prone
position, make ready and engage exposed targets. Targets Fall when
Hit.
springs.
Range staff will collect and count unfired ammunition and calculate
scores for phase 1.
Pick up brass and return to the 400m firing point or marshalling
area
Or send immediately to phase 2.
14-50
The Fire Team Combat Snap Shooting Assessment

Time Chart
Practice
Range
Target Frame
300m
15 x Fig 12
1 metre apart
200m
Fig 12
Fig 11
Fig 11
Fig 12
Fig 12
Fig 11
Fig 12
Fig 11
Fig 11
Fig 12
Timings
Up
Down
0
05
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
1.00
1.05
1.10
1.15
Fall
When
Hit
05
20
32
50
1.00
1.19
1.26
1.54
2.10
2.20
1.20 - All
Tgts Down
10
24
36
55
1.05
1.23
1.31
1.58
2.14
2.25
14-51
The Fire Team Close Combat Assessment

14135. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous single practice
shoot designed to replicate engagements likely to be encountered on operations.
14136. Ranges. The assessment must be fired on a 100 metre range with a swivel
target mechanism with up to 4 targets per lane.
details.
14139. Organisation. The assessment is designed to be fired by fire teams that
should be organised as follows:
Nominated Fire Team Commander (Rifle)
2 x Riflemen
1 x LSW Firer.
14142. Targetry. 4 x Fig 11 per firer.
14143. Scoring. 5, 4, 3, 2 points.
14144. Standards. To achieve the required standard the team must achieve the
OMS requirement. Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement will constitute failure
of the assessment.
Ser
Practice
1
(100 to 25m)
OMS Requirement
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
160
60%
480
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
800

b.
Magazines are to be loaded as follows:

1 x magazine containing 10 rounds
1 x magazine containing 30 rounds
14-52
c.
Firers are to change magazines on completion of exposure 1.
d. Commanders should conduct a non firing mission rehearsal on a

suitable piece of ground before the assessment.
Assessment Details
Practice 1.
Range/Positioning
100m to 25m
Ammunition
40 rounds per firer
Target/ Exposure
Fig 11
Instructions
3m behind the 100m firing point. Order Load, ready, adopt the
kneeling position, watch out.
Practice 1 (Continued).
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standing Supported
EXPOSURE 1
Left Fig 11
1 x 15 second exposure in lanes 1 and 2.
10 seconds after the command Watch Out there will be a 15 second
exposure of the Fig 11 target in lanes 1 and 2. The firers are to move
onto the 100m firing point and engage their own target with a maximum
of 10 rounds.
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standing Supported
EXPOSURE 2
Left Fig 11
1 x 15 second exposure in lanes 4 and 5.
Immediately on completion of exposure 1 there will be a 15 second
of 10 rounds.
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling Supported
EXPOSURE 3
2nd Left Fig 11
1 x 20 second exposure for lanes 1 and 2.
of 10 rounds.
14-53
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling Supported
EXPOSURE 4
2nd Left Fig 11
of 10 rounds.
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling or Squatting
EXPOSURE 5
2nd Right Fig 11
of 10 rounds.
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Kneeling or Squatting
EXPOSURE 6
2nd Right Fig 11
of 10 rounds.
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-54
Standing
EXPOSURE 7
Right Fig 11
of 10 rounds.
Range/Positioning
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Standing
EXPOSURE 8
Right Fig 11
of 10 rounds.
springs
Under control of the range staff move forward and take scores.
The Fire Team Close Combat Assessment

Time Chart
Practice
Range
Target Frame
100m
1 and 2
4 and 5
1 and 2
4 and 5
1 and 2
4 and 5
1 and 2
4 and 5
75m
50m
25m
Timings
Up
Down
10
26
42
1.03
1.24
1.45
2.06
2.27
26
42
1.03
1.24
1.45
2.06
2.27
2.48
14-55
The Fire Team Attack Assessment

14146. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous six phase
14147. Ranges. The fire team attack assessment can be fired on a gallery range.
details.
14150. Organisation. The assessment is designed to allow 3 x fire teams to fire on
a 12 lane range. The assessment can be fired with Rifles and a LSW as part of the fire
team, split into two pairs. Fire teams should be organised as follows:
a.
Sect Comd/2IC (Rifle).Lane 1, 2 or 3.
b.
2 x Riflemen.Lane 1, 2 or 3.
c.
1 x LSW Gunner. Lane 4.
14151. Rules.
applied.
c. Any unfired rounds in any phase may not be fired during subsequent
phases.
magazines of 10 rounds. 10 rounds will initially be issued for Phase 1 only. The
remainder will be issued when the section arrive at the HLS during Phase 2.
14153. Scoring.
a. All Phases Fig 11 and 12, 5 and 4 points per hit. Triple Fig or SARTS
suppression Fig 11, 5, 4 or 2 points per hit.
b. Phase 2. 100 points. Any member of the fire team failing to complete
the CASEVAC and ammo re-supply in the allocated time will be deemed
to have failed the assessment and the fire team will complete the shoot
without those individuals that failed phase 2. Additionally the fire team will be
deducted 25 points for each individual failure in phase 2.
14-56
constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the
entire assessment should be fired again.
Ser
Phase
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1
40
60%
120
200
Phase 2
NA
NA
NA
NA
Phase 3
40
60%
120
200
Phase 4
40
60%
120
200
Phase 5
40
60%
120
200
Phase 6
40
60%
120
200
600
1000
OMS Requirement
Pass

each phase.
c. 1 x simulated casualty is required at the 300m firing point, 1 per Fire
Team and each weighing approx 75kg.
d.
3 x weighted ammunition boxes are required at the 600m firing point.
e. Movement between firing points will be in bounds by pairs within the

fire team under the overall control of the fire team commander. The initial 1
second exposure will be the signal for the first pair to move forward 35 metres
and take cover (prone). Once the first pair are down the next pair will move
forward 70 metres and take cover (prone). Once the second pair are down
the first pair will move directly onto the next firing point followed by the second
pair. Pairs may only move forward once the preceding pairs are in the prone
position.
f.
14156. Range Rigging.

a.
All Lanes
Triple Fig 11(frame)Fig 11, Fig 12
b.
All lanes.
(SARTS Fig 11 left Fig 12 right)
14-57
Assessment Details
Phase 1.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Fig 12
1 exposure of 10 seconds followed by 5 x 3 second exposures with
Order Load, ready, adopt the prone position, watch and shoot.
On the appearance of the first exposure firers are to fire 5 rounds.
Firers are then to fire one round at each of the remaining five
exposures.
Targets Up and Hold
Post last exposure order Man down
Phase 2. Casevac
Range/Positioning
300m-600m
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As soon as the targets from phase 1 go down the Fire Team have 5
minutes to recover the casualty (out of contact) to the HLS (600m FP),
conduct an ammunition re-supply and collect 3 full ammunition boxes.
At the 600m point and 5 minutes after the last exposure in phase one
order Watch out.
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-58
4 x Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11)

1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 6 second exposures
with irregular intervals.
A one second exposure will be the signal for the Fire Team to move to
500m in bounds (see explanatory notes) 60 seconds later, there will be
5 x 6 second exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 2
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
300m Fire Trench / (Prone if FT not available).
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Fig 11
1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 1 x 20 second exposure.
1 x 20 second exposures of the targets which is to be engaged with 10
rounds. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
The Three ammunition boxes are to be left at the 300m FP.
Phase 6.
Range/Positioning
200m LSW Prone Riflemen - Kneeling/ Squatting.
Ammunition
10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Fig 12
rounds. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
Post phase Order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear,
(once clear) ease springs, return to 600m pick up brass and await
scores
14-59
Fire Team Attack Assessment Time Chart

Phase
Range
Lanes
300m
1-2-3-4
2
3
CASEVAC
Target Frame
Down
Fig 12
Up and Hold
05
20
31
43
1.01
1.16
16
24
35
47
1.05
1.20
6.25
7.27
7.43
7.59
8.13
8.26
8.48
9.50
10.03
10.15
10.27
10.39
11.00
12.02
12.39
13.41
13.55
14.04
14.20
14.30
6.26
7.35
7.51
8.06
8.21
8.33
8.49
9.58
10.10
10.22
10.34
10.46
11.01
12.23
12.40
13.47
14.00
14.09
14.25
14.35
500m
1-2-3-4
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression
Up and Hold
400m
1-2-3-4
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression
Up and Hold
300m
1-2-3-4
200m
1-2-3-4
Fig 11
Up and Hold
Fig 12
Up and Hold
14-60
Timings
Up
The Fire Team Night Engagement Assessment

14157. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a three phase shoot
designed to replicate night time engagements likely to be encountered on operations.
14158. Ranges. The assessment can be fired on a CGR or gallery range. The stop
butt should be evenly illuminated to silhouette the targets. Each fire team will require a
bank of four targets. If using SARTS The Target illumination modules should be used.
details.
14160. Timings. Each detail will take approximately 20 minutes.
14162. Ammunition. 120 rounds per fire team.
1 x Fig 11.
1 x Fig 12.
14164. Scoring. 4 points per hit.
14165. Standards. To achieve the required standard the fire team must achieve
the OMS at each firing distance (see table below). Failure to achieve the total
OMS requirement will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the
assessment individual stages or practices may be fired again.
Ser
Phase
1
200m
2
100m
3
100m
2
3
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
40
60%
120
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
200
40
60%
120
200
40
60%
120
200
480
800
Pass
14166. Explanatory Notes

a. Once loaded all safety catches are applied before any movement
between firing positions.
b.
Scores will be given at the end of the shoot.
14-61
Assessment Details
Phase 1.
Range/Positioning
200m Fire trench. Standing supported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11.
5 x 5 second exposure with irregular intervals.
Order Dress in to the fire trench, load, Ready, adopt the standing
supported position, watch and shoot.
On the appearance of the targets firers are to engage each exposure.
Any number of shots may be fired at each exposure. Targets Up and
Hold.
Post practice Order Dress out of the fire trench under control
of the range staff advance to 100m. Adopt the standing alert
position, watch out
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
100m Standing alert to kneeling or squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12.
On the appearance of the
targets firers are to adopt the kneeling or squatting position and fire
one shot at each exposure.
Firers are to return to the standing alert position after each exposure.
Post practice Order Adopt the kneeling or squatting position,
watch out
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
100m Kneeling or squatting to standing unsupported
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-62
Fig 12.
On the appearance of the target firers are to break cover by adopting
the standing position and engage each exposure. Any number of shots
may be fired at each exposure. Targets Up and Hold.
(once clear) ease springs, pick up brass and await scores
THE Fire Team Night Engagement Assessment

Time Chart
Phase
Range
Target Frame
200m
Fig 11
Up and Hold
100m
Fig 12
Fall when Hit
100m
Fig 12
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
05
16
30
41
55
05
21
33
46
57
1.11
1.22
1.36
1.50
2.01
05
21
34
48
11
22
36
47
1.01
10
26
38
51
1.02
1.16
1.27
1.41
1.55
2.06
12
28
41
55
14-63
The Fire Team Advance To Contact Assessment

14168. Ranges. The Fire Team advance to contact assessment can be fired on a
Gallery Range.
details.
14171. Organisation. The assessment is designed to allow 3 x Fire Teams to fire
on a 12 lane range. The assessment should be fired with an LSW as part of the Fire
Team. Fire Team should be organised as follows.
a.
Sec Comd / 2IC (Rifle). Lane 1,2 o r 3.
b.
2 x Riflemen. Lane 1,2 or 3.
c.
1 x LSW Gunner. Lane 4.
The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in five phases.

14172. Rules.
applied.
phases.
14173. Ammunition.
a.
Riflemen 20 rounds.
b.
Gunner 50 rounds.
14174. Scoring. Phase 1. Any member of the section failing to complete the Approach
March in the allocated time will be deemed to have failed the assessment and the fire
team will complete the shoot without those individuals that failed phase 1. Additionally
the section will be penalised - 50 points for each individual failure in phase 1.
a. All Phases Fig 11 and 12. 5 or 4 points per hit. Triple Fig or SARTS
suppression Fig 11 5 ,4 or 2 points per hit.
14-64
14175. Standards. To achieve the required standard the section must achieve the
OMS for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement
will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
60%
150
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
250
Phase 2
2 x 10 (20)
60%
30
50
Phase 3a
1 x 30
60%
10
Phase 3b
3 x 10
1 x 30
60%
10
Phase 4
60%
87
Gunners 145
Phase 5
60%
81
120
Riflemen 135
200
480
800
Ser
Phase
1
2
3 x 10
Remaining
from Phases
3a and 3b
10 (80)
OMS Requirement
Pass

each phase.
c. Phase 1 of the assessment consists of a section approach march of
2.4km in under 18 minutes.
d.

a.
Lane 1 - 3 -
Triple Fig 11, Fig 12.
b.
Lane 4
Triple Fig 11, Fig 11.
c.
SARTS
Fig 11 left, Fig 12 right.
14-65
Assessment Details
Phase 1. Approach March
Range/Positioning
610m
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
18 minutes to complete the approach march plus 2 minutes to form up

10m behind the 600m firing point.
Fire Team will be formed up in the FOB with all equipment for the
assessment.
On the command Go the section will commence the 2.4km approach
march following the designated route.
20 minutes after the command go Order Load, ready, phase 2 watch
out.
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
600m Prone
Ammunition
LSW Gunner 10 rounds

Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x 1 second exposure followed by 2 x 10 second exposures with a 5

second interval.
A one second exposure will be the signal for the gunner to advance
onto the 600m firing point and fire 10 rounds (single shot) at the two
exposures.
As soon as the gunner opens fire the remainder of the fire team can
move onto the 600m firing point.
Targets Up and Hold
Phase 3a.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
Riflemen - 10 rounds LSW Gunners 30 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-66
2 x Triple Fig 11 (SARTS suppression Fig 11) (left).

The appearance of the targets is the signal for a pair to advance to the
500m firing point and open fire. Each firer MUST only engage their own
target with up to 10 rounds.
Targets Fall when Hit
As soon as a pair open fire. The remainder of the fire team can
advance to 500m and wait until their targets are exposed in phase 3b.
Phase 3b.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400m Prone
Riflemen - 10 rounds
Gunners 30 rounds
2 x Triple Fig 11 Fig (SARTS suppression Fig 11) (right)
The appearance of the targets is the signal for a pair to advance to the
400m firing point and open fire. Each firer MUST only engage their own
target with up to 10 rounds.
LSW Gunner is to fire single shots.
As soon as a pair open fire The remainder of the fire team can
advance to 400m and wait until the targets are exposed for phase 4.
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Remaining rounds from phases 3a and 3b

3 x Fig 12
1 x Fig 11
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x 1 second exposure of 3 x Fig 12 (Riflemen) followed 30 seconds

later by 2 x 6 second exposures. Followed 20 seconds later by
2 x 15 second exposure of 1 x Fig 11 (gunners).
The appearance of a one second exposure is the signal for the
riflemen to advance to the 300m firing point. 30 seconds later there will
be 2 x 6 second exposures of 3 x Fig 12. Not more than 9 rounds
can be fired.
Targets Up and Hold
The LSW gunner may advance to the 300m firing point as soon as the
riflemen open fire at their first exposure.
20 seconds after the second rifleman exposure there will be 2 x
exposures of 15 seconds of 1 x Fig 11. The LSW gunner may fire not
more that 29 rounds (in bursts of 2-3 rounds) at these exposures.
Targets Up and Hold
14-67
Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
200m LSW Prone Riflemen Kneeling/ squatting.
Ammunition
Riflemen - 10 rounds Gunner 10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4x Fig 12
1 x 1 second exposure of 3 x Fig 12 followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 4
second exposures.
The appearance of a one second exposure will be the signal for the
fire team to advance to the 200m firing point. 30 seconds later there
will be 5 x 4 second exposures. Firers are to engage with 2 rounds per
exposure. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
(once clear) ease springs, return to 600m point, pick up brass and
await scores
The Fire Team Advance To Contact Assessment

Time Chart
Phase
Range
Lanes
Target Frame
2.4km
600m
3a
500m
1-2
3b
400m
3-4
300m
1-2- 3
Triple Fig 11 (SARTS

suppression Fig 11)
Up and Hold
suppression Fig 11)
Fall when Hit
suppression Fig 11)
Fall when Hit
Fig 12 Up and Hold
Fig 11 Up and Hold
14-68
200m
4
1-2-3-4
Fig 12
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
05
16
31
51
06
27
44
1.32
1.35
2.16
2.35
3.07
3.20
2.36
3.14
3.27
3.48
4.10
4.36
5.08
5.20
5.31
5.45
6.05
4.04
4.26
4.37
5.14
5.26
5.37
5.51
6.11
The Section Advance to Contact Assessment

14179. Ranges. The section advance to contact assessment can be fired on a
Gallery Range.
details.
14182. Organisation. The assessment is designed to allow a section to fire on a
12 lane range. The assessment should be fired with an LSW as part of the section.
Sections should be organised as follows:
Sec Comd lane 3 / 2IC lane 10
4 x Riflemen lanes 1, 2, 11 and 12
2 x LSW Gunners lanes 4 and 9
The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in five phases.
14183. Rules.
applied.
phases.
14184. Ammunition. Riflemen 20 rounds. Gunners 50 rounds.
14185. Scoring. Phase 1 = Any member of the section failing to complete the
Approach March in the allocated time will be deemed to have failed the assessment
and the section will complete the shoot without those individuals that failed phase 1.
Additionally the section will be penalised - 50 points for each individual failure in phase
1.
All Phases Fig 11 and Fig 12, 5 or 4 points per hit. Triple Fig or SARTS suppression
Fig 11,5,4 or 2 points per hit.
14-69
14186. Standards. To achieve the required standard the section must achieve the
OMS for each phase (see table below). Failure to achieve the total OMS requirement
will constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the
Total
Rounds
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
60%
300
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
500
Phase 2
2 x 10 (20)
60%
60
100
Phase 3a
60%
12
20
Phase 3b
60%
12
20
Phase 4
60%
174
Gunners 290
Phase 5
1 x 30
3 x 10
1 x 30
3 x 10
Remaining
from Phases
3a and 3b
10 (80)
60%
162
240
Riflemen 270
400
960
1600
Ser
Phase
1
2
OMS Requirement
Pass
14187. Explanatory Notes

each phase.
c.
14-70
Lanes 1 3 & 10 - 12
Frame held Triple Fig 11, Fig 12
Lanes 4 & 9
Frame held Triple Fig 11, Fig 11
SARTS
Fig 11 left, Fig 12 right.
Assessment Details
Phase 1. Approach March
Range/Positioning
610m
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
18 minutes to complete the approach march plus 2 minutes to form up

on the FUP (10 metres to the rear of the 600m firing point).
Section will be formed up in the FOB with all equipment for the
assessment.
On the command Go the section will commence the 2.4km approach
march following the designated route.
20 minutes after the command Go order Load, ready, phase 2
watch out.
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
600m Prone
Ammunition
LSW Gunners 10 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
2 x Triple Fig 11or SARTS suppression Fig 11

A one second exposure will be the signal for the gunners to advance
onto the 600m firing point and fire 10 rounds (single shot) at the two
exposures.
As soon as the gunners open fire the remainder of the section can
move onto the 600m firing point.
Targets Up and Hold
Phase 3a.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
Riflemen - 10 rounds LSW Gunners 30 rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
4 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11

1 x 40 second exposure (left Fire Team).
The appearance of the targets is the signal for left Fire Team to
advance to the 500m firing point and open fire.
Each firer MUST only engage their own target with up to 10 rounds.
LSW Gunners to fire single shots.
As soon as the left Fire Team open fire the right Fire Team can
advance to 500m and wait until their targets are exposed in phase 3b.
14-71
Phase 3b.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
400m Prone
Gunners 30 rounds
4 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11
1 x 40 second exposure (right Fire Team)
The appearance of the targets is the signal for right Fire Team to
advance to the 400m firing point and open fire.
Each firer MUST only engage their own target with up to 10 rounds.
LSW Gunners to fire single shots.
As soon as the right Fire Team open fire the left Fire Team can
advance to 400m and wait until the targets are exposed for phase 4.
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
Remaining rounds from phases 3a and 3b

6 x Fig 12
2 x Fig 11
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-72
1 x 1 second exposure of 6 x Fig 12 (Riflemen) followed 30 seconds

later by 2 x 6 second exposures. Followed 20 seconds later by 2 x 15
second exposure of 2 x Fig 11 (gunners).
The appearance of a one second exposure is the signal for the
riflemen to advance to the 300m firing point. 30 seconds later there will
be 2 x 6 second exposures of 6 x Fig 12. Not more than 9 rounds can
be fired.
Targets Up and Hold The LSW gunners may advance to the 300m
firing point as soon as the riflemen open fire at their first exposure.
20 seconds after the second rifleman exposure there will be 2 x
exposures of 15 seconds of 2 x Fig 11. The LSW gunners may fire not
more than 29 rounds (in bursts of 2-3 rounds).
Targets Up and Hold
Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
200m LSW Prone Riflemen Kneeling/ squatting

Gunners 10 rounds
8 x Fig 12
1 x 1 second exposure of 8 x Fig 12 followed 30 seconds later by 5 x 4
second exposures.
The appearance of a one second exposure will be the signal for the
section to advance to the 200m firing point. 30 seconds later there will
be 5 x 4 second exposures of the targets. Firers are to engage with 2
rounds per exposure. LSW to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
Targets Up and Hold
(once clear) ease springs, return to 600m point, pick up brass and
await scores
The Section Advance To Contact Assessment

Time Chart
Phase
Range
Lanes
Target Frame
2.4km
600m
4 and 9
3a
500m
1,2,3,4
3b
400m
9,10,11,12
300m
1,2,3,and
10, 11, 12

suppression Fig 11)
Up and Hold
suppression Fig 11)
Fall when Hit
suppression Fig 11)
Fall when Hit
Fig 12
Up and Hold
4 and 9
5
200m
1,2,3,4
9,10,11,12
Fig 11
Up and Hold
8 x Fig 12
Timings
Up
Down
05
16
32
51
06
27
43
1.32
1.35
2.16
2.35
3.07
3.20
2.36
3.14
3.27
3.48
4.10
4.36
5.08
5.20
5.31
5.45
6.05
4.04
4.26
4.37
5.14
5.26
5.37
5.51
6.11
14-73
The Section Attack Assessment

14189. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous six phase
14190. Ranges. The section attack assessment can be fired on a Gallery Range.
details.
14193. Organisation. The assessment is designed to allow a section to fire on a
12 lane range. The assessment should be fired with Rifles and LSW as part of the
section, split into two equal fire teams. Sections should be organised as follows:
Sec Comd lane 3 / 2IC lane 10
4 x Riflemen lanes 1, 2, 11 and 12
2 x LSW Gunners lanes 4 and 9
14194. The assessment is a continuous shoot conducted in six phases.
14195. Rules.
applied.
phases.
magazines of 10 rounds. 10 rounds will initially be issued for Phase 1 only. The
remainder will be issued when the section arrive at the HLS during Phase 2.
14197. Scoring.
a.
All Phases Fig 11 and Fig 12, 5 and 4. Triple fig 5, 4 and 2 points per hit.
b. Phase 2 = 200 points. Any member of the section failing to complete the
CASE- VAC and ammo re-supply in the allocated time will be deemed to have
failed the assessment and the section will complete the shoot without those
individuals that failed phase 2. Additionally the section will be penalised - 50
points for each individual failure in phase 2.
14-74
constitute failure of the assessment. Due to the nature of the shoot conditions the
Ser
Phase
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Phase 1
80
60%
240
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
400
Phase 2
60%
200
200
Phase 3
80
60%
240
400
Phase 4
80
60%
240
400
Phase 5
80
60%
240
400
Phase 6
80
60%
Pass
240
400
1320
2200

each phase.
2 simulated casualties are required at the 300m firing point, 1 per Fire
Team and each weighing approx 75kg.
6 x weighted ammunition boxes are required at the 600m firing point.
c. Movement between firing points will be in bounds by Fire Teams within
the fire teams under the overall control of the section commander. The initial
1 second exposure will be the signal for the first team to move forward
35 metres and take cover (prone). Once the first Fire Team are down the
next Fire Team will move forward 70 metres and take cover (prone). Once
the second team are down the first Fire Team will move directly onto the
next firing point followed by the rear Fire Team. A Fire Team may only move
forward once the preceding Fire Team are in the prone position.
d.

AlL Lanes
Triple fig 11, Fig 11, Fig 12.
SARTS
Fig 11 left, fig 12 right

14-75
Assessment Details
Phase 1.
Range/Positioning
300m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Fig 12.
1 exposure of 10 seconds followed by 5 x 3 second exposures.
Order Load, ready, watch and shoot
On the appearance of the first exposure firers are to fire 5 rounds.
Firers are then to fire one round at each of the remaining five
exposures.
Post last exposure order Man down
Phase 2. Casevac
Range/Positioning
300m to 600m
Ammunition
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
As soon as the targets from phase 1 go down the section have 5

minutes to recover the two casualties (out of contact) to the HLS (600m
FP), conduct an ammunition re-supply and collect 6 full ammunition
boxes.
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
500m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-76
8 x Triple Fig 11(SARTS suppression triple 11)

1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 6 second exposures.
5 minutes after the last exposure in phase one order Watch out.
A one second exposure will be the signal for the Section to move to
500m in bounds 60 seconds later, there will be 5 x 6 second exposures
of the targets which are to be engaged with 2 rounds per exposure.
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Triple Fig 11. (SARTS suppression triple 11)

A one second exposure will be the signal for the Section to move
to 400m in bounds. 60 seconds later, there will be 5 x 6 second
exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 2 rounds per
exposure.
Phase 5.
Range/Positioning
300m Fire Trench/ (Prone if FT not available)
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Fig 11.
exposures of the targets which is to be engaged with 10 rounds. LSW
to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
The six ammunition boxes are to be left at the 300m FP.
Phase 6.
Range/Positioning
200m LSW Prone Riflemen - Kneeling/ Squatting
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
8 x Fig 12.
1 second flash followed 60 seconds later by 5 x 4 second exposures.
exposures of the targets which are to be engaged with 10 rounds. LSW
to fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds.
(once clear) ease springs, return to 600m pick up brass and await
scores
14-77
The Section Attack Assessment

Time Chart
Phase
Range
Lanes
300m
All TGTS
2
3
CASEVAC
Target Frame
Up
Down
Fig 12
Up and Hold
05
20
31
43
1.01
1.16
16
24
35
47
1.05
1.20
6.25
7.27
7.43
7.59
8.13
8.26
8.48
9.50
10.03
10.15
10.27
10.39
11.00
12.02
12.39
13.41
13.55
14.04
14.20
14.30
6.26
7.35
7.51
8.06
8.21
8.33
8.49
9.58
10.10
10.22
10.34
10.46
11.01
12.23
12.40
13.47
14.00
14.09
14.25
14.35
500m
All TGTS
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression
Up and Hold
400m
All TGTS
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression
Up and Hold
300m
All TGTS
200m
All TGTS
Fig 11
Up and Hold
Fig 12
Up and Hold
14-78
Timings
The Machine Gun Assessment

14201. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a four phase shoot designed
to replicate engagements likely to be encountered by machine gunners on operations.
14202. Ranges. The assessment must be fired on a gallery range. Each firer will
require 2 Lanes. Phase 1 will be fired on his left hand lane. During the run down
from 400m 300m the gunners are to move across to their right hand lane for the
remainder of the shoot.
details.
14205. Rules.
applied with the LSW. LMGs must be made safe.
14206. Ammunition. 80 rounds per firer, in one magazine/belt of 30 rounds, two
magazines/belts of 20 rounds and one magazine/belt of 10 rounds.
14207. Targetry. Each firer will require:
2 x Triple Fig 11, 1 left lane and 1 right lane.
Fig 11 left, fig 12 right.
14208. Scoring.
Phase 1 and 2 - 5, 4 or 2 points per hit.
Phase 3 and 4 - 5 or 4 points per hit.
14-79
phases may be fired again.
Ser
Phase
1a and 1b
400m
2
300m
3
200m
4
100m
2
3
4
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
30
60%
90
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
150
20
60%
60
100
20
60%
60
100
10
60%
30
50
240
400
Pass

a. Once loaded the RCO is to ensure LSWs apply safety catches before
any movement between firing positions. LMGs are to be made safe.
b.
Scores will be given at the end of phase 4.
Assessment Details
Phase 1a.
Range/Positioning
500m to 400m Rundown Prone
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x Triple Fig 11 or SARTS suppression Fig 11.

Order Load, adopt the prone position, phase 1a, watch out.
On the appearance of the target firers are to advance to the
400m firing point, make ready and open fire in bursts of 2-3 rounds
with 20 rounds.
The targets will be exposed for 45 seconds.
Post phase
Order Phase 1b, watch and shoot.
14-80
Phase 1b.
Range/Positioning
400m Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions

On the next five exposures of the target firers are to open fire in bursts
of 2-3 rounds at each exposure, with up to 10 rounds.
Post phase
Order Phase 2, watch out.
Phase 2.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 exposure of 1 second and an interval of 30 seconds.
Instructions
5 x 5 second exposures
On the appearance of the target firers are to advance to the
300m firing point, make ready (if required) and engage the targets in
bursts of 2-3 rounds with up to 20 rounds.
Post phase
Phase 3.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
20 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 x Fig 11.
1 exposure of 45 seconds.
On the appearance of the target firers are to advance to the 200m
firing point, make ready (if required) and open fire in bursts of 2-3
rounds with up to 20 rounds. Targets Up and Hold.
Post phase
14-81
Phase 4.
Range/Positioning
Ammunition
10 Rounds
1 x Fig 11.
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
1 exposure of 1 second and an interval of 30 seconds.

5 x 3 second exposures
On the appearance of the target firers are to advance to the 100m
firing point, make ready (if required) and engage the targets in bursts
of 2-3 rounds with up to 10 rounds.
Post phase
Order Unload, for inspection port arms (or prepare guns for
inspection), show clear (once clear) ease springs, pick up brass
return to the 500m point, await scores
The Machine Gun Assessment

Time Chart
Phase
Range
1a
400m
1b
400m
300m
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression Fig 11
Up and Hold
200m
100m
Fig 11
Up and Hold
Fig 11
Up and Hold
14-82
Target Frame
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression Fig 11
Up and Hold
Triple Fig 11
Or SARTS
suppression Fig 11
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
05
51
1.01
1.13
1.25
1.34
1.43
2.08
2.39
2.52
3.06
3.16
3.30
3.51
1.05
1.17
1.29
1.38
1.47
2.09
2.45
2.58
3.12
3.22
3.36
4.37
4.52
5.23
5.34
5.43
5.55
6.05
4.53
5.27
5.38
5.47
5.59
6.09
The Sniper Assessment

14211. Outline of the Assessment. The assessment is a continuous four phase
14212. Ranges. Phase 1 of the assessment can be fired on a 600 m gallery range.
Phase 2 can be fired on a 900 metre/1000 yard gallery range.
details.
14215. Organisation.
a. The assessment is designed to be fired with snipers operating as pairs.
Each sniper will fire each phase with the No 2 acting as a spotter. They will
then repeat the shoot in reversed roles. The shoot can be conducted over a
number of days.
b.
Issued spotting scopes and binoculars are permitted throughout.
14216. Rules.
a.
The assessment is only to be fired by qualified snipers.
b. Firers must have zeroed their weapons and passed the ACMT for their
c. A non scoring 5 round check group is to be fired before the
commencement of Practice 1.
d. Once made ready, all movement must be conducted with safety catches
applied.
e.
Only one shot can be fired at each exposure.
14217. Ammunition.
Check Zero 5 rds, Phase 1 35 rds, Phase 2 30 rds
14218. Scoring. 5 and 4 points per hit. If bonus shot 10 and 4 points per hit.
constitute failure of the Assessment. Due to the nature of the assessment conditions
14-83
Ser
Phase
Total
Rounds
OMS Requirement
% Hits
Score
Highest
Possible
Score (HPS)
Phase 1a
40%
10
Phase 1b
60%
27
45
Phase 1c
10
60%
30
50
Phase 1d
40%
10
Phase 1e
60%
12
20
Phase 1f
10
60%
Pass
30
50
111
185
Phase 2a
40%
10
Phase 2b
60%
27
45
Phase 2c
10
60%
30
50
10
Phase 2d
10
60%
30
50
87
155
Pass

and movement between firing positions.
each phase.
c.
Scores will be given at the end of each Phase.

Phase 1
1 x Fig 12
1 x Fig 14
Phase 2
1 x Fig 11
SARTS Phase 1 Fig 12 Right, Fig 14 Left.
SARTS Phase 2 (targetry change) Fig 11 Left.
14-84
Assessment Details
Preliminary Zeroing Shoot
Phase. Check Zero
Range/Positioning
100 yards Prone
Ammunition
5 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
1 x 25mm square aiming mark.
Instructions
Fire a five round group to check zero.
Phase 1a. Deliberate/1st Shot Bonus

Range/Positioning
600 yds Prone

Sniper pair 2 m behind firing point.
Ammunition
1 Round
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 frame held.

1 x 3 minute exposure.
Order Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 1 a, watch
out.
On the appearance of the target the sniper has 3 minutes to crawl into
position, set sights for range and wind and fire 1 round.
After all firers have fired, or targets down.
Order Apply safety catches indicate shot with a spotting disc or
SARTS for 30 seconds. Give scores. Remove discs and patch out.
Post phase 1a. Order Phase 1b watch and shoot
Phase 1b. Deliberate/Snap

Range/Positioning
600 yds Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 frame held.

1 x 2 minute exposure
Followed 30 seconds later by
Sniper fires 4 rounds at the initial exposure then 1 round at each of the
remaining 5 exposures.
Targets Up and Hold for the 2 min exposure then Fall when Hit.
Post Phase order Unload, for inspection port arms, show clear
(once clear) ease springs, pick up brass, move to 500m, await
scores.
14-85
Phase 1c. Deliberate/Snap

Range/Positioning
500 yds Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 12 frame held.

Order Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 1c, watch and
shoot.
scores.
Phase 1d. Deliberate/1st Shot Bonus

Range/Positioning
400 yds Prone.

Sniper pair 2 m behind firing poin
Ammunition
1 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 14 frame held.

Order Load, ready, adopt the prone position, watch out
Order Apply safety catches indicate shot with a spotting disc for 30
seconds. Give scores. Remove discs and patch out.
Post phase. Order Phase 1e watch and shoot
Phase 1e. Deliberate

Range/Positioning
400 yds Prone
Ammunition
4 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
14-86
Fig 14 frame held.

Sniper fires 2 rounds at each exposure.
(once clear) ease springs, await scores.
Phase 1f. Deliberate/Snap

Range/Positioning
400 yds Sitting/ Kneeling
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 12 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
Order Adopt the sitting or kneeling position,(when in position)
Load, ready, phase 1f watch and shoot
Instructions
Phase 2a. Deliberate/1st Shot Bonus

Range/Positioning
1000 yds Prone Sniper pair 2 m behind firing point
Ammunition
1 Rounds
Target/ Exposure
Instructions
Fig 11 frame held.

Order Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 2 a, watch
out.
Order Apply safety catches indicate shot with a spotting disc for 30
seconds. Give scores. Remove discs and patch out.
Post phase 21a. Order Phase 2b watch and shoot
Phase 2b. Deliberate/Snap

Range/Positioning
1000 yds Prone
Ammunition
9 Rounds
Fig 11 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
14-87
Instructions
scores.
Phase 2c. Deliberate/Snap

Range/Positioning
900 yds Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 11 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
Order Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 2c, watch and
shoot.
Instructions
scores.
Phase 2d. Deliberate/Snap

Range/Positioning
800 yds Prone
Ammunition
10 Rounds
Fig 11 frame held.
Target/ Exposure
Order Adopt the prone position, load, ready, phase 2d, watch and
shoot.
Instructions
14-88
The Sniper Match

Time Chart
Timings
Phase
Range/Target
Up
Down
Prelim
100 yds
Fig 12 with 1 x
25mm aiming mark
Start
05
0
10.05
Check Zero Only
1a
600 yds
Fig 12
Start
.05
0
3.06
Fall when Hit
1b
600 yds
Fig 12
Start
09
0
2.10
2.40
3.05
3.15
4.45
5.25
2.45
3.10
3.20
4.50
5.30
Start
19
0
2.20
2.51
3.35
4.35
5.05
5.55
2.56
3.41
4.40
5.10
6.00
1c
500 yds
Fig 12
Up and Hold
Fall whenHit
Up and Hold
Fall whenHit
1d
400 yds
Fig 14 window
Start
05
0
3.06
1e
400 yds
Fig 14 window
Start
09
49
0
20
1.00
1f
400 yds
Fig 12
Start
14
0
3.14
3.45
4.30
4.38
5.20
5.45
3.50
4.35
4.43
5.25
5.50
Fall whenHit
Start
.05
0
3.06
Fall when Hit
2a
1000 yds
Fig 11
Phase
Range/Target
Fall when Hit

Up and Hold
Up and Hold
Timings
Up
Down
14-89
Phase
Range/Target
2c
900 yds
Fig 11
2d
14-90
800 yds
Fig 11
Timings
Up
Down
Start
.05
0
4.06
4.36
5.20
6.54
7.20
7.54
4.42
5.26
7.00
7.26
8.00
Start
.25
0
4.26
4.56
6.00
6.10
6.54
7.40
5.02
6.06
6.16
7.00
7.46
Up and Hold
Fall whenHit
Up and Hold
Fall whenHit

Ospvol12016 Auth DCBT PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Ospvol12016 Auth DCBT PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Army Code No. 71810

Capability Directorate Combat

Operational Shooting Policy

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Army Code No. 71810

Capability Directorate Combat

OPERATIONAL SHOOTING POLICY

Prepared under the direction

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

(Also see notes on page vii)

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Cadet Training Teams....................................................................

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Live Firing Tactical Training (Personal Weapons)........................................... 11-1

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

REFERENCES AND ASSOCIATED PUBLICATIONS

71807 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms

(Personal Weapons), The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm)

71811 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms (Personal

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

0101. The ability to shoot effectively

SCOPE OF OPERATIONAL SHOOTING

PROGRESSION OF SHOOTING TRAINING

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

0106. Following a complete review of Operational Shooting in 2008, it was identified

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Pistol issued to all Arms and Services either as a personal weapon.

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Live Fire Marksmanship

Grouping and Zeroing at 25 m

Live Fire Marksmanship

Applying fire to the centre of a target at

Transition to Live Firing

Operational shooting skills including

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

b. ACMTs. The ACMT is to be fired in accordance with MATTs for the

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

b. DCC Role Regular and Reserve Units. In Regular and Reserve

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

Overall Pass Rates.

First Time Pass Rates.

Standards achieved Pass/Marksman.

Handling Instructions: For MOD Use Only

GUIDE TO COMMANDERS ARMY RIFLE INITIAL TRAINING

LF1 Grouping Prone

LF2 Grouping Prone

LF3 Grouping Other Positions

LF4 Grouping Other Positions

PRAC 1 Stage 1 Consolidation

LF 6 CQM Identifying POA

STAGE 1 GROUPING AND ZEROING

STAGE 2 APPLICATION OF FIRE

LF 7 CQM Accelerated Fire

71807 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms

(Personal Weapons), The SA80 A2 (5.56 mm)

71811 DCC Training Volume II, Skill at Arms (Personal